Home

Alamo Swingtrim Lawn Mower User Manual

1. 3 24 3 23 stepsito Exit the oth meh PE eate d Tear tt e C nos 3 25 3 24 Steps to Clone s nnne senti nnns nnn 3 27 3225 Gloning Additional Hadil6 nier p de E o er e E RE Roe Ee de Rn et ae 3 28 3 26 Steps to Exit the RSS aa a 3 28 3 27 MTS2000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item Defaults sse 3 29 3 28 MTS2000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item Defaults sse nennen 3 30 68P81074C50 vi MTSX RSS TABLE OF CONTENTS cont LIST OF FIGURES 2 1 Equipment Set p tecto adb n a E ete CH E e HUC ett en 2 1 2 2 Hard Disk Directory eiie Idee Rp soph He PRU UE Ee d ae ROUES 2 13 2 3 Diskette Directory TT66 com tei cate idet b cron e deat ates suet rte ee 2 14 2 4 Th Banner Screen iste te Eae E hake NH acelin A Ga ia ela adl pen 2 20 2 5 RUNE ee ee eee 2 21 2 6 The Computer Keyboard eire ERE A T AMHE 2 21 2 7 An RSS Menuism NU hod Mieres uM i oio s oic A b cue 2 24 2 8 Patisserie PM MR c 2 25 2 9 RSS Menu Mapping at a Glance 2 27 2 10 Relationship Between SCreers RETE ue He ROSE GE GI ee D P TE 2 29 2 11 Gharngirig a Fleld Value icc te cr icit soe
2. F4 F6 F4 F3 F7 MDC Hot Mic Tx Period sec ssssssssssesesssssessee enne nenne F4 F6 F4 F3 F7 eee o ees eee tes F4 F6 F4 F5 MDG SYSTEM OPTIONS 2 ane Pe dx dna dadas F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 MDG SYSTEMS e F4 F6 F4 F3 MDG Sel Radio ect obi dete xe lek Fuge Leve edie eee ea dena F8 F2 F7 MDG Sel RadioInhiDIt i cente erre ee ee E utet eria de F8 F3 F5 F9 ublesci ccnl F4 F6 F3 MBG System sic cece tects M F4 F6 F4 F3 MDG Systemi LLLA F4 F6 F4 F3 F7 MDG SySIem 2 1 oed rete tidie e tuse tea Pa tate ta toten eat tae sa stig da F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 MBC Unlimited Calling aA cia i ae F4 F6 F3 F7 MERGE FORM irent iet coat tute detek entia F3 F4 MESSAGETEXT haga ito Iced reste E Lap pete oet leith eet eel ee F9 F7 Stee aie le cea ee ee tere Mee te ae ested F9 F7 MORE EMERGENCY OPTIONS eines seen nna F4 F6 F4 F3 F7 Man Acc Live Dralihng cire A A a iere Bue Le a av Ln dae da dev F4 F3 F4 Man Down Post Alert F4 F3 F2 F7 Mandatory Password hee te be cee esca cu yag tee RARE neces F4 F3 F6 Max Pass
3. nnns 3 13 3 941 Desired Features eee err eie Ana f E e cma 3 13 3 3 2 Major Decisions Involved aiii ennemi nennen nennen 3 13 3 8 3 M High Level Programming 3 13 3 3 4 Step by Step Specific Programming Instructions ssssssseeeens 3 13 3 3 5 MTX8000 9000 Radio Button Switch Menu ltem Defaults 3 15 3 3 6 Read Current Radio s Personality Codeplug 3 17 3 3 7 5 ian eta pe e ra tace de nee dec 3 17 3 3 8 Program the Radio Wide Features First nennen renes 3 17 3 3 9 Steps to ASSIGN Controls sse esent nennen nnne nennt en nnne nnns 3 18 3 3 10 Program the Phone List nnns 3 20 3 3 11 Program a Talkgroup Scan with One List sssssssssssseese eene enne 3 20 3 3 12 Steps to Modify entente nnne nnns 3 21 3 3 13 Program the Zone Channel Features Next ssssssssssssseeeeeeene nennen enne nennen 3 22 3 3 14 Steps to Fill in the Scan List eesssssssesessesesesseseenene 3 23 3 3 15 Program Data into Radio Codeplug ss
4. Disabled UNIVERSAL ID System Type System ID Connect Tone Hz 0 105 88 Access Type Coverage Type Disabled Conversation Type Message Tx Defeat Disabled This Call ID F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F9 ADD PREV NEXT DELETE CHAN MORE SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM ASSIGN OPTIONS TRUNKING SYSTEM Screen for System 2 Type I MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING SYSTEM TRUNKING SYSTEM System Disabled System Type System ID Connect Tone Hz 0 105 88 Access Type Coverage Type Disabled Conversation Type Message Tx Defeat Disabled Dynamic Regrouping Enabled Chan 10 This Call ID F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F9 ADD PREV NEXT DELETE CONTROL MORE SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM CHANNEL OPTIONS TRUNKING SYSTEM Screen for System 2 Type I With Smartnet Features 68P81074C50 6 47 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Type MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING SYSTEM TRUNKING SYSTEM System Key Disabled System Type System ID Individual ID Connect Tone Hz Coverage Type Affiliation Type Dynamic Regrouping Remote Monitor RM Base Time F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE CONTROL MORE EXIT SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM CHANNEL OPTIONS TRUNKING SYSTEM Screen
5. 400 bps DOS Enabled Num Zone Channel Unmute Hold Off ms 550 1 1 1 Coast Time Ms 100 2 Blank Blank 3 Blank Blank F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE EXIT SYS SYS SYS SYS This screen allows you to change view the parameters that pertain to a GE STAR system The settings shown on the screen are only for the system shown PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F7 The AUXILIARY MENU appears 2 3 4 Press F5 The GE STAR SYSTEM screen appears 5 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 6 Ifa field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD SYS Add System allows you to add a GE STAR System F3 PREV SYS Previous System allows you to go to the GE STAR System before this one F4 NEXT SYS Next System allows you to go to the GE STAR System after the current one F5 DELETE SYS Delete System allows you to delete a GE STAR System 6 124 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS System Use the Up Down arrows to scroll or directly enter the desired GE STAR system The number may also be entered d
6. 9410171345 Program Source Factory F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT This screen shows the historical statistics of the radio and the service software such as serial number model number last programmed date programming source etc PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Press F9 The PROGRAMMING HISTORY screen appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 5 13 GET SAVE PROGRAM MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Model Number This is the radio model number which should correspond to the model number printed on the label under the radio s battery Software Option This field will detail any software options programmed applies to Private System model numbers only Serial Number This is the radio serial number stored in the codeplug which should correspond to the serial number printed on the label under the radio s battery Radio Software Version This is the version of operators software running in the radio Radio Codeplug Version This is the codeplug description version number which will determine which versions of RSS that the codeplug is compatible with Programmed Date This is the time a
7. F3 F9 Short Keypress Duration sssssisssssssssssseseeeee nennen nnne nennen F4 F3 F2 lenia Ed F4 F6 F3 signalling Y E eunt ee ie eld a need F4 F6 F7 F4 Sil nt ALAM F4 F3 F2 F7 Site Al asNulrDer EAE E EE EEE R mesas Peter e tt TET ee Tet coh F4 F4 F3 F9 F8 68P81074C50 INDEX 9 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX SITE AlIAS LOX EE c F4 F4 F3 F9 F8 Site AllASING 2a EET F4 F4 F3 F9 SIte F4 F4 F3 ncm d F4 F4 F4 F9 F6 SIZE GOS er F4 F4 F3 Size Godeni x LEER F4 F4 F4 SIOW SCION COUN P F4 F3 F6 Slow Scroll Rate MS nii idt e cte tete ed eee Les ec e hag ep n nati ee antes F4 F3 F6 Sean Taras TH F4 F6 F3 F9 Smart PTT Quick Key Timer MS tane levet e ete hg e dean rex ee d va F4 F6 F2 Smart PTT Retry Timer 15 F4 F6 F2 SmartZorie Operation teta c d robe redo eode vL ads F8 F2 F7 SMartZone Operation PE F8 F3 F5 Software Opto Miirun ES F3 F9 Softwar Path m F8 F8 Splinter Channel i ec ene Lee ee toda lcu Enea c e LEE e LL F4 F4 F3 F9 Squelch Fine dd tete te eite i de Ree Pe RTT Bana F4 F6 F3 F9 SQUEICN Type oce rece e ee a F4 F6 F3 Slartsite Operaatio Me EE F8 F2 F7 St rtsite Operation ede ci ti eel eee eee F8 F3 F5 Stat A
8. eei re chute tere ei iE apte e e pede 4 3 4 2 1 1 Reference Oscillator Alignment essessssssessiesseeeee eene enne nnne nnne nnne nennen entente reset nennen 4 5 4 2 1 2 Transmit Power AllQnment ioo tede spec n tert eee ere e vy Den lint epe ED egent 4 6 4 2 1 3 Transmit Deviation Balance Compensation Alignment essen 4 8 4 2 1 4 Transmit Deviation Limit 4 10 4 2 1 5 Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment Reference Softpot ssssssse 4 11 4 2 1 6 Transmit VCO Crossover Alignment sssesseeeeneeeeeneneneen nennen nennen nnn nennen 4 12 42 1 7 Secure Transmit D6Viation ee ni e e POPE 4 13 4 2 2 Receiver Alignment Menlo oot tiet re ertet enit re emere denied De d eee 4 14 42 2 Front End Filter Alignment ice Ir ete d rcd pec eti ie ves nerds 4 16 4 2 2 2 Rated Audio Alignment eerte sere tede dee Ded ento 4 17 4 2 2 3 Squelch Attenuator 12 5kHz Alignment sesseseeeneeeneenenenneee nennen 4 18 4 2 2 4 Squelch Attenuator 2OKHZ Alignment essent 4 19 4 2 2 5 Squelch Attenuator 25 30kHz Alignment sssssseeeeeeneeenennen eene 4 20 4 2 2 6 Receive VCO Crossover Alignment ssssessseseseseeeeenenenneee nennen nennen nennen nennen ne
9. If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 68P81074C50 6 11 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITION Mic AGC Automatic Gain Control Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the microphones which will use the AGC feature The AGC will automatically raise or lower the gain of the microphone to keep the audio level near a pre determined level The choices are Internal External Internal and External or the default value of Disabled Time Out Timer Table sec These values are used by the personalities for the Time Out Timer TOT values Each personality can select its own time out timer value from the four that are on this screen UP DOWN arrow keys select the four TOT values available to each personality Each conventional channel and trunking personality may reference one of these four values TOT values from 15 to 465 seconds may be selected in 15 second increments An Infinite value is also available If the radio is transmitting and the TOT time expires the radio is automatically dekeyed and a continuous alert tone will be generated for as long as the PTT button is pressed To continue transmitting the PTT button must be released and the radio rekey
10. ssssssssssssssseseseee eene nnne eene trn 3 9 3 9 Steps to Greate a ScaniLisLb ueterem t be ek e ro Made 3 10 3 10 Steps to Save Personality to Radio s 3 11 3 11 Steps to Save Radio Personality to Archive and Backup 3 12 3 12 Trunked Radio Personality 3 14 3 13 MTX8000 9000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item Defaults sssssssseeeneennees 3 15 3 14 Steps to Read a Radio s Personality Codeplug sse nnns 3 17 3 15 Steps to Merge Download TOMS sssssssssessssesssee nennen nennen sinis sen 3 17 3 16 Steps to Assign Button and Switch Functions 3 18 3 17 Steps to Program the Phorie Eist oe n e ee reete e rr Ld t Ho 3 19 3 18 Steps to Program Talkgroup Scan with One Lis 3 20 3 19 Steps to Modify Personalities for Scan and 3 21 3 20 Steps to Program Zone Channel Features ssssssssssssssseseeee eene enne neni nnns nnns 3 22 3 21 Steps to Fill in the Scan EISE oe ient pente eee EH ep reported esie 3 23 3 22 Steps to Save Personality to Radio s
11. 3 2 3 High Level Programming Flow The overview of the flow of programming in this example is as follows Read the radio Assign button switch functions that differ from factory defaults Create a second scan list list members not filled in at this time Setup the phone number list Create configure Conventional personalities Assign personalities to switch positions on Zone Channel screen Fill in scan lists with the desired zone channel entries Program the radio This programming flow was chosen because it minimizes navigation between screens 3 2 4 Step by Step Specific Programming Instructions We have designed a sample chart Page 3 3 for a conventional radio for recording the features you wish to program into your radio See Appendix E for a blank form you can use for future conventional radios 3 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL CONVENTIONAL RADIO PERSONALITY CHART Table 3 2 Conventional Radio Personality Chart FEATURE NAME Tx FREQUENCY Tx PL DPL Code Rx Frequency Rx PL DPL Code Time Out Timer Scan List TX Power Smart PTT 68P81074C50 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 2 5 MT2000 Button Switch Menu Item Defaults Table 3 3 MT2000 Button Switch Menu Item Defaults MODEL A4 MODEL A7 TOP DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY NO KEYPAD FULL KEYPAD Orange Button Volume Set Volume Set Rotary Switch Channel Select Channel Select Side Button 2 Unprogrammed Unprogrammed Men
12. Adee he s dace decent F4 F6 F3 Phone Text oii cel ee Ret Ea ee das Liai F4 F3 F4 68P81074C50 INDEX 6 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX Fore RETES aien ret rep A N E yaa F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Preamble During nennen nennen a i 4 6 4 9 miror E E F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Prefer Statusi PE F4 F4 F4 F9 F6 PretilTIe MS oire n e A a oa ess ott ente ENEA AA A A fer e A AARG F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Pretime Duration MS aidien cad o Le ale x eee Ee cde e Dua dn F4 F6 F7 F5 Ed F3 F5 iz F3 F5 F3 Puma 1D3 tete ette fidit ce a F3 F5 F4 lup F4 F6 F4 F3 Priority T1 Membr uit tuo eiie eut detecte Ea F4 F3 F5 Priority 1 Typi Ep ie ee eee at idl eee dee tee eee F4 F3 F5 Priority 2 Member eset eee bet ete beste fette dece ebd cus tre be F4 F3 F5 PHiOrity 2 Typecast DE A ER F4 F3 F5 Priority Chan ec coheed teet Pad cat head e Heb F4 F3 F5 F8 Priority Scan Alett i aca ccrte em ea ip elt or pa v Pa aed d e e eens F4 F3 F5 F8 Private Call Type 2 2 cele ste edidi tes euet ora hg tia te a Re E OR RR uen ELE B ENTER Rx ada F4 F4 F4 Program tality aes eee ea ee F3 F5 F3 F7 Program SOUL CO pn ty av dene do
13. isesssssseseseeeeeen F2 F4 SINGEBETONE LDIS T 223209 4 cedet eed ette E F4 F6 F7 F3 SINGEETONE SYS TEM ua eee te tene ee AY F4 F6 F7 F2 SMART ZONE PREFERRED SITES F4 F4 F4 F9 F6 2 neges i Le E eelgrass F8 F2 F7 SMARTNET OperatiOn eoe Rec ena ater eoe te citant a adde eae us F8 F3 F5 SMARTNET Type uetus d vore d eva ed uta v F8 F2 F7 SMARTNET A AE F8 F3 F5 F9 SQUELCH 12 5 KEIZ i uenit ta tees a nv ptt d a te eet dae e ree a eal ee eta iat F2 F3 F4 els zie ZOK HZ ECT F2 F3 F5 SQUEL CH 25 3 0KIZ e easet noue eeu eve vae qne eee een e meet e dara F2 F3 F6 SRIB Software Path amp F9 F3 Pun raid la obra evt Y rre OLD F4 F4 F4 F7 Scan Eloldoff Strappirig ouem dated cee bec reete eines asthe tear halen tad F4 F6 F3 F6 SCAM Sti weiter EE F4 F3 F5 eau A 4 4 4 Seam Lebe to dit ema a d e Erb Rr EE D do e Ma A ra e du F4 F6 F3 Scal Dean F4 F6 F3 F6 SCAN Type sete ne E F4 F3 F5 SECOMGARY EE F3 F5 secondary sp F3 F5 F3 A A DE 5 4 Ii feni dba Em F4
14. rete tee ee aie a ei ete F4 F4 F4 F S Frequeney ccisic aee DER F4 F4 F4 F7 F MPE S Freq MEI uiti helen erede etd tad F4 F4 F4 ANBIETET A a ea ae F4 F4 F4 FILE MAINTENANCE MENU enne nennen nnns nnns nnne F6 FLASH Software Patties ee cedo diag se LER x PEU CERA Cage ce Dd F9 F3 FLASHKEY eaea daa eed aaa maa F8 F3 68P81074C50 INDEX 3 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX FLASH COGS dt o F8 F2 ELASHGOde cr aed en UU e aep eer F8 F3 F5 FLASHport UPGRADE F8 ERONT END FEIEEER murieron Pec Hiver eet ate apni ctor t Na edie F2 F3 F2 Factory Order N mb er ire eed Reha ate deed egisse peti setate Reed oda ree ea ERR e F8 F3 ese e D Ro uisu euet dia eeu eee ee F4 F4 F4 F7 Fallsa Hola Time SOC ms F4 F3 F5 F8 Failsoft Inactivity Sec ia ene 4 4 2 2 FaSo Ty DO RE Em 4 4 4 Fast Scroll Rate Iis tdi ak eu a 4 6 WIES TELE F6 F5 Filter Constant 1 cine Erie eet aie Aled enti elaine le F4 F4 F2 F2 Filter Constant K2 Seed fa cada ey dea pei F4 F4 F2 F2 Fil
15. DEL Filename Deletes the filename in the current directory DEL RE CAUTION Files cannot be recovered after executing this command Delete all files in current directory Lists the files in the current working directory You can list files in other directories also by specifying a path name following the command If you have more files than will fit on the display you can type DIR P which will make DOS pause when the display is full Pressing any key resumes the listing DIR W specifies a wide display 5 columns of file names DISKCOPY B A Copies the contents of the disk in drive B to the disk in drive A Drives must be of the same size and density If your drives are not the same size and density use the same drive name twice such as DISKCOPY A A FORMAT A Format an unused new or old diskette in drive A of the computer so it will accept MS DOS files MD DIRNAME Makes a new subdirectory called dirname of 8 characters or less You substitute your directory name for the italicized word dirname MKDIR is the same as MD PROMPT P G Change the display s prompt to include the current working directory s drive and path name followed by the gt sign This sign is typically seen in the AUTOEXEC BAT file PATH Set a command search path such as PATH C MRSS MTSX ARCHIVE This tells the computer to search this directory after the working directory when a command is entered This sign is typically seen in the AUTOE
16. F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 2 39 GETTING STARTED 5 RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Monitor Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select either a monochrome or color display monitor Default Monochrome Text Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for screen text Default Light Gray Status Text Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for the status line located in the lower portion of the top right side window Default Light Gray Message Text Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for the message line located in the upper portion of the top right side window Default Light Gray Highlight Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for the highlighted screen text Default Brown Background Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color for the screen Default Black Frame Use the up down arrow keys to select the desired color of the screen outline Default Light Gray Selected Text Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color of the selected text Default Light Gray Popup Background Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired color of the popup background Default Black Screen configuration changes must be SAVED F8 before you EXIT F10 this screen 2 40 68P81074C50 SECTION 3 BASIC RADIO PROGRAMMING TUTORIAL 3 1 INTRODUCTION TO SECTI
17. F2 F4 F5 F8 F9 ADD PREV NEXT DELETE PHONE MORE PERS PERS PERS PERS OPTIONS OPTIONS This screen allows you to edit the information for conventional operation using GE STAR type signalling ae CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS SIGNALLING DEACTIVATED NONE MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Type MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY Personality Receive Only Disabled Signalling Direct Talkaround Enabled Time Out Timer Scan List Hot Keypad Phone Operation Quik Call II System Receive Transmit Direct Frequency MHz 851 06250 806 01250 851 06250 Squelch Type DPL DPL DPL Code 023 023 023 DPI Invert Enabled Enabled Enabled F2 F3 F4 F5 F8 F9 ADD PREV NEXT DELETE PHONE MORE PERS PERS PERS PERS OPTIONS OPTIONS This screen allows you to edit the information for conventional operation with signalling deactivated 6 86 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS WITH MDC SIGNALLING MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Type MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY Personality 1 Receive Only Disabled Sigrnalling nitet MDC Direct Talkaround Enabled MDC System 1 Time Out 3 60 DL Disabled Sc
18. 2 3 4 Press F9 The TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen appears 5 6 7 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD ITEM allows you to add a trunking status alias item F5 DELETE ITEM allows you to delete a trunking status alias item F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Status Alias Number This field corresponds to status number that is transmitted over the air Status Alias Text This field contains the text that is displayed when the corresponding status number is selected 68P81074C50 6 61 6 2 2 3 3 TRUNKING MESSAGE ALIAS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model 8SYSTEM OPTIONS MESSAGE ALIAS TRUNKING MESSAGE ALIAS Num Message Alias Number Message Alias Text 1 1 MESSAGE 1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD DELETE EXIT ITEM ITEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F3 The TRUNKING SYSTEM screen appears Press F7 The TRUNKING MESSAGE ALIAS screen appears 1 2 3 4 Press F9 The TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen appears 5 6 Press Tab to select the desired field or press t
19. 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F7 The AUXILIARY MENU appears Press F3 The SINGLETONE LIST screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 Press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD TONE allows you to add a tone F5 DELETE TONE allows you to delete a tone F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Tone H2 Use the Up Down arrow keys to select or enter directly the desired tone frequency The defined tones can be used o a per conventional personality basis in the CONV PER RAC OPTIONS screen from Main Menu F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 by enabling the Repeater Access field The field Singletone HZ will contain a tone from this list The valid range is 300 3000 Hz in 0 1 Hz increments The factory default is 300 Hz 6 120 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 4 3 QUIK CALL II SYSTEM F7 F4 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model CONV AUX QUIK CALL II SYSTEM QUIK CALL II SYSTEM System Signalling Type Decoder Option Signalling Muting Type Initial Squelch Type Reset Type Tone Freq Hz Code Auto
20. Channel gt m z z gt lt MTSX RSS APPENDIX E APPENDIX E Mode 16 Mode 15 Mode 13 Mode 14 Mode 10 Mode 11 Mode 12 Mode 8 Mode 9 d N d CONVENTIONAL RADIO PERSONALITY CHART 2 1 FEATURE NAME 68P81074C50 NOTES MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX Field and Menu Navigation Key Sequence List Below is an alphabetized list of all fields and menus available in the RSS The list can be reached online in the RSS from any Help screen by pressing F6 A to P or F7 Q to Z The availability of individual fields cataloged in the list depends on the features ordered with the radio and in some cases on specific settings of other fields in the RSS Field Menu Path from Main Menu 250 MOd688 ixi cient ict eel ee a el et d ate ides See ie F8 F2 F7 ZOO MOSS fests viele Peat ETC PS F8 F3 F5 A A G E S Freg MHZ tit fits e tee e e f tte eee F4 F4 F4 Duelo E ED F4 F4 F4 ARGHIVE FIBES edet pea rte e adn xe ter sin F3 F3 AUXIEARY SYSTEMS MENU eet sie ieee adie eec ee eee F4 F6 F7 ACCESS COQO E ruo er ee eise Ere be F4 F3 F4 F8 ACCESS Strapping tate annie F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 Access Typen mes tete tete du
21. F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 TRUNK WIDE OPT Trunking Radio Wide Options screens are applicable to all trunking operation regardless of system type or signalling type F3 TRUNK SYS Trunking Systems is used to change and view trunked system parameters A trunking system refers to a specific repeater site system ID control channel frequencies and the connect tone required to operate on that system F4 TRUNK PERS Trunking Personality allows you to change and view the parameters for a trunking personality A trunking personality refers to the type of features and options that are used on a trunking channel or talkgroup Multiple personalities may use the same system and multiple talkgroups may also use the same personality F5 TRUNK ID LIST Trunking Call List allows you to edit the list of Trunking Call IDs and the corresponding names or alias This screen is visible only if the radio supports this option F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 38 68P81074C50 6 2 2 1 TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MENU CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING WIDE OPTIONS TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS Telephone Interconnect Half Duplex ISW Window Adjust eeeeee 41 Auto Dial H
22. F4 PHONE OPTIONS allows you to edit phone information for the radio including phone numbers This screen is visible only if the radio supports this option F5 SCAN OPTIONS allows you to enable scan and modify radio wide scan parameters such as response times F6 DISPLAY OPTIONS allows you to edit display information for the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 3 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 1 1 RADIO WIDE OPTIONS 12 21 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG RADIO OPTIONS RADIO WIDE OPTIONS Alert Tones Min Alert Tone Volume Alert Tone Volume Offset 0 Block Pending CA PC Disabled Self Test Alert Tone Rotary Switch Scan Prgm Channel Low Battery Selectable Keypad Mute Short Keypress Duration ms Long Keypress Duration ms Maximum Channels Talkgroups Radio Cloning Disabled Rollover Alert Rotary Alert Channel Change ID Enabled Home Mode Selection CCID Delay 0 0 Secure Equipped 1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 SECURE EMERG MORE HELP OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS EXIT This screen allows you to set up various options that affect radio wide operation The options on this screen should be correctly edited and verified before proceeding to edit personality data PROGRAMMING PROCEDUR
23. F9 F3 Configuration on the MAIN MENU F5 DELETE SELECTED function allows you to delete the selected archive file F6 CHDIR UP function is used to move one level up in the directory tree structure F7 CHDIR DOWN function is used to move one direction down in the directory tree structure Press Tab to select a directory Directories are represented in upper case The contents of the directory will be shown when the function key has been pressed F8 GET ARCHIVE is used to get the archive file highlighted on the screen F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITION File Name This is the DOS name of the file which contains the data for the codeplug Refer to your computer s owner s manual for a complete description of file names 68P81074C50 5 5 GET SAVE PROGRAM MTSX RSS 5 2 2 GET TCMS CODEPLUG UPDATE DISK FILE F4 RSS LOCATION At the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN GET SAVE PROG MERGE TCMS Path S N 402ASQ0199 F1 F2 F3 F4 HELP MERGE FORM Enter Path F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 UPDATE EXIT DATA This screen is used to update the codeplug information with trunking information from the TCMS Trunking Code Management System The required changes must be first entered into the TCMS database through a TCMS terminal and then downloaded using a modem and the TCMS On line Filed Programming O
24. MTSX RSS GET SAVE PROGRAM FIELD DEFINITION Archive Filename This is DOS name of the archive file This must be no more than 8 characters with a 3 character extension Model Number This is the radio model number which should correspond to the model number printed on the label under the radio s battery Software Option This field will detail any software options programmed applies to Private System model numbers only Serial Number This is the radio serial number stored in the codeplug which should correspond to the serial number printed on the label under the radio s battery Programmed Date This is the time and date the radio was last programmed Format is YYMMDDHHMM Y year M month D day H hour M minute Time is in military format 1 30 PM 1330 Program Source This field describes the source of the most recent internal codeplug programming RSS Programmed by a standard field RSS Factory Programmed in the factory Lab Programmed using a special development RSS FTR Key Programmed using a FTR Field Technical Representative hardware key 68P81074C50 5 11 GET SAVE PROGRAM MTSX RSS 5 2 5 PROGRAMMING THE RADIO S CODEPLUG Requires RIB F8 RSS LOCATION At the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU press All MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN GET SAVE PROG PROGRAM RADIO PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG Programming Codeplug Block 1 of 34 This screen allows you to program the radio A rad
25. Note All codes A B C and D should never have the same values Factory Defaults Signalling Code A Code B Code C Code D Type Motorola 138 121 13 18 GE 44 7 38 51 Plectron P1 P10 P25 P36 Federal F1 F10 F16 F20 Freq Hz Use the Up Down arrows to scroll or directly enter the available tones This field represents the frequency of audible tone in 0 1 Hz steps Values from 288 5 to 3010 0 Hz in 0 1 Hz increments are allowed Note All tones A B C and D should never have the same values Factory Defaults Signalling Code A Code B Code C Code D Type Motorola 288 5 600 9 1950 0 2840 0 GE 457 5 607 5 1077 5 1207 5 Plectron 643 0 950 0 1820 0 2932 0 Federal 643 0 1299 0 2084 0 2856 0 68P81074C50 6 123 CHANGE VIEW 5 RSS 6 2 3 4 4 GE STAR SYSTEM sh 5 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press f MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model CHANGE VIEW CONV AUX GE STAR SYSTEM MDC System 1 GE STAR SYSTEM Addressing Mode Normal Emergency Alarm Enabled Radio JD aaraa eee 0000 Monitor w Sil Emer Disabled PTT ID Type cites Disabled PTT ID Sidetone Disabled Impolite Retries 0 Pretime Duration ms 0 Revert Table Baud Rate
26. o lt 1 SECURITY TOWING COURIER SECURITY TOWING COURIER Figure 2 2 Hard Disk Directory Tree 2 12 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 6 2 Organizing Your Archive File Diskettes Below is a sample diskette directory tree for storing your radio archive files on a diskette Organizing a diskette is easier due to smaller space on a diskette Though your tree may be different based upon your way of doing business this set up may be a starting point for you Be sure to label your diskettes accurately such as 1993 MTSX Archive Files Depending on the size of your business you may even have a separate diskette for FIRE one for SECURITY etc To create the directory tree shown in Figure 2 3 on your diskette follow the steps on table 2 6 After each command press Return or Enter This exercise assumes you are using drive A and the diskette contains only MTSX archive files not RSS files and not backup files ROOT SECURITY TOWING COURIER Figure 2 3 Diskette Directory Tree 68P81074C50 2 13 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS Table 2 6 Steps to Create Diskette Directory Tree Instruction What to Type Explanation Create diskette label Label formatted diskette to correspond to the contents of the diskette such as MTXS Archive Files Don t apply it to the diskette yet If no hard disk load DOS See Table
27. 2 7 3 Starting the RSS From the Hard DISK 2 16 2 7 4 Installing the RSS on Your Hard Disk ssssssssssseeeeeeeeeneennenneen ener nennen eren nnne ene 2 16 2 7 5 Installing the RSS on Multiple Computers or Networks essssseeeeeeeenenneeneneneen nennen 2 17 2 76 Hard Disk RSS Startup Procedures iet cec Pene ce be esee v need ce taa at vv nae 2 17 2 7 7 heBafiner SCHOO Misc ao oor tete pere E Tab Ec I DEW e bare 2 18 2 7 8 ESPIMUEIMUN 2 19 NAVIGATING THROUGH THE RSS MENUS esses senes enne 2 19 2 8 1 The Keyboard Keys and Their F nctions iore doe delice ae eder Re ono ne 2 20 282 Anatomy 2 22 2 8 9 Anatomy of SCIeen Prestige bes tpa aE ae E ie A rs 2 23 2 8 4 Complete Menu Mapping at a Glance ssssssssssseeseeneeeeneneee nennen nentes 2 24 2 85 Relationship Between 5 amp p a a 2 27 CHANGING A FIELD VALUE EE 2 28 Motorola MT 2000 MTX 838 MTX 8000 MTX 9000 MTS 2000 Single Tone SmartZone
28. Each conventional personality in this list must have Auto Scan enabled The factory default is Disabled Warning Having more than 7 list members in a conventional scan list used for Conventional Voting Scan may degrade performance resulting in missed transmissions 6 32 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Failsoft Hold Time sec This timer value determines how long the radio will stay unmuted on a failsoft channel 1 to 255 with 1 second increments or Disabled if failsoft is found while in talkgroup scan Factory default is 6 seconds System Search Time sec This timer value determines how long the radio will stay on a control channel 0 to 255 seconds with 1 second increments searching for talkgroups which are in the scan list before scanning the next system The system search timer will only apply in systems which do not employ the scan marker feature Factory default is 10 seconds for Smartnet models and 1 second for Privacy Plus models 68P81074C50 6 33 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 1 5 RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS F3 F6 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG DISP DATA RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS Text Justification Left Alt Display Time ms 100 Temp Msg Display Time ms 1000 Channel Text Size ette 2 Display Li
29. Factory default is Channel Selectable Keypad Mute When enabled the user may mute the keypad chirps from the radio menu A mute selection must also be selected on the menu screen F4 F3 F3 F4 Factory default is Enabled Short Keypress Duration ms This value determines the amount of time that a key must be pressed to be considered a valid short keypress An example of a Short Keypress would be pressing a digit on the keypad when entering a Private Call ID Valid entries are 50 to 750 ms in 50 ms increments Factory default is 50 ms Long Keypress Duration ms A long keypress involves pressing and holding a key for a period of time to enable a radio function or feature This means that you must press and hold the key down for the time specified by this field Valid entries are 250 to 3750 ms in 250 ms increments Factory default is 1000 ms 1 second Maximum Channels Talkgroups This is a read only field that indicates the maximum number of channels talkgroups that a radio can access Radio Cloning Certain radio models permit direct radio lt gt cloning with a special cloning cable If this feature is not desired select disabled Rotary Alert Factory default is Rollover Alert Use the up down arrow keys to select the type of Rotary Alert for Continuous Rotary control models The type of Continuous Rotary Alerts are Rollover Alert Turning the Rotary control passed all programmed channels in either direction will cause an al
30. Monitors come in a variety of sizes and colors Some can be bigger than a 19 inch diagonal television though a common size is 12 inches diagonally Monochrome monitors have only one color behind the words and pictures on the display which in many cases is either green amber white or black Color monitors can display two or more colors on the display at a time but with color monitors a slight decrease in picture sharpness or text legibility may be experienced Colors on the RSS screen can be selected or changed by the user by using the RSS To help users quickly find their place on the display before typing a flashing underscore called a cursor typically serves as a visual place indicator Besides the display a monitor usually has a power cord an on off switch brightness and contrast dials and a cable connection to the system unit The RSS can function with either monochrome CGA EGA or VGA based monitors 2 2 1 2 System Unit The system unit contains a special chip that is the brain of the computer one or more diskette drives a hard disk drive a cable connection to the keyboard one or more communications ports and an on off switch The system unit should be treated with care as jarring and hot temperatures could internally damage the unit 2 2 1 3 Keyboard A user instructs the computer what to do by typing commands on the keyboard The display shows the commands as they are typed Most keyboards have letter keys numeric keys and
31. Position B Blank Blank Three Position Toggle Position A Blank Blank Position B Blank Blank Position C PL Disable Blank This screen allows you to edit switch settings that pertain to the radio for both trunking and conventional personalities NOTE Factory defaults for switch assignments are listed in Tables 3 3 3 13 3 27 and 3 28 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE SWITCH CONFIGURATION screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Two Position Concentric Position A Conventional and Trunking This field determines the function of the two position switch when it is in the position marked with the 0 symbol 68P81074C50 6 17 CHANGE VIEW 5 RSS Press the up down arrow keys to select the function of the two position concentric switch located at the top of the radio Press Help F1 for a list of possible selections For the Secure equipped radios position A is fixed and defin
32. Rx Hold Time sec 3 Monitor Hold Time 6 HUB Suspends Scan Disabled Voting Disabled TRUNKING Failsoft Hold Time sec 6 System Search Time 1 This screen is used to customize the Channel Scan feature for a specific application Options and parameters that affect radio wide operation conventional operation and trunking operation are available PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F5 The SCAN LIST screen appears Press F8 The SCAN OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 31 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Nuisance Mode Delete This option allows you to temporarily delete non priority channels from the scan list that are constantly busy which may cause the radio to be constantly locked onto a channel A channel deleted using this option
33. The maximum number of characters will be determined by the radio model Numbers can be added or deleted with the F2 and F5 function keys Place the cursor over the number to be deleted New numbers will be added at the end of the list A total of 19 numbers are allowed 68P81074C50 6 23 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 1 3 1 ACCESS DEACCESS CODES Fe RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press LEN m MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter Code MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG PHONE CODES DTMF ACCESS DEACCESS CODES Num Access Code Deaccess Code 1 1P 1P F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD DELETE EXIT 00 5 3 00 5 3 This screen allows you to set the Access Deaccess Code pairs used for the Conventional Phone Operation The Access Code is used to keep unauthorized users from using the interconnect system on the repeater The Deaccess Code is used to tell the system that the phone call is finished and shorten the wasted air time These codes can be selected in the Auto Access Code on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY PHONE OPTIONS screen F4 F6 F3 F8 The valid symbols are as follows 0 9 Digits Asterisk Pound P Pause PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F4 The PHONE CONFIGURATION screen appears Press F8 The DTMF ACCESS DEACCESS CODES screen appears Pres
34. When a limited clone is performed all trunking information which existed in the source radio will be deleted or changed to default data Re entry of trunking information will be required The steps below will guide you in performing a limited clone 1 Use the GET SAVE functions to read F3 F2 the radio codeplug to be cloned That is the source codeplug An archive file may also be used as the source codeplug 2 Press the Limited Clone function key F4 on the TRUNKED CLONING screen At this point all the trunking data in the source codeplug will be deleted or defaulted This includes all trunking system and trunking personality data Zone Channel Conventional Phone List Call list and Scan List data will be preserved Warning Do NOT program this image into the original radio unless you want all the trunking data to be deleted 3 Enter the serial number of the radio to be cloned or press F2 to read the serial number from the connected radio The F2 function will not be allowed prior to step 2 unless system keys are present At this point in time you will have a codeplug image for the target radio which contains the conventional data and radio wide data from the source radio and no trunking data You may operate on the codeplug image in the same fashion as any other codeplug image It may be archived edited or programmed into the target radio Normally you will proceed to step 4 4 Go to the TCMS me
35. appropriate system requirements F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 34 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Text Justification This option applies to Channel names Zone names Phone aliases Private Call List aliases Call Alert aliases Status aliases and Message aliases Factory default is Left Channel Text Size The Channel Text size will vary inversely to the Zone System Text size since both must be displayed at the same time Factory default for Zone system text size is 11 for front mounted display radios Valid entries are 1 to 14 characters depending on the radio model Zone Text Size The Zone Text size will vary inversely to the Channel Text size since both must be displayed at the same time Valid entries are 0 to 13 characters depending on the radio model Factory default is 3 for front mounted display radios Slow Scroll Rate ms This is the rate at which the display will Slow Scroll through a list The radio will first Slow Scroll then it will Fast Scroll after the Slow Scroll Count expires Valid entries are 250 to 6250 ms in 250 ms increments Factory default is 500 ms Fast Scroll Rate ms This is the rate at which the display will Fast Scroll through a list The radio will first Slow Scroll then it will Fast Scroll after the Slow Scroll Count expires Valid entries are 250 to 6250 ms in 250 ms increments Factory default is 250 ms S
36. in 25 ms increments Factory default is 250 ms Digit Duration ms This field allows you to select the length of time that the DTMF digit will be transmitted Valid selections are 25 to 6375 ms by 25 ms increments Factory default is 150 ms Interdigit Delay ms This field allows you to select the delay time between DTMF digits in a DTMF digit transmission sequence Valid selections are 0 to 6375 ms and may be selected by 25 ms increments Factory default is 100 ms DTMF Pause Time ms Valid selections are 500 to 4000 ms and may be selected in 500 ms increments Factory default is 1000 ms This is the length of the DTMF Pause Timer 68P81074C50 6 27 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 1 4 RADIO WIDE SCAN LISTS AND OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MA MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Type MTSX Model Page 1 of 2 MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG SCAN Scan 1 SCAN LIST Scan Type Conventional Mem Zn Chn Zone Channel 1 2 Dynamic Priority Enabled 3 Priority 1 Type Fixed 4 Priority 1 None 5 6 7 Non Priority Members Fixed 8 Designated Tx Mem Talkback F3 F4 F6 F8 PREV NEXT DELETE DELETE SCAN LIST LIST LIST MEMBER OPTIONS This screen holds the fields for the scan lists Each perso
37. 2 3 to load DOS using drive A Remove DOS diskettes after loading If not at the root directory of drive A type Put new diskette in A Insert a new diskette into A Close the drive door Format diskette FORMAT A Format the new diskette in drive A Discard diskette if errors occur Label diskette Remove formatted diskette apply label without covering the exposed magnetic area Insert diskette again Insert diskette into drive A again Close door Start at root Move change directory to the root uppermost directory of the diskette Omit if already at root level Make FIRE directory MD FIRE Make a directory under Root called FIRE Make SECURITY directory MD SECURITY Make a directory under Root called SECURITY Make a TOWING directory MD TOWING Make a directory under Root called TOWING Make a COURIER directory MD COURIER Make a directory under Root called COURIER Create other directories Make more directories for each additional category you may need 2 14 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 7 STARTING THE RSS You have accomplished a lot so far you have identified and assembled the hardware you acquired knowledge of basic computer and DOS concepts and how to organize disks You are now ready to start the RSS on your computer This section approximately 30 minutes long will explain when to install reinstall or discard the RSS diskettes It will guide you through installation proces
38. 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TABLE OF CONTENTS cont SECTION 9 FLASHPORT UPGRADE 9 1 INTRODUCTION TO eben ceeded deen Gene tei Pee ed cr dette de feda 9 1 9 2 FLASHING PROGEDURE er Deor creto se eh E did davai erecta Ve EE Ue te e beu n 9 1 9 3 EEASHINGKUPGRADE reri HAUS Ie bag MEA en 9 2 APPENDIX A Computer to Radio Communications Error Codes sss A 1 APPENDIX B TPL Frequencies and Codes Table neret nennen nens B 1 APPENDIX C lt 1 APPENDIX D Trunking Radio Personality Chart sse eene nnne D 1 APPENDIX E Conventional Radio Personality Chart eene nennen nenas E 1 SES INDEX 1 eer P U G 1 V 68P81074C50 TABLE OF CONTENTS cont MTSX RSS LIST OF TABLES 1 1 Types of RSS Programmable Features and Functions sss 1 1 2 1 Step to Connect 2 3 2 2 Installation Tone Identification nnne nnn nennen nent nnn nennen nnn nnns 2 3 2 3 SOME DOS GOMMANAS 4 45 1t t eau t testi epit tei hte ease Nest tele Sets 2 9 2 4 Special DOS Gommand Gharactets ntt ntt Ferte re oid agro ed ea HR ke sane 2 1
39. CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY Receive Only Disabled Signalling Direct Talkaround Enabled MDC System Time Out Timer Scan List Emergency Hot Keypad Revert Phone Operation Receive Transmit Direct Frequency MHz 935 06250 896 01250 896 01250 Signalling Type CSQ PL DPL Code 67 0 Hz XZ 023 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 NEXT DELETE MDC PHONE MORE PERS PERS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS Figure 2 8 An RSS Screen The working area of a screen contains a list of programmable features called fields that can be selected or changed using the arrow tab or return keys described earlier On some screens are features that can be selected for each individual channel hereafter we will refer to a channel as a mode these features are selected on a per mode basis On other screens are features that can be selected for all modes of the radio radio wide features 68P81074C50 2 23 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS And still other screens list those features that perform a certain RSS function such as servicing the radio or printing the personality data 2 8 4 A Complete Menu Mapping at a Glance The screens are organized in a tree root fashion Figure 2 9 Though this tree root system is shown sideways in the following picture it shows how the whole system starts with a main root MAIN MENU at the left side and branches outward from the main root This branching grows deeper as you get closer to the precise screen which contains the fea
40. Duration ms enses F4 F3 F2 F6 XE Transmit Eme F4 F6 F3 F6 Z ZONE TALKGROUP a ii a ana F4 F8 68P81074C50 INDEX 12 MTSX RSS GLOSSARY Active Channel Adjustment Align ANI Announcement Group Archive file Archive File Cloning Arrow keys Asynchronous Communication Auto Affilliation Automatic Retry Backup File Base Station Identifier Blank Frequency Blank PL Code Boot Busy Channel Lockout BCL 68P81074C50 GLOSSARY A channel upon which the radio is receiving or transmitting a signal A means of tuning the radio to a special value To adjust the position setting of any multiple stage device to obtain optimum product performance Automatic Number Identification Used for access release codes that are frequently used for system management and billing purposes ANI numbers may only be programmed by the RSS and may not be changed in the field Grouping structure used in a Type II or Type Ili trunking system An Announcement Group is a large group of radio users that under normal circumstances coordinate actions among themselves A file containing the personality of a radio the contents of the radio s codeplug The procedure of merging the data from two codeplugs to pass on customer personalities quickly from one radio to another In the case of archive file cloning the source of the factory data is an archive file and th
41. EEPROM Enter Error ESC Exit Failsoft Field File Fleet Fleet Mapping Floppy Disk Drive Frequency 68P81074C50 The device that reads and programs information on a permanent storage medium that is floppy or hard disks An alterable permanent magnetic storage medium for microcomputers Also called a disk floppy disk or mini diskette Data Operated Squelch When enabled DOS will detect an incoming packet of the same signalling scheme as the radio and squelch the audio for the duration of the packet A small blip of data will be heard but most of the packet will not be heard DPL Digital Private Line coded squelch A channel that has DPL on the receive frequency will require both the presence of carrier as well as the correct DPL code before it will unmute Also if you have DPL on the transmit frequency all transmissions on that channel will be modulated at a sub audible level by the DPL code Modulation is continuous Digital Private Line A continuous sub audible data signal that is transmitted along with a carrier A radio that has DPL on the receive frequency will require both the presence of carrier and and the correct DPL code before it will unmute Also if there is DPL on the transmit frequency the DPL code during transmissions made on that channel will be continuous An acronym for Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF is a signalling system used by the telephone system Electronically Erasable Read Only Me
42. F3 F9 TRUNKING TALKGROUP a aaas 4 4 4 7 RE F4 F4 F4 F8 Talk Permit TONG is cec teer eret teet tuere ee tant tegen heces tae ue aha teen a F4 F4 F4 Talk Permit TONG M EE F4 F4 F4 F9 Telephone Interconnect E N E enne nennen 4 4 2 Temp Msg Display Time MS Jerre iiien uirri 4 6 Test Mode ori ERE UR ENTE ER RIPE E ETE RH ER A REN ERARE EROR F2 F6 Reni EEEN E ENEE EA F4 F3 F6 This Gall Digs c F4 F4 F3 This Gall pies p F4 F4 F4 This GanDz PGi ll p F4 F4 F4 Tirme OutsTImoer peciit e D aeree dude Eee cee e pu oce i e Dae a F4 F4 F4 Umen E ae F4 F6 F3 Time Out Timer Table F4 F3 F2 F9 op ER F4 F4 F4 F7 IDA F4 F6 F7 F3 Tone D ration MS tere Eten iere p e e avait prete du celeri aves F4 F6 F7 F2 Tone Fr g LH Gode Lene eet lena nd ain F4 F6 F7 F4 Tone Pretime MS ccssee EE F4 F6 F7 F2 Tone Signalling System aec ege dee edie nae ee tit oae eue dea dv dn F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 68P81074C50 INDEX 11 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX Trea rn P TTI De EP F4 F6 F4 F3 Trk One Touch Button ede tee ca can anit ate eee F8 F2 F7
43. F4 F3 F3 F2 Warning Programming of Silent Emergency provides the user NO indication visible or audible that the emergency has been sent If you program silent emergency in conjunction with the Long Press Emergency feature users should be trained to LONG PRESS the emergency press button for an extended duration to ensure that the emergency will be sent Unmute Option This feature is an optional ADDITION to the Emergency Silent Alarm feature Enabling this feature will cause the radio to UNMUTE on the emergency talkgroup for trunking or frequency for conventional for voice traffic when the radio is in SILENT ALARM EMERGENCY mode The Unmute Option will allow the dispatcher to provide feedback to the person initiating the emergency state via code words without drawing undesirable attention The factory default is Disabled Warning Channel Delay sec The radio must be on a channel for this delay time before it can transmit an emergency signal For emergency operation sometimes this delay time is desired to prevent the radio from sending an emergency signal on an undesired channel which might occur while the user is changing channels and pressing the emergency button Valid selections are 0 to 7 seconds Factory default is 2 seconds Man Down Pre Alert sec This delay is the period between closure of the Man Down switch and the initiation of the Man Down Alert tone The radio must have an external Man Down switch for this feature to wo
44. F6 F4 F3 Sec re Equipped eto ette B rie e te va dang gee eee P bu ee a F4 F3 F2 Secure PUNCH Trier teca Pha thes e d na Reade d ea beer dae cds rx go Sua ee VET aleve Dea e ERE Tua Pe F4 F3 F2 F6 Sec re Clear Strappilhig weet add da abe ddp e deca F4 F6 F3 F6 AO F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Selectable Keypad 4 2 Selective Call Encode nda rco ae pet eene te donee uh c Feet ota Ere LED sea aa d d Dt a dre uL Pega d F4 F6 F3 F7 Self Test ALS ete ves eee teat ete dove opi vede IR F4 F3 F2 SOHAL Number ree a er ew e tv ge de eu aaa das dn ee e Seanad da boe e d F3 F5 Serial 22 5 Serial Number rn d a ree eL de dun dd rea ER ada F3 F5 F3 F7 ee E de ni Db F3 F5 F4 ven Pese cie au en ma gl e eoa a ate da a a e PDA Edad F3 F5 F4 F7 Serial a due testo nist F3 F5 F7 Senal N mboet emi d deett rn sina cd elu ea dias e eT a rere Ta en F3 F5 F8 SernalNUmb6ef cete A E A E vtto estremo det e eeu drei e Een F3 F7 SeinalN mbQ6e sical aes ec vets ce ede euge e ova Beale deep ea dua aa Dua Pu eu
45. From the keypad enter pause P by pressing and then Codes can be added and deleted with the F2 and F5 function keys Place the cursor over the code to be deleted New codes will be added at the end of the list A total of 19 unique Access De access pairs are allowed 68P81074C50 6 25 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 1 3 2 DIALing OPTIONS F3 F4 Fo RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press 2 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG PHONE DTMF DIALING OPTIONS DTMF Pause Time ms Num Initial Delay Digit Duration Interdigit Delay This screen allows you to modify the DTMF phone wide parameters such as timing and phone dial operation NOTE For non keypad models This option can ONLY be used with the One Touch Button Feature Main Menu F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Each trunking and conventional system uses one of these parameter sets which are selected in the DTMF Access Timing table field on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY PHONE OPTIONS screen F4 F6 F3 F8 and in the Phone DTMF Timing field on the TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen F4 F4 F3 F9 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F4 The PHONE CONFIGURATION screen appears Press F9 The DIALING OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function ke
46. HearClear Quik Call Quik Call Il and Private Line are trademarks of Motorola Inc 1993 1994 1996 by Motorola Inc Radio Products Group 8000 W Sunrise Blvd Ft Lauderdale FL 33322 Printed in U S A 06 95 All Rights Reserved 68P81074C50 i TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont MTSX RSS 2 10 SETTING CONFIGURING THE RSS COMPUTER DEFAULTS esent 2 29 2 10 1 Setting Default Archive and Backup Paths sssssssssseesseeeeennee nennen nnne nnne nennen 2 30 2 10 2 Setting a Communications Port ss eaer rasi ananena niaaa nan 2 31 2 311 EXITINGTEE RSS ie EE A casks E A SA ET 2 32 2 12 MAIN D ridere ied E e bint an eere baka ene 2 33 2402 1 How to Read the Godepl g 3 0 erento het alite die taleeae ine 2 35 2 12 1 1 Reading the Godepl g cocotte ror heat cett cte e ec de ei aet e red tes 2 35 2 12 1 2 Reading Codeplug Data from the Radio ssssssssssssesseeeeeeeenenneeennee nnne nnne 2 35 2 12 1 3 Reading Disk Codeplug Files esessseessesseseeeseseenn nennen nnne enne nne nnn enne nnne ii nns 2 35 243 SETUP CONFIGURAT O N aaee a aa aa aaa RR 2 36 2 13 1 Configuring Patrs and Ports ein nih dice ei cde enol s a a dti diee tite e ads 2 37 2 13 2 Setting Screen Colors eee rt UE E t Pe Ce nu eger Gee 2 39 SECTION 3 BASIC R
47. HxiMod laton uicit need rule HE EE e HET ER et cnn eee F4 F6 F3 F6 Rx Unmute Delay ale tcr ree ellie in cre nee eae dle Dee ve E Dd peto F4 F6 F3 F9 S S N pI F3 F4 SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO F3 F5 F3 F7 SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE sss F3 F5 F4 F7 SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE en nnns nnns F3 F5 F7 68P81074C50 INDEX 8 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX 3 n dee tte retta e he o ewe F3 F5 F8 SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE cccccccsececceeececceesseseeaecaeceseeeseescseseeaseaeceeeeeeeeseneeseaeees F3 F7 SCANIEIST die te ee Meee wth dede ach ein el eel de pal ete ee ea F4 F3 F5 SCAN OP T ONS 257257 57 5 et itte e oe aut eroi NT entem cT nc F4 F3 F5 F8 SCREEN COLORS 2 4 RI set te ak ee er eid eel ee a eet F9 F7 SECURE RECEIVE DISCRIMINATOR cccccccsececcecececceesseseaecaeceseeescesceeeeaseaeseeeeeeeeseneeseeees F2 F3 F8 SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION Arranoa an a a nnns sss F2 F2 F8 SELECTED TEXT ated eiut ke F9 F7 SERVICE MENU it each varese pete Sud voa caa or rave Euer ci Fue Pob du du e rd d eR din F2 SERVICE SOFTWARE F9 SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU
48. ID 2 Phone Enables the DTMF Encoder 1 Rptr Acc Button 1 and 2 Repeater Access Button 1 and 2 are used to manually send a repeater access request code Scan Enables Disables Scan 1 Select Call Select Selective Call ID 2 Talkaround Direct Enables Disables Talkaround for transmit 1 Unprogrammed No function A bad key chirp tone will sound Volume Set Tone Generates a tone when pressed Used for volume knob adjustment Zone Sys Change Zones Rotary Only NOTES 1 For the radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Conventional Personality screen F4 F6 F3 2 For the radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the MDC System screen F4 F6 F4 F3 68P81074C50 6 15 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Trunking Buttons Blank No function Rotary Only Chan Sub Select Change Channels Rotary Only Call Response Used to respond to a private call or call alert or phone call This function should be used for Response Only radios or in conjunction with the Phone Private Call functions assigned to the Menu 2 Emergency Activates an Emergency transmission 2 Not Available on All Models Light Turns on the display light Message Enables the Message feature 2 Nuisance Delete Removes the current active channel from the list One Touch x Activates the One Touch feature programmed for the selected button 3 Page Enabl
49. Ke cae a E 2 4 2 2 1 Identitying Major Computer Parts 2 6 202 101 MODIIOI iii ire tei RE CU n naeh aeger aote pate Da Ee Dna 2 6 22 112 SV SUSU E UE 2 6 2 213 EMT ROLE MM 2 6 UNDERSTANDING COMPUTER STORAGE SYSTEMS 2 7 2 3 1 Random Access Memory nk aia eure eap ee E pee cunei aa aera 2 7 2 92 Read Only Memory aeaa Ret LA se ERROR SERERE 2 7 2 9 3 Mard Disk IDIIVG E n 2 7 IO GENI Cu E 2 7 UNDERSTANDING THE DISK OPERATING SYSTEM DOS sssssssseeeneemeeenennee nennen nennen rennes 2 8 WAHA TSON THE RSS DISKETTES rito tuse cot eere ce ab E gba 2 11 ORGANIZING YOUR HARD DISK AND DISKETTES 2 12 2 6 1 Organizing Yo r Hard Diskresi EEUU 2 13 2 6 2 Organizing Your Archive File Diskette 2 14 STARING TAE iine 2 15 2 7 1 Making a Backup Copy of RSS Diskette S 2 15 2 7 2 What To Do with Previous Versions of RSS Diskettes 2 16
50. LIST allows you to go to the next scan list F5 DELETE LIST allows you to delete a scan list F6 DELETE MEMBER allows you to delete a member from the list F8 SCAN OPTIONS allows you to edit scan options and features F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Scan List Number Each conventional and trunking personality may have a unique scan list The scan lists defined on this section are assigned on the personality screens Additional lists may be added with the F2 key and deleted with the F5 key Scan Type This field indicates the type of scan list The choices are Conventional May only contain conventional personalities Up to 15 members Subfleet May only contain trunking personalities from the same Type system Up to 10 members Priority Mon May only contain trunking personalities and may contain personalities from different systems Use this for Type II systems only Up to 10 members If the SMARTNET Type feature has been purchased then this type may contain trunking personalities from the same Type system Up to 10 members Talk Group May contain both conventional and trunked personalities from different systems May be used for Type or Type II operation Up to 10 members Dynamic Priority The last channel transmitted on will always be the Second Priority Channel The priority of the First Priority channel is not affected When this feature is enab
51. M MOTOROLA 1996 by Motorola Inc Radio Products Group 8000 W Sunrise Blvd Ft Lauderdale FL 33322 Printed in U S A 11 96 All Rights Reserved RSS Technical Support Domestic 800 367 4803 Menu 5 International 305 475 3778 MT 2000 MTS 2000 MTX 838 MTX 8000 and MTX 9000 MTSX Radio Service Software User s Guide Software Part Number RVN 4097 68P81074C50J M MOTOROLA MT 2000 MTS 20007 MTX 838 MTX 8000 and MTX 9000 TSX Radio Service Software User s Guide Software Part Number RVN 4097L TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OFEIGURES tiit usto iv LIST OF TABLES scii iv w 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCING THE MT 2000 MTS 2000 MTX 838 MTX 8000 AND MTX 9000 MTSX RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE sssssssseseseeeeenenenetrnetetetrrtrtrtetrtr tenete tenete tenete tenete teens 1 1 PREREQUISITES cess tnnt rot Heer e dra i i e Ha ad aree pum de iren teda dederas omens 1 2 USING TALS MANUAL tatc 1 3 SECTION 2 GETTING STARTED AND INITIAL SETUP ASSEMBEING THE HARDWARE 2 aD ren 2 1 UNDERSTANDING COMPUTER BASIGS etae ntum rn e een Sete eara ch Esa deg dU
52. MTSX Model MDC SYSTEMS OPTIONS REM OPTIONS MDC System Remote Mon Radio Trace Enabled Remote Radio Mode Radio Trace Tx Base Time 10 Rx Base Time sec 10 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PREV NEXT MDC SYS EXIT SYS SYS REMOTE This screen allows you to change view parameters pertaining to the MDC system remote capabilities of the radio PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F4 The MDC CONFIGURATION MENU screen appears Press F3 The MDC SYSTEM screen appears Press F9 The MDC SYSTEM OPTIONS screen appears Press F9 The MDC SYSTEM REMOTE OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 PREV SYS Previous System allows you to go to the system before the current one F4 NEXT SYS Next System allows you to go to the system after the current one F9 MDC SYS MDC System MDC SYS REMOTE is used to change and view parameters associated with MDC System Remote Monitor Radio Trace features F10 EXIT
53. Menu screen F4 F3 F3 F4 Message Aliasing This option will permit you to customize the Message number and to assign an alias name to each message F7 For non keypad models this option can ONLY be used with the One Touch Button Feature Main Menu F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 The status feature must be enabled on the Trunking Personality screen F4 F4 F4 and the message mnemonic MSG must be assigned on the Radio Wide Menu screen F4 F3 F3 F4 Site Aliasing This option will permit you to customize the site number to assign an alias name to each site AMSS or SmartZone Coverage Type must be added on the Trunking System screen F4 F4 F3 and the SITE mnemonic must be assigned on the Radio Wide Menu screen F4 F3 F3 F4 for this feature to operate properly 68P81074C50 6 59 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 2 3 1 ONE TOUCH BUTTON OPTIONS E E el RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS ONE TOUCH ONE TOUCH BUTTON OPTIONS PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears 3 Press F3 The TRUNKING SYSTEM screen appears 4 Press F9 The TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen appears 5 Press F5 The ONE TOUCH BUTTON OPTIONS screen appears 6 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 7 If a
54. Press F5 at the GET SAVE Menu to clone the radio This saves programs the source file into the current radio 3 Clone the Radio Press F8 The cloning process will check for compatibility of the two radios automatically You will receive an error message if cloning cannot be performed 4 Disconnect the radio When Step 2 is completed disconnect the radio 5 Clone remaining radios Repeat Steps 1 3 for remaining radios If for any reason the radios cannot be cloned an error message will appear Check all connections or refer to Appendix A 3 4 8 Exit the RSS Table 3 26 Steps to Exit the RSS Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means 1 Goto MAIN MENU menu Press Esc to back up to MAIN MENU 2 Exitto DOS Press F10 then F2 to exit to DOS Congratulations You are now a radio programmer You now have a foundation for programming more radios To retain a good portion of what you ve learned so far please review this material or program another radio within 48 hours 3 28 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 5 ADDITIONAL RADIO MODELS The following tables list additional radio models and their Button Switch Menu Item defaults Table 3 27 MTS2000 RADIO BUTTON SWITCH MENU ITEM DEFAULTS OPTION H35 OPTION H36 OPTION H37 OPTION H38 CONV ONLY STARTSITE SMARTNET SMARTZONE TOP DISPLAY TOP DISPLAY TOP DISPLAY TOP DISPLAY NO KEYPAD NO KEYPAD NO KEYPAD NO KEYPAD Side Button 3 Monitor Private Call Moni
55. RSS GLOSSARY Software Squelch Sub directories SMARTNET System Central Controller System ID Talkaround Frequency Talkback TalkGroup Talk Permit Tone Talk Prohibit Tone Timeout timer TOT Transmission Trunking Trunk Trunking Typel 68P81074C50 A list of instructions that tell the computer what to do A radio circuit that eliminates noise from the speaker when a transmitted signal is not present A group of related files that are located on a hard disk or diskette Sub directories are used to organize your disks A type of trunking system primarily used in support of Public Safety and Industrial communication systems This type of system has emergency and dynamic regrouping capabilities Referred to as Central Controller is the heart of Motorola s trunking system The Central Controller is a software controlled computer driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it The Central Controller is responsible for monitoring and directing the operations of the trunked repeaters A number assigned to a trunked system distinguishing it from other systems The system ID is sent out every 3 seconds on the Control Channel A frequency used for simplex conversations or radio to radio communications without the use of a repeater Indicates that a call can be answered by pressing PTT and responding A group of users in Type Il or Type Ili system A programmable
56. Reset Carr Ovrd A 288 5 138 Auto Reset Duration sec B 600 9 121 Decoder 1 Call Type Decoder 2 Call Type F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE MORE EXIT SYS SYS SYS SYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F7 The AUXILIARY SYSTEMS MENU appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 2 3 4 Press F4 The QUIK CALL II SYSTEM screen appears 5 6 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD SYS Add System allows you to add a system F3 PREV SYS Previous System allows you to go to the system before the current one F4 NEXT SYS Next System allows you to go to the system after the current one F5 DELETE SYS Delete System allows you to delete a system F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 121 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS System Use the Up Down arrows to select the desired Quik Call 1 System The number may also be entered directly The system may also be selected via the function keys The radio may have a maximum number of 15 systems System Signalling Type This field dictates the System Signalling Typ
57. SERVICE VIA THE RSS Now that the hardware and software installation is complete and the RSS is up and running you are ready to personalize the radio s The following paragraphs are constructed to guide a qualified service technician through the allowable alignments and configurations to keep the radio s at full capability throughout its design life This section describes how to utilize the RSS manual through the various menus and screens to achieve any and all radio capabilities that may be desired by the radio users NOTE All functions supported and unsupported will be displayed in the menu s working area The unsupported functions based on the radio s model or options will NOT be displayed in the F key ID area 4 2 SERVICE MENU Ta RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN SERVICE SERVICE MENU HELP Transmitter Alignments Receiver Alignments Signalling Alignments Controller Board Initialization Program Exit Return to Main Menu 1 2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TX RX SIGNAL CBI EXIT ALIGN ALIGN ALIGN PROGRAM All radio alignment and board replacement procedures are accessed from the SERVICE MENU A radio must be connected to your computer via a RIB and cables and the radio turned on before you will be permitted to access the service screens CAUTION Do NOT switch radios in the middle of any SERVICE procedure Always use the EXIT
58. SUSI ER TEM gs F4 F4 F3 F6 F6 SYM TET F4 F4 F3 F9 SV SUOMI Tr F4 F6 F7 F2 SYM E F4 F6 F7 F4 SVSIOH Redit detis dso bets tase gen ER ERE F4 F6 F7 F4 F9 SYSTEM ceeded dens Ri Aes a eae F4 F6 F7 F5 68P81074C50 INDEX 10 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX SIVACI D EENAA AAEE n Ma sedet rag Meee E a eae F4 F4 F3 System Key d een pde titt pde a ex ie e ee a eee ae ave F3 F5 System KEV i stet tat aote dete esaet nt cane Phat so aee qtu as eens ese eae F4 F4 F3 SCIEN Ac F9 F3 System Package dcm ett adu eet tate NU ea ciet retta a pat F8 F2 System Package uen e RU E v ea dude e de e Dos F8 F3 F5 System Pretime Ims 2 edente a Ee Pann rue Debe o aD d RAE Lee eR ner F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 System Search Time sec F4 F3 F5 F8 System Signalling Type Tac hea a ae edes otia dent siepe F4 F6 F7 F4 System TYPO is ou haces en ee ea ae eee eee F4 F4 F3 System Type I II Ili Universal ennemis F3 F5 System F8 F2 System i ute tec e I eta eater te eau tu aa hdc i rte F8 F3 F5 System pm EE F4 F4 F4 T TGMS Patbli a ripetere pe a et t e aded Imad Cg ete Eds a rtv ae E Ceo ue etas F9 F3 TOMS Bath
59. The ROM is read only which means a user cannot write or save data to it over it delete it or in any other way destroy it by using the keyboard keys The program in the ROM is hard coded into the ROM chip and as such is protected from user errors 2 3 3 Hard Disk Drive The hard disk drive stores a user s programs and files data The data can originate from data the user generates at the keyboard or from data that is copied from a diskette in a diskette drive explained below The memory capacity of hard disk drives varies from computer to computer and can be increased with the purchase and installation of a memory upgrade Many hard disk drives can store 20 megabytes 20MB 20 million bytes 30MB or more than 40MB of data Most hard disks are labeled as the C drive 2 3 4 Diskettes Diskettes also store users programs and files but are different from hard disks because of their transportable small size and packaging A diskette must be formatted before storing your files and programs on it After a diskette is inserted into a diskette drive data on the magnetic diskette can be retrieved stored manipulated or erased Diskettes come in 3 1 2 inch and 5 1 4 inch sizes and their memory capacity varies from 360K low density to 1 44MB high density The RSS is distributed to you on a 3 1 2 low density diskette and two 5 1 4 low density diskettes so that it may be easily loaded onto any appropriate computer re
60. The TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen appears Press F7 The TRUNKING TALKGROUPS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD TLKGP Add Talkgroup allows you to add a Talkgroup F5 DELETE TLKGP Delete Talkgroup allows you to delete a Talkgroup F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 70 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW PARAMETERS FOR EACH NUMBER Personality Number Talkgroup This screen is used to enter Talkgroups subfleets that will use each personality Once the Talkgroups Subfleets are entered they are assigned to a Zone System and a Channel Subfleet selector position on the Zone Summary screen F4 F8 If the radio is secure equipped strapping features will be visible and secure strapping can be set up for each field The personality may have up to 16 talkgroups including an Announcement Group and or a Dynamic Regrouping talkgroup Failsoft Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to Enable Disable Failsoft for this talkgroup When the Central Site Controller fails in a Trunked system the system goes into Failsoft operation If the radio is set to Failsoft by TalkGroup then the radio will use these frequencies to transmit an
61. This also allows the radio user to modify the call ID list requires full keypad Disabled No Private Call operation is allowed Call Alert Operation Call Alert allows the operator to receive pages and to transmit pages either by typing in a 6 digit Decimal ID Unlimited or by selecting one of the IDs in the Trunking Call ID list List Only Response Only Allows the radio to accept pages only List Only Allows the radio user to send pages from the call list For non keypad models this option can ONLY be used with the One Touch Button Feature Main Menu F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Unlimited Allows the radio to send pages from the call list and from the keypad This also allows the radio user to modify the page ID list requires full keypad Disabled No Call Alert operation is allowed Select Response Only to only receive pages Select Disabled to disable paging facilities Phone Interconnect This option allows the radio to initiate and receive land to portable telephone calls and specifies the type of interconnect Choices are Answer Only Allows the radio to accept calls only List Only Allows the radio to make calls only from the phone list For non keypad models this option can ONLY be used with the One Touch Button Feature Main Menu F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Unlimited Allows the radio to make calls from the phone list and from the keypad This also allows the radio user to modify the phone list requires full keypad Disabl
62. To be able to take advantage of this feature a radio must be equipped with a numeric keypad This option affects only the Call Alert Encode and Selective Call Encode features 6 94 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 2 2 CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY PHONE OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press i i MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Personality MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS PHONE Personality CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY PHONE OPTIONS Auto Access Code Select DTMF Access Timing Table Initial Delay msec Digit Duration msec Integer Delay msec F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PREV NEXT EXIT PERS PERS This screen allows you to edit the conventional phone configuration for each conventional personality PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW menu appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F3 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen appears Press F8 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY PHONE OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 PREV PERS Previous Personality allows you to go to the personality before this one F4 NEXT PER
63. Trunking Talkgroup etaed ires 6 71 6 2 2 4 3 Trunking Emergency Data Configuration ssseeeeneeeenenenn 6 73 6 2 2 4 4 Trunking Personality Options sese 6 77 6 2 2 4 4 1 SmartZone Preferred Sites 6 79 6 2 2 5 Tr nking GalliBlsE suc eR UE PER anus 6 81 6 2 3 Conventional eiae pl clie ceterae eee Feo uaa bete eee tare deed e arid 6 82 6 2 3 1 Conventional Radio Wide Options sssssseeeeeeneenenenneeenren eene 6 85 6 2 3 2 Conventional Personality Using GE Star Signalling sseee 6 87 6 2 3 2 1 Personality MDG Options 6 93 6 2 3 2 2 Conventional Personality Phone Options sssseeeeeeneenennenenns 6 96 6 2 3 2 3 More Conventional Personality Options esssseeeeeeeeenennnenennns 6 98 6 2 3 2 3 1 Conventional RAC Options nennen 6 102 6 2 3 3 MDG Configuration MENU bine e HR ER AOI eite te ur REN 6 104 6 2 3 3 1 MDC Systems aon tern ge ye ted eed ed ian dee 6 105 6 2 3 3 2 More Emergency Options aeeie E 6 109 6 2 3 3 2 1 5 6 110 6 2 3 3 2 2 MDC System Remote Options 6 113 6 2 3 3 3 CalliList Ta
64. Type Disabled Time Out Timer F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 PREV NEXT DELETE TALK EMER MORE PERS PERS PERS GROUPS OPTIONS OPTIONS TRUNKING PERSONALITY Screen for System Type II These screens are used to view and edit the main information for a trunking personality such as the system number to use the Time Out Timer to use and the main options It also provides access to the other trunking screens Sub Fleets Talkgroups and Emergency 6 64 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTION F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD PERS allows you to add a personality You will automatically be moved to the new personality To remove a personality simply remove any references to it from the Mode Summary Screen The personality will be removed when you save or program to a radio F3 PREV PERS allows you to go to the personality before this one F4 NEXT PERS allows you to go to the personality after this one F5 DELETE PERS allows you to delete the current personality F7 SUBFLEETS allow you to edit the position of the Sub Fleets and associated data such as secure strapping and scan type or TALKGROUPS allows you to edit the positions of the talkgroups and associated data such as secure strapping and scan type F8 EMER OPTIONS Emergency Options allows you to edit and enable the emergency information such as the default Talkgroup and edit emergency options
65. When the Scan Select field in the Personality screen is set to Non XL the selected value for this field is used when scanning The range is 60 6375 in 25 ms increments The factory default is 275 ms XL Scan Unsquelch Duration When scanning for coded transmissions this field determines the period of time the radio will wait for a Non XL Cipher Feedback or XL encrypted signal to be detected following a carrier detect When the Scan Select field in the Personality screen is set to Non XL amp XL the selected value for this field is used when scanning The factory default is 875 ms The range is 60 6375 in 25 ms increments Secure Punch Thru Use UP DOWN arrow keys to scroll or directly enter the desired value The RSS shall allow the user to set the Secure Punch Thru feature to one of the following settings Disabled Always On or to a Variable Volume Position i e the feature will become active when the volume knob is set to a level greater than this programmed volume position The valid range of the Variable Volume Position is from 1 to 254 which corresponds to the absolute position of the radio volume knob Secure Punch Thru is a feature intended to reduce high volume distortion in the secure receive mode by removing much of the distortion producing low frequency content i e from amplifier clipping and speaker housing overload and improve intelligibility in high background noise environments i e the radio is at high volume by boo
66. a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD SYS Add System allows you to add a system F3 PREV SYS Previous System allows you to go to the system before the current one F4 NEXT SYS Next System allows you to go to the system after the current one 6 104 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW F5 DELETE SYS Delete System allows you to delete a system F7 MORE EMER OPTIONS is used to configure the MDC Emergency Feature parameters in addition to the ones located on the MDC SYSTEMS and MDC SYSTEMS OPTIONS Screens F9 MORE OPTIONS allows you to change or view additional MDC system field parameters F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS MDC System This is the number of the MDC system Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to change the MDC system or directly enter the system number Primary ID Enter the primary unit ID in this field It is a four digit number Enter a value or use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select Primary Identification Code from 1 to DEEE The ID is in a hexadecimal number The digit F is not allowed in the ID The primary identification code PID indicates which unit on the network sent the message All inbound messages will be sent with this identification code Secondary ID Enter a value
67. a series of three quick tones that sound once the PTT button has been pressed and your radio has keyed up on the voice channel assigned by the trunked central controller You may begin talking immediately Time Out Timer The radio contains four Time Out Timers You may select one of the four timers The values for the timers can be changed on the CHANGE VIEW RAD CONFIG RAD WIDE MORE OPTIONS screen Factory default is 60 sec Private Call Type Enable this field if you want the radio to be able to initiate Trunked Private Call Use the up down arrow keys to select the desired PRIVATE CALL type The valid possibilities in this field are DISABLED ENHANCED PC II and Advanced ENHANCED is the only valid type for 900 Mhz radios and it is not allowed on any other band Only PC II is allowed for 800 Mhz Type II and Type Ili personalities For Type personalities both type PC and PC II private calls can be made so PC or PC II can be chosen or PCI PCII if both types of private call will be made from this personality Operation Use the up down arrow keys to select the operation of the Private Call feature for this personality Response Only Allows the radio to accept calls only List Only Allows the radio user to make calls from the call list For non keypad models this option can ONLY be used with the One Touch Button Feature Main Menu F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Unlimited Allows the radio to make calls from the call list and from the keypad
68. allows you to change the DTMF access codes F9 DIAL OPTIONS allows you change DTMF timing parameters F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 6 22 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Man Acc Live Dialing This feature when enabled allows you to put in the access codes manually and dial numbers from the keypad while transmitting When enabled this will override the Phone Dialing selection on the Dial Options screen F9 The factory default is Disabled Phone Num Display Format This field is used when special formatting is required to display phone numbers such as when the phone number is longer than the display If set to USA the phone numbers will be assumed to be area code number The default setting means no special formatting is required The factory default is None Phone Number Enter the phone number of up to 16 characters here The ten digits are all valid and so are the special characters P and The P causes the radio to pause momentarily during dialing The length of the pause is programmable and is on the DIAL OPTIONS screen Numbers can be added or deleted with the F2 and F5 function keys Place the cursor over the number to be deleted New numbers will be added at the end of the list A total of 19 numbers are allowed Phone Text Enter the name that will appear on the radio display for this phone number
69. announcement calls Revert Announcement Group or Revert Fleet ID Strapping This field configures the transmit mode of Emergency Announcement Group or Emergency Fleet ID If set to Clear or Secure the Emergency Announcement Group or Fleet ID is forced to that particular transmit mode When set to Select the user is allowed to select the secure or clear transmit modes via the radio s two position concentric switch Revert TalkGroup or Revert Subfleet This field contains the Emergency User TalkGroup for use during an emergency for the current personality The Emergency Default Talk Group is a 3 digit hexadecimal number Database controlled parameter Emergency Type II only parameter If the tactical emergency feature is disabled then all emergency transmissions will be made on this default talkgroup If tactical is enabled then all emergency transmission are made on the currently selected talkgroup The only exception would be when the radio has been dynamically regrouped and the dynamic regrouping mode is selected in which case the emergency transmission would be made on the dynamic regrouping talkgroup Revert Talkgroup or Revert Subfleet Strapping This field configures the transmit mode of Emergency TalkGroup or Emergency Subfleet If set to Clear or Secure the Emergency Talkgroup or the Emergency Subfleet is forced to that particular transmit mode When set to select the user is allowed to select the secure or clear transmit mode
70. appears Press F4 The TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen appears Press F9 The TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 PREV PERS allows you to go to the personality before this one F4 NEXT PERS allows you to go to the personality after this one F6 PREF SITES calls up a screen which allows you to enter the preferred site status for SmartZone transmitter sites This function will only be active when a radio containing the SmartZone software option has been read and SmartZone is enabled on the system associated with the current personality F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 76 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Field Definitions Personality Use the up down arrow keys to scroll through the available personalities Alternately the F3 F4 function keys can be used to navigate through the available personalities Conversation Type Use the up down arrow keys to select the Trunking Conversation type choices are Message Transmission or PTT ID Message Trunked After the initiator dekeys the radio the voice channel stays active hang time so other members of the talkgroup can respond on
71. arrow keys to select PL Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Press F4 to advance to next personality Press F10 twice to go to Change View Menu 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 2 10 Program the Zone Channel Features Next Now that the personalities are programmed we ll assign them to switch positions using the Zone Channel screen Table 3 8 Steps to Program Zone Channel Features Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to Zone Channel Assignment screen Add desired number of channels Go to Page 1 Go to Channel Name field Type in desired name Go to Personality Number field Assign the desired personality number to each Channel Number Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the remainder of the channels Exit to Change View Menu From the Change View menu press F8 to see the Zone Channel Assignment screen Pressing F6 repeatedly will add additional channels Press Page Down key to advance to page 1 Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Type desired name via the keyboard up to 11 characters Press Enter or Tab to advance to Personality field NOTE Character field may be changed to a maximum of 14 characters from Main Menu F4 F3 F6 Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Type desired Personality number via keyboard or up down arrow keys Press F10 to exit to Change View Menu If more than 16 personalities channels were
72. be used to scroll through indexes values The factory default for Singletone will be 300Hz for DTMF will be zero and for MDC will be 1 RAB 2 Code Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Repeater Access Button operation Depending on your radio capabilities choices will be Singletone DTMF MDC or None The factory default is None RAB 2 Singletone Hz For Singletone and MDC enter the index from the Singletone List or the MDC repeater ID List For DTMF enter the tone value DTMF Tone values are 0 9 and Optionally the UP DOWN arrow keys could be used to scroll through indexes values The factory default for Singletone will be 300Hz for DTMF will be zero and for MDC will be 1 6 102 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 3 MDC CONFIGURATION MENU RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV MDC MDC CONFIGURATION MENU HELP MDC Systems MDC Call List Data MDC Repeater ID List F3 F4 SYSTEM DATA LIST This screen allows you to edit the MDC options for the radio PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears 3 Press F4 The MDC CONFIGURATION MENU appears 4 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu sc
73. cannot be run as a Double Space file With extended memory the application will now run with less than 100K of conventional memory available Resident programs and TSR Terminate amp Stay Resident utilities no longer have to be disabled This has also permitted the installation procedure to be significantly improved and simplified The CONFIG SYS modifications required to run the application have been automated and are described in the rest of this introduction A new Tutorial section Chapter 3 has been added to the manual to discuss programming requirements of some of the specific MT2000 MTX8000 MTX9000 and MTS2000 models This release added support for Secure MTS2000 radio models and also corrected some defects of the previous release 1 3 1 EXTENDED MEMORY OPERATION Previous versions of this application recommended the usage of extended memory for a RAMDrive to reduce the disk l O access time The application however only used conventional memory for actual execution This version does not require the use of a RAMDrive or a SMARTDrive 1 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS INTRODUCTION The new install program will determine if your system has an adequate amount of memory available 3M and a 286 386 or 486 CPU for extended memory operation If present the RSS will be installed The following line should be added to the CONFIG SYS file if necessary device c dos HIMEM SYS device c dos EMM386 EXE OFF Files 30 NOTE The
74. created an additional zone will be required Zones can be added on the zone channel screen by pressing F2 The channels in a particular zone should be grouped in some logical way such as geographical area or work group 68P81074C50 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 2 11 Fill In the Scan List Now that the Zone Channel features are programmed we ll now fill in the Scan List which was created earlier Table 3 9 Steps to Fill In the Scan List Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to Radio Wide From the Change View menu press F3 to see Configuration menu the Radio Wide Configuration Menu Go to Scan List Press F5 to see Scan List screen If 1 is not already displayed for Scan List number press F3 to see previous list If 1 is displayed proceed ahead Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next Go to Member Zone field Enter 1 this is the only zone applicable in this tutorial Type desired channel number to be scanned Enter channel desired to scan Press Enter to select desired channel number Repeat steps 3 through 5 We will assume that factory defaults are until all desired channels are suitable for remaining fields entered If you have created more than 1 Scan List repeat entire table for each scan list Exit to MAIN MENU Press Esc to exit to MAIN MENU 3 10 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 2 12 Program the Personality Into the Codeplug Now that you have set values for all t
75. defined on the following page 6 78 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Site ID The value specifies the site ID of the site having preferred status The range of values is 1 to 64 Prefer Status The value of the preferred site status for the site The choices are None site is given no preference If the site is not listed here the radio automatically assigns it no preference Least site will be avoided unless it is the only usable site for operation Preferred site will be used over all non preferred sites with similar signal strength Always site will be used over all non preferred sites with similar signal strength even if site loses communication with the zone controller enter site trunking 68P81074C50 6 79 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 2 5 TRUNKING CALL LIST F5 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press 5 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select List MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING CALL LIST Call List CALL LIST TABLE Call ID Call Text Call Text 1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE ADD DELETE EXIT LIST LIST LIST LIST CALLID CALLID This screen is used to edit Trunking Call IDs and the associated names or aliases The number of characters for the name will be determined by the display capability of the radio Each trunking system may have a unique call list and each list may have a maximum of 19 IDs The call list
76. ecc id tar t Hava adie uera ete set on MERE ub ede qa F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 2 0 ette eere eile aves eae vee de andy ete aed F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 RAB 2 MDC Repeater 0 F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 2 5 2 tici ll eerie ested ie die ied dap vt a eden qug eed F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 SIGGtOMC eR PEERS F4 F6 F7 F2 RADIO CONFIGURATION seine t cia ae dane ea eee eed Pande F8 F2 RADIO WIDE BUTTON CONFIG sssssssssssseseeneenenen nennen nnns nnns inrer nennen nennen F4 F3 F3 F2 RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION F4 F3 RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OP TON S 0 0c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeaeeeceaeeeesaaeeseaeeessaaeeeeeeeeessaeeeseneees F4 F3 F6 RADIO WIDE EMERGENCY OPTIONS sess nennen sen rennen nennen F4 F3 F2 F7 RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIG c cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeceaeeeseaaeeseaeeesseaeesseeeeesaeesseaeees F4 F3 F3 RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGQ sssesessseeneeee nennen F4 F3 F3 F4 RADIO WIDE OPTIONS ot a ea e ena ete tee ER ete ee etas the F4 F3 F2 RADIO WIDE OPTIONS gerer a dva degere cad e ae Pv vee ues F4 F3 F2 F9 68P81074C50 INDEX 7 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX RADIO WIDE SECURE OPTIONS sse eene enn nnne taaa iienaa iadaa F4 F3 F2 F6 RADIO WIDE SWITCH CONFIGQ ssesesesseseseeene
77. function key F10 to return to the MAIN MENU before disconnecting the radio Improper exits from service screens may leave the radio in an improperly configured state resulting in seriously degraded radio or system performance Refer to your radio service manual for detailed service procedures All service screens read and program the radio codeplug directly you do NOT have to use the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU functions unless you are changing or printing data You will be prompted at each service screen to save the new values before exiting the screen 68P81074C50 4 1 SERVICE MTSX RSS PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 TX ALIGN Transmitter Alignment function is used to perform standard radio transmit alignment procedures Standard periodic alignment procedures are performed from this menu Refer to your radio service manual for transmit alignment procedures These procedures should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Failure to perform alignment procedures properly may result in seriously degraded radio or system performance Before adjusting signalling deviation radio compensation deviation adjustments must be made No adjustments are required for DPL PL or trunking connect tone deviation Whenever an
78. keys to override the Universal ID for Individual calls When this option is enabled the radio will use the PFI Personal Fleet ID to initiate individual calls instead of the Universal ID Factory default is Disabled Size Code Use the up down arrow keys to choose the SIZE CODE for this fleet Valid SIZE CODES are A B C D E F G H I J K M O Q The SIZE CODE determines the maximum number of fleets subfleets and individual IDs allowed The SIZE CODE and fleet ID chosen must match the programming of the Central Controller Size Code Prefix Fleet Subfleet Individual ID A 0 7 00 7F A C 000 OOF B 0 7 00 OF A G 000 C 0 7 00 07 A G 000 07F D 0 7 00 00 A O 000 1FF E 0 7 00 3F A C 000 01F F 0 7 00 1F A G 000 01F G 0 7 00 1F A C 000 H 0 7 00 OF A C 000 07F 0 7 00 07 A C 000 OFF J 0 7 00 03 A G 000 OFF K 0 7 00 01 A O 000 OFF M 0 3 00 00 A O 000 3FF 0 1 00 00 000 7FF Q 0 0 00 00 A O 000 FFF 68P81074C50 6 51 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Fleet ID The Fleet ID is a three digit hexadecimal number where the first digit is the prefix and the second two digits are the Fleet For any size code the subfleets for Fleetwide and Dynamic Regrouping are always available The valid range for the Fleet depends on the size code chosen Examples of Fleet IDs are 300 402 001 and 703 Individual ID Enter the Trunking Individual ID in hex The Individual ID is a number that u
79. oa dl Ae F4 F6 F7 F5 inesset pbi on 4 6 Codeplug Self Test recie aa aa 4 2 Connect TONG HZ F4 F4 F3 Gonsole Ack Required ge aee a eee ll ela a eed F4 F4 F4 F8 Control Channels rire p ete herede dat utet eo F4 F4 F4 F6 Cony DE F4 F3 F3 F4 Gonwventional cedi Ae imet dei p tes a tone exe indt ete ec be tie F4 F3 F3 F2 Conventional Feature cid ee ee dg eee Weed ain Ba eee F4 F3 F3 F3 Conventional F8 F2 F7 Conventional Operation cicer e gt cre E pete Lee ed du ae De tu E T ativan F8 F3 F5 Gonversation Types ae tetti ak sd eet dabat od dans Loses uada F4 F4 F3 Conversation Type eee esce E etu ud eee eee ella F4 F4 F4 F9 Coverage Typ6 sire ote ate ble Lb Aa dete LE ipaa de feld reduc dear aac atte F4 F4 F3 Current ArChive til i pex E ret E Uta ede LIP dig PL ded ee adit F6 F5 68P81074C50 INDEX 2 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX Current FEASECOGO 9 au eeu donus F8 F3 Current FEASEHecode witness F8 F3 F5 Current FLASHC0 dC aceite ee deer e e edere ipe aD e dae ee ae F8 F3 F5 F9 D DELETE ARGHIVE FILE rre etie ert aet ded ite tae ean edad ea eee eda
80. on the system A call in a wide area coverage system which utilizes a voice channel in all sites of the system The contents of the radios EEPROM transformed into ASCII values and stored in the computer s RAM while the RSS is being used 68P81074C50
81. or use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select Secondary Identification Code from 0 to OEEE EEEE for the terminal This ID is a hexadecimal number The digit F is not allowed in the ID This is the secondary ID assigned to the radio unit by the host The secondary ID is related to the position of the unit Variable ID The Variable Unit ID is used to group radios so that several radios will decode the same selective call or call alert The variable unit ID is a three digit number from 0 to EEE This ID is a hexadecimal number The digit F is not allowed in the ID On a system which uses fleets and groups the first digit of the variable ID represents the fleet and the last two digits of the ID represent the group ie VID FGG Leading PTT ID Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable or disable the UNIT IDENTIFICATION data packet transmission at the BEGINNING of each transmission BOT If the leading PTT ID feature is enabled each time you press the microphone PTT the radio automatically will send the radio s unit identification code to the dispatcher 68P81074C50 6 105 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS PTT ID Sidetone Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable or disable the PTT ID Sidetones During the transmission of data packets the microphone and all voice transmission is automatically disabled PTT ID Sidetones are used to indicate when the data transmission is complete and you may begin talking If PTT ID Sidetones are enabled a continuous alert tone w
82. separated 45 MHz depending upon the original communications system configuration Radio Interface Box used to connect a computer system to a radio for the purpose of communication between the radio and the computer The RIB consist of level shifting circuits that convert from the standard RSS 232 voltage levels of the computer asynchronous serial interface to the single ended voltage levels present on the Serial Bus contacts of the radio s feature connector In conjunction with the RIB an appropriate RIB to cable and RIB to computer cable must be used A cable that allows the radio to be connected interfaced with a computer for programming or tuning Random Access Memory The PC s RAM is used to store the radio s codeplug data while it is being viewed or modified These changes will not become permanent in the radio s codeplug until the radio is programmed The operation by which a radio s codeplug information is transferred from the radio s EEPROM to the workspace via the RIB Radio Service Software An asynchronous serial data transmission standard that defines the required sequencing and hardware interface Receiver The means by which a radio s codeplug information is transferred from the workspace to a personality file A list of functions that are accessed by pressing a function key A subdivision of a directory that contains a group of related files Sub directories are used to organize your disks 68P81074C50 MTSX
83. sinet rust eerie ede it uere uA Tea doe rebns F3 F4 TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE nenne sin rentrer F2 F2 F4 TRANSMIT DEVIATION 2 2 5 TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT 2 2 6 TRANSMIT POWER catt ete t curet tv ent ck da F2 F2 F3 TRANSMIT SIGNALLING iiin iiaiai i add ae erae ade tlc d desee gun F2 F4 F3 TRANSMIT SIGNALLING MDC 1200 trennen nns F2 F4 F4 TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU F2 F2 TRUNKING MENU accion obse eoe cud Ta aes oe ated F4 F4 TR NKING MESSAQGE ALJIAS ccce ie dg te dc i dee Tae du e dn F4 F4 F3 F9 F7 TRUNKING PERSONALITY 4 4 4 TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS essere nennen nennen sin nrte F4 F4 F4 F9 TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS ssssssssseseseeeeee tensis nnne F4 F4 F2 TR NKING SITE ADIAS i receiv eet de det ee tO addo th Pain Ae F4 F4 F3 F9 F8 TRUNKING STATUS ALIAS portet eio eon tied Uta teenies Ove e cen D rv F4 F4 F3 F9 F6 TRUNKING SUBFEEETS 2 2 tret erar tete react vn tee eels datas Dre e Ed cedo ends F4 F4 F4 F7 ette e eed reso esie ct F4 F4 F3 TRUNKING SYSTEM F4 F4
84. sound This key performs exactly like the Enter or Return key Enter or Return Accepts data currently in a field then moves the prompt forward one field If the entry is not accepted an error beep will sound This key is usually two or four times as large as the letter keys on the keyboard This key performs exactly like the Tab key 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS 68P81074C50 GETTING STARTED Back Tab Shift Tab Accepts data currently in field then moves prompt backward one field at a time To back tab press and hold Shift key and press the Tab key Left Arrow Moves cursor left one space The Backspace key will also move the cursor backward left one space at a time Num Lock key must be off Right Arrow Moves cursor right one space Num Lock key must be off Up Arrow Scrolls through selections or increases the current relative value On some keyboards the Num Lock key must be off Down Arrow Scrolls through selections or decreases the current relative value On some keyboards the Num Lock key must be off Back Space Erases the current character in the field and moves cursor one space backward left The backspace key on some keyboards is a left arrow On some keyboards the Num Lock key must be off Del Erases current character in field PgUp Displays the previous page information on the screen This is on the numeric keypad on the right side of the keyboard On some keyboards the Num Lock key mu
85. the codeplug will be checked for valid serial number model number check sums etc 5 2 1 1 READING CODEPLUG DATA FROM THE RADIO Requires RIB F2 RSS LOCATION At the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU press Tai MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN GET SAVE PROG READ RADIO READ RADIO CODEPLUG Reading Codeplug Block 1 of 34 To read codeplug data from the radio press F2 READ RADIO function at the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU the READ RADIO CODEPLUG screen will appear refer to the screen shown above A series of status messages will appear in the upper right corner of the screen If a communication error occurs a pop up window will be displayed If no errors occur the center of the screen will display the progress of the codeplug read The read process will take approximately one minute depending on the type of computer and the size of the codeplug being read After the codeplug is read the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU will be displayed PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Press F2 The READ RADIO CODEPLUG screen appears FIELD DEFINITION Reading Codeplug Blocks This is the number of blocks that have been read The status bar shows the relative value of the number of blocks read so far compared to the total number of blocks to be read 68P81074C50 5 3 GET SAVE PROGRAM MTSX RSS 5 2 1 2 READING CODEPLUG DATA FROM AN ARCHIVE FILE Requires RIB F3 RSS LO
86. the radio to malfunction and can cause operator confusion PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears 3 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU appears 4 5 Press F4 The RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGURATION screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 6 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value Function key descriptions and field definitions are on the following page 68P81074C50 6 19 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD CNV ITM Add Conventional Item allows you to add a conventional item F4 DELETE CNV ITM Delete Conventional Item allows you to delete a conventional item F7 ADD TRK ITM Add Trunked Item allows you to add a trunked item F9 DELETE TRK ITM Delete Trunked ltem allows you to delete a trunked item F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Conv Item Press the up down arrow keys to select Menu functions Use F2 to add and F4 to delete conventional items Depending on your radio version and model number you will be able to choose from all or some of the functions listed below CHAN SUB Select Change Channels BLANK No Fun
87. then store the archive files for that specific model within the appropriate model directory This way archive files for multiple model types are not located in the same directory last point we recommend is to dedicate and create a separate diskette for your backup files always make backup copies of your files If you routinely store archive files on your hard disk make backup copies of your files on a diskette 68P81074C50 2 11 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 6 1 Organizing Your Hard Disk Below is a sample directory tree for storing your radio archive files on your computer s hard disk Though your hard disk directory tree may be a little different based upon your way of doing business this setup may be a starting point for you The install program will automatically create the MRSS and MTSX directories for you if they do not exist We suggest that you execute the following command before starting If you place it in your autoexec bat file it will be executed every time the computer is started PROMPT P G The prompt will the show your current location in the directory tree Note how the prompt changes when the following commands are typed to change directories The prompt is shown in bold face C gt prompt P G C gt CD mrss C mrss gt DATA BASE GRAPHICS pro p x VISARPP SABERSI MTSX Etc ARCHIVE EXECUTABLE PROGRAM FILES
88. to do so may result in improper behavior of the radio 68P81074C50 6 21 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 1 3 PHONE CONFIGURATION RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press gt gt MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG PHONE PHONE CONFIGURATION Man Acc Live Dialing Disabled Phone Num Display Format Num Phone Number Phone Text PHONE 1 PHONE 2 PHONE 3 PHONE 4 PHONE 5 PHONE 6 PHONE 7 PHONE 8 2 F5 F8 F9 ADD DELETE ACCESS DIAL NUMBER NUMBER DEACCESS OPTIONS This menu allows you to edit the telephone interconnect configuration for your radio including stored telephone numbers and aliases These parameters are radio wide and apply to both trunking and conventional PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F4 The PHONE CONFIGURATION screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value Enter the phone number via the keyboard FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD NUMBER allows you to add a new phone number F5 DELETE NUMBER allows you to delete an existing phone number F8 ACCESS DEACCESS
89. to spend some time now deciding which types or groups of files should be located together in a common place called a directory You can make directories using the DOS MD or MKDIR commands or inside the RSS via the FILE MAINTENANCE MENU You may want to organize your directories first by customer area then by customer name and finally by radio model type or perhaps in the reverse order Consider the different ways in which you operate your business do you separate radio files by customer location by sales revenue by fiscal year or perhaps by date of purchase When deciding how to organize your files and directories we suggest a few things First we advise you to put as few directories as possible near the top or root of your directory tree considering your future growth too For example if you have 100 customers within 4 geographical areas we suggest your first level of sub directories be the areas that encompass the customer The next level of directories would be the customer names within each of those areas The idea is to make the root system spread out wider the deeper you grow similar to a pyramid shape e Keep the RSS diskette contents in one directory and your archive files in a different directory e Keep archive files in separate directories according to radio model type MT MTX MTS etc It is not possible to know a file s model type by looking at the file name Have a separate directory name for each radio model
90. to your radio service manual for the squelch alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel The squelch attenuator setting is increased or decreased by pressing the up down arrow keys respectively A relative value between 0 and 63 will be displayed on the screen Adjust the squelch setting to the desired value This screen allows you to adjust the squelch level for each test mode frequency Use the up down arrows to change the value of the squelch Use the Tab key to move between frequency points PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F3 The RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F6 The SQUELCH 25 30kHz screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Field Definition This is the squelch attenuator softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 22 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 2 6 RECEIVE VCO CROSSOVER ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATIO
91. trunked system When the radio can no longer communicate with the base the radio will give an Out of Range alert tone display an Out of Range message or both This feature can be disabled by setting the value to No Indication The factory default is No Indication Channel Change ID Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the Channel Change ID field Enabling this field allows access to the CCID Registration field located on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS screen F4F6F3F9 The factory default is Disabled CCID Delay Timer To set the value for this field use the UP DOWN arrow keys or enter directly This field determines the length of time the radio must be idle on a zone channel before the Channel Change ID is transmitted Valid entries are 0 8 0 sec in 0 5 sec increments The factory default is 2 sec 68P81074C50 6 5 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Block Pending CA PC When enabled the radio will ignore all successive Call Alerts after receiving a Call Alert with a different ID than the one originating the pending call Factory default is Disabled Rotary Switch Scan Prgm Use the up down arrow keys to define the operation of the Channel Rotary during scan programming when BOTH Zone and Channel selection are from the radio menu i e the rotary is not used The rotary can be used to step through either CHANNELS or ZONES during scan programming This feature is ONLY applicable when both the zone and channel selections are from the menu
92. us to access the CHANGE VIEW menu From here we can program the features we want on each channel and the ones we want common to all channels First we ll program the common radio wide features Note that some screens are not accessed leaving many parameters at factory default values which are suitable in most cases Table 3 5 Steps to Program Radio Wide Features Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to CHANGE VIEW menu Press Esc to back up to MAIN MENU Press F4 at the MAIN MENU to see the CHANGE VIEW Menu Go to Radio Wide Configuration Menu Go to Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu Go to Radio Wide Switch Configuration screen Select Scan Exit to Radio Wide Configuration Menu Go to Scan Lists and Options Add a second Scan List Exit to Radio Wide Configuration Menu At the CHANGE VIEW menu press F3 to see the Radio Wide Configuration Menu Press F3 to see Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu Press F3 to see Radio Wide Switch Configuration Screen The two position concentric switch Conventional Feature will be highlighted Press up down arrow keys to select Scan for Position A and Blank for position B NOTE We will assume that the factory defaults are suitable for remaining controls Press F10 twice to see Radio Wide Configuration menu Press F5 Scan Type Conventional will be highlighted press Tab until Scan List is
93. use basic scan etc 3 Determine desired features to program radio wide all systems 4 Determine desired features to program per system per personality etc 3 3 3 High Level Programming Flow The overview of the flow of programming in this example is as follows Read the radio Merge the TCMS download file with the radio s codeplug Assign button switch functions that differ from factory defaults Program the phone list Reference the scan list to each personality Assign personalities to switch positions on the zone channel screen Fill in the scan list with desired zone channel entries Program the radio ON OO PON gt 3 3 4 Step by Step Specific Programming Instructions We have designed a sample chart Page 3 14 for recording the features you wish to program into your trunked radio See Appendix F for a blank form you can use for future radios 68P81074C50 3 13 TRUNKED RADIO PERSONALITY CHART TIVIHOLNL FEATURE NAME Pers 1 Pers 2 Talkgroups mu o Interconnect Ayjeuosidd pexunaj ZL eiqer Scan List Channel 0SD7Z018d89 E o gt lt J o o MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 3 5 MTX68000 9000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item Defaults Table 3 13 MTX8000 9000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item Defaults MODEL B3 MODEL B4 MODEL B5 MODEL B7 NO DISPLAY TOP DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY NO KEYPAD NO KEYPAD LIMITED KEYPAD FUL
94. values from 1 to the maximum number of GE STAR systems are allowed The radio will support a maximum of 7 GE STAR systems MDC System Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the MDC system to be used by this personality To add and or configure MDC systems access the MDC SYSTEM screen F4 F6 F4 The factory default is 1 PTT ID Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the MDC Unit Identification feature for this personality When this feature is enabled each time the transmitter is keyed and or dekeyed the Unit ID will be broadcast The factory default is Disabled Quik Call 1 System Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available selections or directly enter the desired value Integer values from 1 to the maximum number of QUIK CALL II systems are allowed The radio will support a maximum of 15 QUIK CALL II systems Revert Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Emergency transmit channel The choices are Selected Channel or Channel 1 2 or 3 Selected Channel will cause the emergency transmission to always be broadcast on the current personality However the emergency transmission can also be reverted to another personality Each MDC System also contains a table of three emergency revert channels which are configured on the MDC System menu F4 F6 F4 F3 Channels 1 2 and 3 refer to that table The factory default is Selected Channel 68P81074C50 6 89 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Note Receive Only personalities mus
95. you press F9 from the SERVICE MENU the RSS will display the following pop up message Warning The radio attached to the RIB is not a CBl initialized radio WARNING DO NOT turn off the radio or disconnect the radio from the computer while it is attempting to program the codeplug Interrupting the programming process will destroy codeplug contents and completely disable the radio PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F2 The TRANSMIT ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Press F9 The CONTROLLER BOARD INITIALIZATION CBI appears FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F9 PROGRAM RADIO Programs the selected value into the radio The RSS will display the following message Warning Continue to program the following serial number into the CBI radio Serial Number gt Press F2 to proceed with the initialization and F10 to cancel If communication with the radio fails the RSS will display a pop up error message Check you cable connections and try again F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 4 14 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE Field Definitions Serial Number Enter the serial number of the radio you wish to initialize This number can be found on the outside casing of the radio You will NOT be able to initialize the CBI radio unless you enter a valid serial
96. 0 2 5 RSS Diskette s 2 11 2 6 Steps to Create Hard Disk Directory Tree 2 15 2 7 Steps to Backup the RSS Diskette s ssssssssssssssssesseeeee nennen nennen nennen nennen 2 16 2 8 RSS Hard Disk Installation Procedure enne snnt nnns 2 18 2 9 Hard Disk Startup Procedures 2 19 2 10 Greating Archive File Paths asaridan dace eta REC ote bare DRE alates 2 32 2 11 Settiig a POLL ost eod xa 2 33 3 1 Quick Steps to Bring Up MAIN MENU nnns senten intr senes 3 1 3 2 Conventional Radio Personality 3 3 3 3 MT2000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item Defaults ssssssssseseseeeeenenenne nennen 3 4 3 4 Steps to Read A Radio s Personality Codeplug sss 3 6 3 5 Steps to Program Radio Wide Features sssssssssesssssesesee eene esent nennen nnns nnns 3 6 3 6 Steps to Create a Phone 5 3 7 3 7 Steps to Program Conventional Personalties ssesssssssssssseeeeeeeeene nennen 3 8 3 8 Steps to Program Zone Channel Features
97. 1 F10 4 f you entered a new directory path press F2 to create the directory FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 DEFINE PATH allows you to enter a pathname F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 8 3 FILE MAINTENANCE MTSX RSS 8 2 2 DELETE ARCHIVE FILE RSS LOCATION At the FILE MAINTENANCE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN FILE MAINT DELETE ARCHIVE Current Archive CAMRSSMTSXMARCHIVE DELETE ARCHIVE FILE FileName FileName FileName FileName HELP prt mtsx cfg patty arc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP CHANGE DELETE EXIT ARCHIVE FILE This screen allows you to delete unwanted files from the computer s disk drive PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F6 at the MAIN MENU The FILE MAINTENANCE MENU appears Press F5 The DELETE ARCHIVE FILE screen appears Enter the path of the directory which holds the unwanted files by typing the pathname on the Current Archive field Press Tab to select the desired file name Once you have selected the file name press the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 CHANGE ARCHIVE allows you to change the directory which you are viewing F5 DELETE FILE al
98. 2 11 Changing a Field Value Press or to change field or type new value 2 28 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 10 SETTING CONFIGURING THE RSS COMPUTER DEFAULTS Now that you are aware of how fields screens and menus relate to one another this section introduces the concept of saving certain default computer information Setting the computer defaults eliminates the need to specify them every time you enter the RSS or program a radio Read this section if you want to 1 Seta default file path name so you won t have to specify it every time you save a radio archive file 2 Setor change the default port used to interface with the radio and RIB 3 Setthe default colors you see on your RSS screen If you ve been with us from the start you should be at the MAIN MENU If you ve just joined us or got lost inside the RSS screens press Esc to get to the MAIN MENU From the MAIN MENU press F9 to get to the SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU From the SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU you can either read the on line help set some default computer values or exit Pressing F3 on the SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU will display the CONFIGURE COMPUTER screen where you can specify the default drive and path names for future archive files Pressing F7 on the SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU displays CONFIGURE SCREEN where you can specify the colors for your screen s text lines background and highlighted fields MOT
99. 4 F8 RADIO TRUNK ZONE CHN CONFIG ASSIGN The CHANGE VIEW MENU is a multi level menu that is used to view or modify codeplug features and option configurations All codeplug parameters are classified as either Radio Configuration Conventional or Trunking The CHANGE VIEW MENU functions permit access to each category Unlike the SERVICE MENU functions a codeplug must be loaded into your computer s memory via the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU functions before you can access the CHANGE VIEW screens You may change or view an archive file without a radio connected NOTE If your radio model does not contain a specific feature you will not be permitted access to the corresponding data field or screen for that feature Refer to you radio catalog sheets or radio service manual for radio model descriptions and features 68P81074C50 6 1 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS IMPORTANT NOTE The CHANGE VIEW MENU does NOT actually modify the radio codeplug data but instead modifies a copy of the data retrieved from the codeplug or archive file via the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU functions After all CHANGE VIEW modifications are completed you MUST return to the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU and program the changes back into the radio or save them to a new archive file Otherwise the modifications will be lost when you turn off your computer or load in another codeplug PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Select the des
100. 4C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F2 The TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F4 The TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE COMPENSATION screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITION New Softpot Value This is the balance value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 68P81074C50 4 9 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 1 4 TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT Current Frequency Value New Softpot Value 806 0125 185 185 815 0125 185 185 824 9875 185 185 851 0125 180 180 860 0125 180 180 869 9875 180 180 F6 F8 TOGGLE PROGRAM PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the transmit
101. 50 2 19 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 8 1 The Keyboard Keys and Their Functions Every action of the RSS is controlled by you through the use of formatted displays and function keys The function keys are the ten keys labeled F1 to F10 grouped on the left hand side of the keyboard but be aware that some other keyboards may have twelve keys labeled F1 to F12 across the top of the keyboard Ft if F2 F3 Y F4 F5 Fe F7 F8 F9 2 20 F1 Displays help information on every screen and menu This on line help provides information on how to use the currently displayed menu screen line or field You may also find system setup information In many cases the help provided is for the specific line currently highlighted on the screen F2 F9 The F2 through F9 keys perform special functions and actions which can vary from menu to menu and screen to screen On some screens F5 will print the current screen to your printer and F8 will save the data and options currently displayed F10 Exit to previous menu or screen The F10 key moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time F10 performs this function on every menu and screen At the MAIN MENU F10 exits the RSS program Esc Exit to MAIN MENU Esc performs this function on every menu and screen Tab Accepts data currently in a field then moves the prompt forward one field If entry is not accepted an error beep will
102. 5ms 50ms and 75ms Factory default us Disabled Phone DTMF Timing Timing may be changed for Initial Delay Digit Duration and Inter Digit Delay The radio contains a table with four sets of values of these parameters The actual parameters are entered on the Radio Wide Phone Configuration screen F4 F3 F4 F9 Factory default is 1 NOTE For non keypad models This option can ONLY be used with the One Touch Button Feature Main Menu F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 6 58 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Hot DTMF Timing Timing may be changed for Initial Delay Digit Duration and Inter Delay The radio contains a table with four sets of values of these parameters The actual parameters are entered on the Radio Wide Phone Configuration screen F4 F3 F4 F9 Factory default is 1 HearClear This option allows Hearclear during voice operation This option is available for 900 MHz systems only HearClear is a feature used primarily in the 900 MHz band to reduce noise caused by the smaller bandwidth used in the 900 band Factory default is enabled for 900 MHz otherwise Disabled Status Aliasing This option will permit you to customize the Status number and to assign an alias name to each message F6 For non keypad models this option can ONLY be used with the One Touch Button Feature Main Menu F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 The status feature must be enabled on the Trunking Personality screen F4 F4 F4 and the status mnemonic STS must be assigned on the Radio Wide
103. 6 STATUS ALIAS when enabled is used to change and view the parameters associated with Trunking System Status Alias F7 MSG ALIAS Message Alias when enabled is used to change and view the parameters associated with Trunking System Message Alias F8 SITE ALIAS when enabled is used to change and view the parametersassociated with Trunking System Site Alias F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 57 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS System Use the up down arrow keys to scroll from system number 1 to the number of systems in the radio Tx Power Select The transmit power may be reduced 1 watt for 800 and 900 MHz models and 2 watts for VHF and UHF models Factory default is High This feature is not available for all models DEPENDENCIES The power levels selected will depend on the alignment values which can be adjusted under the alignment section in the Service portion of this RSS package Trunk Repeater Offset The value must be set to the frequency separation between the transmitter and receiver frequencies used at the central repeater site Factory default is 45MHz for 800 band and 39 MHz for 900 band Channel Assign Type Sets the channel assignment type to Domestic or International Domestic 25 KHz channel spacing used in the USA International 12 5 KHz channel spacing used outside the USA Splinter Channel 800 MHz Only The control c
104. 68P81074C50 4 29 SERVICE MTSX RSS FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITION New Softpot Value This is the MDC softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 30 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GET SAVE PROGRAM SECTION 5 GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU FUNCTIONS 5 1 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION This section describes all the functions available from the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU To guide you through these functions the following GET SAVE PROGRAM related menus and screens are shown with their specific RSS location programming procedures from the MAIN MENU function key descriptions and field definitions NOTE All functions supported and unsupported will be displayed in the menu s working area The unsupported functions based on the radio s model or options will NOT be displayed in the F key ID area 5 2 GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU F3 RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press el MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN GET SAVE PROG GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU HELP Read Data from Radio Cod
105. 7 RSS LOCATION At the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter Archive Path MTSX Model MAIN GET SAVE PROG SAVE FILE Archive C MRSS MTSX ARCHIVE SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE FILE Archive Filename A466ASNO 331 Model Number Serial Number 466ASN0331 Last Programmed 9409060941 Program Source Factory F1 F2 F8 F10 HELP CHANGE SAVE EXIT ARCHIVE ARCHIVE The SAVE ARCHIVE function is used to create or update an archive copy of the codeplug information onto a diskette or hard disk NOTE You are STRONGLY encouraged to make an archive copy of every radio installed or serviced in order to be able to quickly restore customer information is case of a codeplug failure PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Press F7 The SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE FILE screen appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 CHANGE ARCHIVE function is used to specify the directory path where the archive file is to be located The default archive path will always be the specified default path from the SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION screen F9 F3 from the MAIN MENU F8 SAVE ARCHIVE function executes the save process F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 5 10 68P81074C50
106. 7Z 241 8 M6 77 0 XB 103 5 1A 141 3 4A 1928 7A 2503 M7 79 7 WB 107 2 1B 146 2 4B 2035 1 2541 OZ 82 5 YZ 110 9 27 151 4 52 206 5 8Z 85 4 YA 114 8 2A 156 7 5A 210 7 M2 88 5 Y 118 8 2B 162 2 5B 218 1 NOTE A low level hum or buzz in the received audio MAY be experienced when TPL code OZ 254 1 Hz is used This PL code is at the high end of the subaudible frequency range and may be heard in the audio under certain circumstances Use of this code should be avoided if possible DPL Code Enter the DPL Digital Private Line code directly Ex 023 Leading zeros are required The UP DOWN arrow keys may be used to scroll through the standard codes Valid DPL Codes Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code 023 071 134 223 306 411 503 631 734 025 072 143 226 311 412 506 632 743 026 073 152 243 315 413 516 654 754 031 074 155 244 331 423 532 662 032 114 156 245 343 431 546 664 043 115 162 251 346 432 565 703 047 116 165 261 351 445 606 712 051 125 172 263 364 464 612 723 054 131 174 265 365 465 624 731 065 132 205 271 371 466 627 732 68P81074C50 6 91 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 2 1 PERSONALITY MDC OPTIONS MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Personality MTSX Model RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS MDC Personality PERSONALITY MDC OPTIONS Call Alert Decode Tx Inhibit On Busy Enabled Call Alert Encode Selective Call Dec
107. 8 F3 PREV PERS Previous Personality allows you to go to the personality before this one F4 NEXT PERS Next Personality allows you to go to the personality after this one 68P81074C50 6 87 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS F5 DELETE PERS Delete Personality removes the current personality You will be prompted for a second response before the personality is deleted The only way to recover a deleted personality is to immediately re read the radio or the archive file However any other changes that were made and not previously saved will be lost F7 MDC OPTIONS available with MDC signalling only allows access to MDC parameters linked to this personality Other System wide MDC parameters are located on the MDC System menu F4 F6 F4 This function will only be active when a radio with MDC capabilities has been read and the signalling type set for MDC Not all radios have this capability F8 PHONE OPTIONS allows you to edit the conventional phone configuration for each conventional personality F9 MORE OPTIONS allows access to additional parameters that can be used to customize your radio to your specific system requirements F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Personality Use the up down arrow keys to select the desired conventional personality The number may also be entered directly or selected via the function keys Refer to the radio catalog sheet for the max
108. A Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model CHANGE VIEW CONV STATUS ALIAS LIST CONV STATUS ALIAS LIST Entry Status Alias Number Status Alias Text STATUS 1 STATUS 2 STATUS 3 STATUS 4 STATUS 5 STATUS 6 STATUS 7 STATUS 8 F2 F5 ADD DELETE STATUS STATUS This screen contains the Conventional Status Alias List and is used to view and edit the Status Alias Number and Status Alias Text PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears 3 Press F9 The CONVENTIONAL STATUS LIST appears 4 5 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD STATUS allows you to add a Status to the List F5 DELETE STATUS allows you to delete a Status from the List 68P81074C50 6 129 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Status Alias Number The Status Alias Number will match the status entry number in most cases However if the first entry in the list should cause the fourth status to be sent then 4 should be assigned to the Status Alias Number of entry 1 The factory default for the Status Alias Number matches the status entry number Status Alias Text Enter the text The size of t
109. ADIO PROGRAMMING TUTORIAL 3 1 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION sssssssssssssseseeeene enhn tnneen nnns rins nnns nennen 3 1 3 2 PROGRAMMING A BASIC MT2000 CONVENTIONAL RADIO sse 3 2 cp EA eum E Mt 3 2 3 2 2 Major Decisions Involved iiio 3 2 3 2 8 High Level Programming Flow enne E 3 2 3 2 4 Step by Step Specific Programming Instructions esses 3 2 3 2 5 2000 Button Switch Menu Item Defaults sss 3 4 3 2 6 Read Current Radio s Personality Codeplug sse 3 6 3 2 7 Program the Radio Wide Features First essen enemies 3 6 3 2 8 Program the Phone Lisio essor ian Kinia acne edet nete looi D rode o oec e 3 7 3 2 9 Programming Conventional 3 7 3 2 10 Program the Zone Channel Features Next sssssssssssssseeeeeeeneeee eene nennen nnns 3 9 3 2 TT ScarbbElst ui eir vein Ee ds ated at tete Reeve Etre Eod eines 3 10 3 2 12 Program the Personality Into the Codeplug ssssssseeseeeeeee ennemis 3 11 3 2 13 Program the Personality Into Archive and Backup Files 3 12 3 8 PROGRAMMING A BASIC MTX8000 TRUNKED
110. AR is used as the signalling type then DOS must be disabled in the specified GE STAR System and 2 If MDC is used as the signalling type then DOS and MDC Demodulator need to be disabled 6 116 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW F5 GE STAR SYSTEM is a signalling protocol which provides such features as Data Operated Squelch DOS Emergency Alarm and PTT ID The GE STAR Systems defined from this menu option can be specified in the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY Screen from Main F4 F6 F3 when GE STAR is selected for the Signalling field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 117 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 4 1 SINGLETONE SYSTEM RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Type MTSX Model CONV AUX SINGLETONE SYSTEM SINGLETONE SYSTEM Tone Pretime ms Tone Duration PTT Sidetone RAB Sidetone F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE EXIT SYS SYS SYS SYS This screen contains all the parameters related to a Singletone System The displayed settings only pertain to the system shown PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW menu appears 2 Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU screen appears 3 Press F7 The AUXILIARY MENU screen appears Press F2 The SINGLETONE SYSTEM screen appears 4 5 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the des
111. C50 iff MTSX RSS TABLE OF CONTENTS cont 6 2 1 4 Radio Wide Scan Lists And Options ssssssssseeeeeeneeneeneen nennen nennen enne nere 6 29 6 2 1 4 1 Radio Wide Scan Options oret nri ra e RR RR nett ntn 6 32 6 2 1 5 Radio Wide Display 6 35 6 2 2 5 1 Radio Wide Display More 6 38 6 2 2 Tr nking Menus eee tete tee n pere p dee EL a li Ee dd C Deve v See 6 40 6 2 2 1 Trunking Radio Wide Options ime e eoe epa e o E eie lies 6 40 6 2 2 1 4 SmartZone Environment iudi citet putent cecidi der epe tend 6 42 6 2 2 1 2 Voice on Control Options 5 neta en aiid ti es 6 46 6 2 2 2 Trunking Systems 3 nde eel ER eU eal ee paride baie 6 48 6 2 2 2 1 Channel Assignment Data sss nnne 6 54 6 2 2 2 2 Control Channel ebd e dean bebat ire ee me cited 6 56 6 2 2 3 Trunking System Options eee EL E eee M e rn be dee eene 6 58 6 2 2 3 1 One Touch Button Options eene nnne nennen nnne nnne nnne 6 61 6 22 92 Tr nking Status Alias 5 i tere D ER Rt EX ERROR GR n 6 62 6 2 2 2 3 Trunking Message AlaScore maan da aeia E A AAE EE AEE 6 63 6 2 2 4 Trunking Personality voce svt ciere ada ei Le qp NEA RE EAEg iaaa 6 64 6 2 2 4 1 Trunking Subfleets iie end ee eee eden dee ed 6 70 6 2 2 4 2
112. CATION At the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU press 2 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Press Enter to Select File Name MTSX Model Press F8 to Load Codeplug File MAIN GET SAVE PROG GET FILE Archive C MRSS MTSX ARCHIVE ARCHIVE FILES A466ASNO 331 A467ASNO 361 A469ASNO 431 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP CHANGE DELETE CHDIR CHDIR GET EXIT ARCHIVE SELECTED UP DOWN ARCHIVE The GET ARCHIVE function is used to retrieve an archive file from a diskette or hard disk Once retrieved the file may be modified via the CHANGE VIEW functions or programmed into a radio just as codeplug information read from the radio via the F2 READ RADIO function Press Tab to select a codeplug file to be retrieved The F8 function key is used to GET the selected file as described below PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Press F3 The ARCHIVE FILES screen appears 3 Press Tab to select the desired file or press the desired function key F1 F10 Function key descriptions and field definitions are on the following page 5 4 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GET SAVE PROGRAM FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 CHANGE ARCHIVE function is used to specify the directory path where the archive file is to be located The default archive path will always be the specified default path from the PC CONFIGURATION Menu
113. DOS MEM command may be used to determine the amount of available memory in your machine i e type c dos mem The location of MEM EXE may differ on your machine If the command reports 3000K or more of available extended memory you can take full advantage of these enhancements 1 4 SUBSCRIPTION INFORMATION Your RSS is part of a subscription We ll keep you advised of changes and automatically mail revisions throughout the life of the subscription A subscription is good for one site Under the terms of your subscription you may install the RSS on as many personal computers as desired at that one site Another site location requires another subscription 1 5 USING THIS MANUAL This manual is designed to teach basic feature programming and to speed up access to technical reference information It is intended for both beginners and advanced users of computers and the RSS This manual describes how to connect the radio to your computer and how to install the software The operation of the software is described including how to read the screens the keyboard commands and how the screens are organized The MAIN MENU and all available RSS functions are described in detail The operation of the SERVICE functions the GETTING and SAVING of radio codeplug data and the CHANGING and VIEWING of codeplug data are described also All RSS function screens are depicted in this manual and the operation of each one is described A description of each data
114. E 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 FRONT END FILT ALGN Front End Bandpass Filter Alignment Refer to your radio service manual for the front end bandpass alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F3 AUDIO Rated Audio Calibration Refer to your radio service manual for the rated audio calibration procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F4 SQUELCH 12 5KHz Squelch Attenuator 12 5KHz Adjustment Refer to your radio service manual for the squelch alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F5 SQUELCH 20KHz Squelch Attenuator 20KHz Adjustment Refer to your radio service manual for the squelch alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F6 SQUELCH 25 30KHz Squelch Attenuator 25 30KHz Adjustment Refer to your radio service manual for the squelch alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel 4 16 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE F7 VCO Rx VCO Crossover Frequency Adjustment Refer to your radio service manual for the alignment procedure This procedure shoul
115. E Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F2 The RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 SECURE OPTIONS is used to indicate whether or not the radio is equipped with secure hardware If your radio is not Secure equipped SECURE OPTIONS will not be shown on the screen F7 EMER OPTIONS Emergency Options is used to configure radio wide emergency operation such as Silent Emergency and Man Down timing F9 MORE OPTIONS is used to configure the Time Out Timer table F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 4 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Alert Tones Enables or disables all of the alert tones for the radio Factory default is Enabled Min Alert Tone Volume Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Minimum Alert Volume level the radio will use If the volume setting is above this level then the actual volume setting will be used Otherwise the minimum alert tone volume will be used Valid entries are 0 to 255 Factory default is 128 Alert Tone Volume Offset Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to selec
116. ENSATION ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE COMPENS TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE COMPENSATION Current Frequency Value New Softpot Value 806 0125 815 0125 824 9875 851 0125 860 0125 869 9875 F8 PROGRAM VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the balanced attenuator alignment compensation procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Compensation alignment is critical to the operation of signalling schemes that have very low frequency components that is DPL and could result in distorted waveforms if improperly adjusted Balanced attenuator alignment balances the modulation sensitivity of the VCO and reference modulation synthesizer low frequency port lines It is a way of correcting for deviation sensitivity versus RF frequency variations in the VCO The transmit and receive bands are divided into frequency zones with a calibration point value in each zone Balanced attenuator alignment is required after replacing or servicing the controller board or the RF board Using the up down arrow keys adjust compensations per your radio service manual Performing this procedure automatically calculates compensation alignment The programming procedure function key descriptions and field definition are on the following page 4 8 68P8107
117. F6 F5 Pec F4 F6 F7 F5 DOS Bata Squelch e Pere teu tins eee pee edt ate evan F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 DPE EE F4 F6 F3 ACCESS DEACCESS CODES eterne F4 F3 F4 F8 DTMF Access Timing 4 6 8 Digit Hangtime ME or A nnn nennt nennen F4 F3 F4 F9 DIMF Pause Time iris eal lanai Du awit F4 F3 F4 F9 TRANSMIT DEVIATION 2 4 2 cnn di xac d d ae Rad ede ee eee F4 F3 F4 F8 Decoder 1 Call Tp 4 6 7 4 Decoder 2 Call ariete pee aa D Hp ae aput e x dedi oes F4 F6 F7 F4 DECODER PLC DTE F4 F6 F7 F4 Designated TX Mem EIE F4 F3 F5 Detectlons Required 5 teinte rie ede ner P eate esee e ime Ed F4 F6 F7 F4 F9 Digit Duration wise een nelle cea Dee ub F4 F4 F3 F9 Digit DUrAtiON MSEE ete tae th eee te een esa F4 F6 F3 F8 Direct Talkaround oi Dus ea oo dee o dee Oe e UD te a F4 F6 F3 Direct Frequency nennen nennen nnne nennen F4 F6 F2 Directory Contents ic
118. FP software package Merge Procedure Enter the changes into the database 2 Download a DOS file with the new trunking information 3 Use GET SAVE functions to either Read the radio codeplug or Get the archive file for the radio to be updated 4 Access the MERGE TCMS screen and press F8 to update the codeplug information PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Press F4 The MERGE FORM screen appears 3 Enter the directory path for the directory which contains the TCMS merge files The default archive path will always be the specified default path from the PC CONFIGURATION screen F9 F3 from the MAIN MENU 5 6 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GET SAVE PROGRAM 5 2 3 RADIO CLONING F5 RSS LOCATION At the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU press E 2 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN GET SAVE PROG CLONE RADIO NEW TRUNKING IDS Serial Number System Type IIli Universal Pers System Key Type ID FIt ATG indv ID Indv ID ID 01 Disabled 01 0001 000F 02 Disabled li 01 0001 0001 03 Disabled 02 0001 0001 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP READ CONV LIMITED DUPLICATE SAVE PROGRAM EXIT SER NUM ID le Reiz WA ID FILE RADIO This screen is used to copy codeplug information from one radio to another one Only radios with the same model number may be cloned This screen s
119. HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD CALL ID allows you to add a list member F5 DELETE CALL ID allows you to delete a list member F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Call ID Enter the four digit hexadecimal MDC CALL ID for this member of the call list The Call ID is used to target a radio when an individual or group call has to be sent to that radio or set of radios The four digit ID is a hexadecimal number and can therefore be comprised of hex digits A through F The valid range of values is 1 FFFF NOTES ON MDC CALL IDs A Call ID preceded by the hexadecimal digit E is interpreted by the RSS as a Group ID IDs of the form Exxx where x implies any hex digit should therefore be avoided for Individual Primary ID specification Note also that the digit F serves as a wildcard so it can be strategically placed in a Call ID to make it match other Call IDs thus creating the effect of a group ID FFFF for instance would specify all radios in system Call Text Enter the alphanumeric name for this Call ID This name will appear on the radio display to facilitate ease of operation 68P81074C50 6 115 6 2 3 4 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV AUX AUXILIARY SYSTEMS MENU HELP Singleton
120. Hz screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Field Definition This is the squelch attenuator softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 20 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 2 4 SQUELCH ATTENUATOR 20KHZ ALIGNMENT 3 RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model SQUELCH 20KHz SQUELCH 20KHz Current Frequency Value New Softpot Value 851 0625 63 63 860 0625 63 63 869 9375 63 63 851 0625 63 63 860 0625 63 63 869 9375 63 63 HHH HHHH F8 PROGRAM VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the squelch alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel The squelch attenuator setting is increased or decreased by pressing the up down arrow keys respectively A relative value between 0 and 63 will be displayed on the screen Adjust the squ
121. IEW CONV MDC SYSTEM MDC System MDC SYSTEM Primary ID Hex Emergency Type Secondary ID Hex Emergency Type Variable ID Hex PTT ID Sidetone Leading PTT ID Acknowledge Alert Tone PTT ID Sidetone Revert Table Trailing PTT ID Radio Check Zone Channel F4 F5 F9 NEXT DELETE MORE SYS SYS OPTIONS Figure 2 10 Relationship Between Screens 68P81074C50 2 27 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 9 CHANGING A FIELD VALUE Screen fields come in three basic types Information fields non editable fields which cannot be altered or changed Scrollable fields to edit or change a choice press the arrow key s Direct entry fields to edit or change a choice type in an acceptable value Changing a field s value is typically done by either scrolling through a list of options in scrollable fields or by typing in a correct value in direct entry fields Scrolling is done with the arrow keys Press Tab or Enter to move to field then type new value MOTOROLA Radio Service Enter or Scroll to Select MTSX Model Personality Personality ONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY Receive Only i Signalling Direct Talkaround MDC System Time Out Timer Scan List Hot Keypad Phone Operation Receive Transmit Direct Frequency MHz 935 06250 896 01250 896 01250 Signalling Type CSQ PL Code 67 0 Hz XZ F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 ADD PREV NEXT DELETE MDC PHONE MORE PERS PERS PERS PERS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS Figure
122. L KEYPAD Orange Button Volume Set Phone Phone Phone Phone Rotary Switch Channel Subfleet Sel Channel Subfleet Sel Zone Zone Side Button 1 Unprogrammed Light Light Light Unprogrammed Unprogrammed Unprogrammed Monitor Private Call Monitor Private Call Monitor Private Call Blank Blank Blank Menu Item 1 Not Supported CHAN SUB SEL CHAN SUB SEL Menu Item 2 Not Supported PROG PAGE PROG PAGE Not Supported MUTE PROG MUTE PROG Not Supported NONE MUTE NONE MUTE NOTES 1 Where only one function is specified it is identical for conventional and trunking 2 Menu Items only apply to front display radios and are accessed with the arrow keys on the radio keypad 3 A table of all allowable button functions can be seen on pages 6 15 and 6 16 A table of all allowable Menu Items functions can be seen on pages 6 20 and 6 21 68P81074C50 3 15 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS TWO POSITION CONCENTRIC LED SWITCH INDICATOR THREE POSITION ABC TOGGLE SWITCH ORANGE BUTTON TOP VIEW ON OFF VOLUME 16 POSITION CONTROL ROTARY SWITCH SIDE BUTTON 1 SIDE BUTTON 2 SIDE BUTTON 3 MONITOR PUSH TO TALK BUTTON 000000go0000o d 00000000000 000000000009 Zo 99 LEFT SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW Figure 3 2 Button Locator Diagram Button Location Purposes Only 3 16 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 3 6 Read Current Radio s Personality Codeplug Before we can program the MTX8000 wi
123. M FILE UNABLE TO CONTINUE mean that the selected file cannot be accessed or the selected file has an invalid format the file is not MRSS compatible In case of such errors make sure the selected file is the one that was shipped to you with your upgrade kit WARNING If you install the RSS in a drive or sub directory other than in the default directory CAMRSSWTSX the above paths for FLASH software Bootstrap Code and SRIB software must also be changed TCMS Path Enter the Default directory path from where TCMS Update files will be retrieved The GET SAVE GET TCMS file function will default to this path Refer to your computer s owner s manual for a complete description of asynchronous communications ports and how to configure them System Key Enter the default directory path where trunking system keys are to be located Refer to your computer s owner s manual for a complete description of directories and path names RIB Use the up down arrow keys to select to which asynchronous communications port COM 1 or COM 2 your RIB radio interface box is connected If you are not sure how your computer is configured or if you have two asynchronous communications ports first select COM 1 and use the COM TEST F6 function to communicate with a radio If the test fails select COM 2 and repeat COM TEST Be sure that all cables and power supplies are connected per the instructions in you radio service software user s guide Refer to your c
124. MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT REFERENCE TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT REFERENCE Current Value New Softpot Value Frequency Channel Spacing Channel Spacing 869 9875 120KHz F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TOGGLE PROGRAM EXIT PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the transmit deviation limit alignment reference softpot procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F2 The TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F6 The TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT REFERENCE screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Channel Spacing Field Definition This is the reference softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum set
125. N At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model CROSSOVER VCO CROSSOVER Current New Frequency Frequency 486 0250 486 0250 Transmitter F6 F8 TOGGLE PROGRAM PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the receive VCO crossover alignment procedure This procedure should only be performed by qualified service personnel Receive deviation limit alignment is a way of correcting for deviation sensitivity versus RF frequency variations in the VCO The transmit and receive bands are divided into frequency zones with a calibration point value in each zone Compensation for each of these points must be checked and adjusted if the VCO is replaced PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F3 The RECEIVE ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F7 The VCO CROSSOVER screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time
126. NALLING HIGH SPEED Frequency Current Value 869 9875 17 New Softpot Value Transmitter Off m E 4 1 2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 9 10 HELP TOGGLE PROGRAM EXIT PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the transmit deviation limit alignment high speed procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F4 The SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Press F3 The TRANSMIT SIGNALLING HIGH SPEED screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Field Definition This is the high speed softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 28 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 3 3 TRANSMIT SIGNALLING MDC 1200 RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio S
127. NE ENVIRONMENT SMARTZONE ENVIRONMENT Failsoft Inactivity sec Filter Constant K1 Busy Override Delay sec Filter Constant K2 Aff Hold Off sec Filter Constant K3 Busy Override Chirp Ack Filter Threshold Constant T1 Display Site Trunking Filter Threshold Constant T2 Full Spectrum CC Scan Filter Threshold Constant T3 Full Spectrum CC Scan Timer RSSI OSW Counter RSSI Acceptable Threshold RSSI Good Threshold RSSI Excellent Threshold 57 VC RSSI Accpt Threshold Disabled F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT This screen allows you to change or view the SmartZone Envirnment configuration PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F2 The TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears Press F2 The SMARTZONE ENVIRONMENT screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 68P81074C50 6 41 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Failsoft Inactivity sec This field pertains to failsoft operation If a radio remains i
128. NVENTIONAL TRUNKED or PERSONALITY related CHANGE VIEW permits access to each of these categories Unlike the SERVICE function a codeplug must be loaded into the computers memory via GET SAVE functions before CHANGE VIEW functions can be accessed An archive file can be accessed without a radio being connected F5 PRINT MENU will print selected codeplug data F6 FILE MAINTENANCE is available to allow some file manipulation capability without exiting the RSS New directories can be created and files can be deleted from this screen F8 FLASHPORT UPGRADE is a multi level menu that is used to view the radio s configuration to view the FLASHkey s contents to upgrade the codeplug and to FLASH the radio F9 SETUP is used to configure the the Radio Service Software to the users particular application Archive path names communication ports and even screen colors may be customized to the customer s specific needs F10 EXIT is used to quit the program and return to DOS Ensure that all desired codeplug changes have been programmed back to the radio and that an archive copy has been made If this is not done all changes will be lost as returning to DOS erases this data from the computer s memory 2 34 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 12 1 How to Read the Codeplug A Connect the radio to the computer as shown in Figure 2 1 If you are not already at the MAIN MENU press any key at the BANNER screen B From the MAIN MENU
129. New Frequency Field Definition This is the VCO crossover softpot value for this frequency 68P81074C50 4 23 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 2 7 SECURE RECEIVE DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model SECURE RECEIVE DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL SECURE RECEIVE DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL Frequency Current Value 403 1500 81 New Softpot Value TEST SERAN EEE F8 PROGRAM VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the squelch alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Secure receive discriminator level should be checked any time the radio is serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has been replaced PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RECEIVE ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Press F8 The SECURE RECEIVE DISCRIMINATOR LEVEL screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot V
130. ON Now that the hardware and software installation is complete the RSS is up and running and you re familiar with the keyboard and the RSS user interface you are ready to personalize a radio The tutorials that follow will walk you through the programming of radios with specific features The first tutorial walks a new user through the steps to program an MT2000 basic 16 channel conventional radio and saving the personality to the codeplug and archive files The second portion of the tutorial walks you through the process of programming an MTX8000 trunked radio The third tutorial involves cloning copying the personality data from an archive file of one already programmed radio to other radios Cloning is used when there is a need for multiple radios equipped with the same radio features and functions These tutorials list the desired features for the particular application then give an overview in a list format of the major steps involved in programming the radio then finally walks you through the specific steps to program the features into the radio All of the tutorials assume that the RSS is and the MAIN MENU is displayed If the MAIN MENU is not displayed follow the brief steps below In all the tutorials remember F1 displays help information corresponding to the current highlighted field or current screen F10 backs you out of the RSS one menu level at a time Esc goes directly to the MAIN MENU Table 3 1 Quick Steps to Brin
131. ONV ZONE CHN DATA CONFIG DATA ASSIGN SUMMARY The print function is used to produce permanent records of codeplug configurations A printer is required and should be connected to your computer per your computer s user s manual Note When printing misalignment of page breaks may result if the printer is not set properly For Best results the printer should be configured as an IBM ProPrinter or an Epson FX MX having factory defaults settings The default number of lines per page is 66 Graphics capability is NOT needed PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F5 at the MAIN MENU The PRINT MENU appears 2 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP Provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 RADIO CONFIGURATION The radio wide function prints a summary of the radio configuration including Button Switch Menu programming Phone Lists Scan Lists and Display information 68P81074C50 7 1 PRINT MTSX RSS F4 TRUNKING DATA The trunking systems and personality function prints a summary of all trunking system information including control channels IDs connect tones system scan lists call lists and status of all major personality features F6 CONVENTIONAL DATA The Conventional Data print function prints a summary of the conventional personalities MDC Systems and Auxiliary Systems F8 ZONE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT The zone summary function prints a
132. OROLA Radio Service Software 5 Model HOLWCF4DB5AN MAIN CONFIGURATION SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION HELP PC CONFIGURATION Drives Paths Ports etc SCREEN Color Configuration F10 Exit Return To Main Menu F8 F9 F10 CONFIGURE SCREEN EXIT Mim MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use Up Down arrows to Select MTSX Model HOIWCF4DE AN MAIN CONFIGURATION SCREEN COLORS MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model HOIWCF4DB5Ar MAIN CONFIGURATION PC SCREEN COLORS MONITOR TEXT erena i STATUS TEXT MESSAGE TEXT HIGHTLIGHT BACKGROUND ae FRAME 51121245 tae See SELECTED TEXT iii ce Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 7 F8 F9 F10 HELP COM SAVE EXIT HELP SAVE EXIT Figure 2 12 Service Software Configuration Menu Options 68P81074C50 2 29 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 10 1 Setting Default Archive and Backup Paths First you can set the drive name and path names for archive files you will create later Specifying a default path name here will save much typing time later every time you go to save an archive file Here s how to set the default archive and backup file paths Table 2 10 Creating Archive File Paths Instruction What to Type Explanation GO to CONFIGURE Press F3 at the SERVICE SOFTWARE COMPUTER COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU to get to CONFIGURE COMPUTER Spe
133. Pet ede Rep ipe Eee eco Mp Gaede F3 F5 F4 F7 Program SOUTE ai ma Lec F3 F5 F7 Program SUNCE ceti det erected tee ge ESEA F3 F5 F8 Progra 5 0 vn Li Re pa cx dae o c aed od ene ead c nee F3 F7 Program SOUL CO iir tee Re deua erbe aa rv bere dead ate ee SCR Pb Bere eee F3 F9 Programmed Date 2 0 40 ci cie elle aa aan DDR d EE Dn e EC F3 F9 CLR RED SERRE RM F4 F4 F4 F9 Proper Code D tecteur e eee e aed eee fe an nae F4 F6 F3 F6 Protocol Type ce RU Acie Er e GE duit e Et ehe er e eee F4 F4 F4 Protocol Mor EE F4 F4 F4 F8 Q QUIK CALLE Il SYSTEM det tux ee ee F4 F6 F7 F4 QUIK CALL II SYSTEM OPTIONSG sess eene ennt nns F4 F6 F7 F4 F9 Quik GallIWSingleTorne a n Rete Besa lag et te i ee ee tad F8 F2 F7 Quik Gall lSihgleTOre E EEEE F8 F3 F5 Quik Mey OVE d F4 F6 F3 F9 UI Ke Sal ccu Tr F4 F6 F3 R RAB I Code Typer ine het t eade ev e ut ie eee ume ouod F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 RAB DIMP Codes eus eter vae ev aia F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 RAB 1 MDC Repeater ID sssssssssssssssssseseeeee nennen enne nnne enhn sinn nr entres enne F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 RAB 1 Singletone HZ iussisti pred aa e endeared dd e Ee gut a tastes F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 2 Type on oett ntu p
134. RADIO WIDE BUTTON CONFIGURATION screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 6 14 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS WARNING DO NOT DUPLICATE A FUNCTION ON MULTIPLE CONTROLS I E A BUTTON AND A SWITCH OR A SWITCH AND A MENU THIS MAY CAUSE THE RADIO TO MALFUNCTION AND CAN CAUSE OPERATOR CONFUSION Conventional Buttons Blank No function No tone will sound Chan Sub Select Change Channels Rotary Only Call Response Is used to respond to a private call or call alert or phone call This function should be used for Response Only radios or in conjunction with the Phone Private Call functions assigned to the Menu Dynamic Priority Increases the priority of the current active channel Emergency Activates an Emergency transmission 2 Not Available on All Models Light Turns on the display light Nuisance Delete Removes the current active channel from the list Monitor Radio will unsquelch when the button is pressed allowing you to listen to activity on the channel Page Select Call Alert
135. RS SYSTEM SYSTEM FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 CONV WIDE OPT prints a summary of the conventional personality information F3 CONV PERS Conventional Personality function prints a summary of the Conventional Personality information F4 MDC SYSTEM function prints a summary of the MDC system options F7 AUX SYSTEM is used for a submenu in which the following can be printed Singletone Systems and Lists Quik Call II and GE STAR Systems F10 EXIT cancels printing 68P81074C50 7 5 PRINT MTSX RSS NOTES 7 6 68P81074C50 SECTION 8 FILE MAINTENANCE MENU FUNCTIONS 8 1 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION This section describes all the functions available from the FILE MAINTENANCE MENU To guide you through these functions the following FILE MAINTENANCE related menus and screens are shown with their specific RSS location programming procedures from the MAIN MENU function key descriptions and field definitions 8 2 FILE MAINTENANCE MENU F6 RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press T MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN FILE MAINT FILE MAINTENANCE MENU HELP Create Directory Path Delete Archive File F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP DEFINE DELETE EXIT PATH FILE This RSS feature allows you to do
136. Radio s 5 12 5 2 6 Programiming HS Oy me roe RERO UR EREMO t a EDU DEM 5 13 SECTION 6 CHANGE VIEW MENU FUNCTIONS 6a INTRODUCTION TO eterne eh E De a Ee E te EN ete Bde Rec 6 1 6 2 CHANGE VIEW MENU Mis iocos me DE t ERU 6 1 6 2 1 Radio Wide Configuration Menu uci edi det ie at ect e ate eed ed uf teenage did 6 3 6 2 1 1 Radio Wide Options tee e obe qued diei i ei e re re UE ares 6 4 6 2 1 1 1 Radio Wide Secure Options 6 8 6 2 1 1 2 Radio Wide Emergency Options sssssseeeeeneneennenen ener nennen 6 10 6 2 1 1 3 More Radio Wide Options sssssssesseeeeeeeenenennen nennen neret 6 12 6 2 1 2 Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu sessseeeeeeeeeeneeeneenneee nennen nnne nene 6 14 6 2 1 2 1 Radio Wide Button Configuration seeessseeeeeenenneennenen enne 6 15 6 2 1 2 2 Radio Wide Switch Configuration essseeeeneeeeenenen enne 6 18 6 2 1 2 3 Radio Wide Menu Item Configuration seseeneneneeneneennen enn 6 20 6 2 1 3 Phone Gonfig ratlon nete m de Mrd d eee eire IO x nae 6 23 6 2 1 3 1 DTMF Access Deaccess Codes sssssssssseeeeeneneee nene nennen neis 6 25 6212325 Dial Optlons ate het e AIRES 6 27 68P81074
137. S Next Personality allows you to go to the personality after this one F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 95 CHANGE VIEW 5 RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Personality Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired conventional personality The number may also be entered directly or selected via the function keys Refer to the radio catalog sheet for the maximum number of personalities allowed for this model Auto Access Code Select Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select an Auto Access Code for this personality The radio contains a table for DTMF Access and Deaccess code pairs and the personality points to one of the table entries The actual 4 digit codes are entered on the Radio Wide DTMF Access Deaccess Code F4 F3 F4 F8 The factory default is 1 DTMF Access Timing Table Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the set of DTMF timing parameters for this personality Timing can be changed for Initial Delay Digit Duration and Integer Delay The radio contains a table with four sets of values for each of these parameters The actual parameters are entered on the Radio Wide Phone Options screen F4 F3 F4 F9 The factory default is DTMF timing parameter set 1 6 96 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 2 3 MORE CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS Icd JEN RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service So
138. Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU HELP Radio Wide Options Buttons Switches Menu Items Phone Lists and Options Scan Lists and Options Display Options EXIT Return to Change View Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP RADIO FEATURE PHONE SCAN DISPLAY EXIT OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU may be used to further customize your radio for specific applications Parameters and options that affect both conventional and trunking operation are adjusted with this screen Typically when you begin to edit a codeplug you should come to this menu and configure the radio wide options first by working your way through the submenus of this menu This will allow the options on other screens to reflect the radio wide options Fields for unsupported options will not be visible PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 RADIO OPTIONS allows you to edit general options that affect the radio as a whole The options include LEDs self test etc F3 BUTTONS SWITCHES MENU ITEMS OPTIONS allows you to define the functions that each button switch and menu item performs
139. T This screen is used to enter all of the emergency information for a trunked personality PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen appears Press F8 The EMERGENCY DATA CONFIGURATION screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 6 72 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Protocol Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Trunking Protocol Type for this personality Type II An enhanced version of the original protocol that provides additional fleet management flexibility for a given system via an expanded signaling format Type Ili A hybrid of Type and II that permits a radio to operate as a type ll unit on a type system Access Type This determines how the radio will access a Type II Ili system Either Tx Fast Rx Slow or Tx Fast Rx Fast Select Tx Fast Rx Fast for use with fast access systems and Tx Fast Rx Slow for slow access protocol emergency subfleets New type radios operating on fast access s
140. TSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Telephone Interconnect This option allows the radio to initiate and receive land to portable telephone calls and specifies the type of interconnect Half duplex means that communication can take place in one direction at a time only Full duplex allows communication in both directions at the same time Portable products supported by this RSS support half duplex phone communication ONLY ISW Window Adjust The ISW Window Adjust value is a timing parameter and is used to fine tune trunking system performance Important Note Do not modify this field unless you are aFTR Changing the ISW Window Adjust field may degrade the trunking systems performance Auto Dial Holdoff ms This field defines the amount of time the radio will wait after gaining access to phone channel before a pre queued phone number will be dialed It ensures that the fixed end is ready for dialing to commence Normally the user waits for a dial tone but in this case the radio is dialing and cannot detect a dial tone RF Modem If RF Modem is Enabled the radio will only be able to function as an RF Modem i e to be used with system watch When RF Modem is Disabled the radio operates normally 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 1 1 SMARTZONE ENVIRONMENT 2 F2 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model WIDE OPTIONS SMART ZO
141. TT is held Also you will not be allowed to monitor the channel If all users that share the channel have BCL enabled then the users have a privacy similar to what a trunked radio system provides GLOSSARY MTSX RSS CA Call Alert Call List Carrier Carrier Squelch Channel Cloning Cable Codeplug COM port Connect Tone Continuous Assignment Updating Control Channel Cursor CSQ Database Decrement Defaults Default Field Value Directory G 2 Call Alert A feature that is similar to a tone only or a tone and voice pager The page can leave a persisting indication on the target radio A call alert stops the channel scan until the Call Alert call is cleared A list of IDs from one or more signalling formats used to send a message to individual or groups A term that represents any channel activity A radio receive mode of operation that uses receiver squelch as the only method of muting the speaker A pair of receive and transmit frequencies A radio to radio connector cable used to program one radio s personality into another radio The contents of the radio s EEPROM that determine the radio s personality This personality information will be the system ID Unit ID Fleet Subfleet Talkgroup information as well as the control channel information The codeplug contains all the features and options stored in the codeplug The logical name of the serial port available on IBM PC computers They m
142. TricOne Touch B tton corte edere Rr dea ov ean ie Mb SERE nan F8 F3 F5 F9 Trk Remote a tee nennen tlle Le due ine e n eee t sega ed npe n ee F8 F2 F7 TrkRemote os iicet dec ete niea eter bet eu pte et aae F8 F3 F5 F9 Trunk te mcm F4 F3 F3 F4 Trunk Repeater F4 F4 F3 F9 Iunius F4 F3 F3 F2 Tr nking System lD 3 e E E odia wl aie F4 F3 F5 Trunking System e ence eee neve e neci eeu a intends nines F4 F3 F5 Twenty Channel Synthesized sss eene nennen intrent en nnns nnne nnns F4 F4 F4 F9 TX Channel Ranges MH Zinnia iaaa aai d F4 F4 F3 F6 WX GUI Tc E F4 F3 F2 TX Clear MILIEU F4 F3 F2 F6 ABIIT F4 F4 F3 T Devian maian i net ies ets eel ee ee A tele eae F4 F6 F3 F9 TX DEVINON E F4 F6 F3 F9 IPS trs met F4 F6 F3 F9 TXF S Freq MEZ neci it eee cree eire a eat o da te tarts resem annie F4 F4 F4 Bpdu CLE F4 F4 F3 F6 F6 psc EMEN F4 F4 F4 F6 IPSE F4 F4 F4 F7 TxalNhibIPOn BUS E E m F4 F6 F3 F7 Tx Period sec aee etre ud te tis dette eek E ose eel Muted eee alee F4 F4 F4 F8 TxiPower Leve none IR F4 F6 F3 F9 IbSroe lE F4 F4 F3 F9 U UNIVERSAL Di saint a ice qae ecc cdi een ea ee aed Bl el i ee F4 F4 F3 Unmute Hold O
143. UE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Frequency Field Definition This is the VCO crossover softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 12 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 1 7 SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model MAIN SERVICE TX ALIGN SECURE TX DEV SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION Frequency Current Value 490 0250 110 New Softpot Value 110 Transmitter Off 0 127 Min Max F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TOGGLE PROGRAM EXIT PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the secure transmit deviation alignment procedures This procedure should only be attempted by a qualified service personnel Secure transmit deviation should be checked any time the radio is serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has been replaced PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F2 The TRANSMIT ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Press F8 The SECURE TRANSMIT DEVIATION screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to se
144. UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV WIDE OPTIONS CONVENTIONAL RADIO WIDE OPTIONS Monitor Type Open Squelch Latch Enable Tone Disabled Latch Enable Time sec 2 0 Smart PTT Retry Timer ms Smart PTT Quick Key Timer ms Hub Defeats PL Direct Frequency Enabled Last Number Redial F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT This screen holds the fields that allow you to change the features that affect all the conventional modes PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears 3 Press F2 The CONVENTIONAL RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 6 84 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Monitor Type This option determines how the radio unmutes when the monitor button is pressed Silent Monitor also called PL Defeat allows the user to monitor the channel before transmitting Factory default is Open Squelch Open Squelch When th
145. UP DOWN arrow keys to choose the SIZE CODE for this personality Valid SIZE CODES are A B C D E F G H 1 J K M O Q The SIZE CODE determines the maximum number of fleets subfleets and individual IDs allowed The SIZE CODE and fleet ID chosen must match the programming of the Central Controller Revert Fleet ID Subfleet The Fleet ID is a three digit hexadecimal number where the first digit is the Prefix and second two digits are the Fleet For any size code the subfleets for Fleetwide and Dynamic Regrouping are always available Size Code Prefix Fleet Subfleet Individual ID A 0 7 00 7F A C 000 OOF B 0 7 00 OF A G 000 C 0 7 00 07 A G 000 07F D 0 7 00 00 A O 000 1FF E 0 7 00 3F A C 000 01F F 0 7 00 1F A G 000 01F G 0 7 00 1F A C 000 H 0 7 00 OF A C 000 07F 0 7 00 07 A C 000 OFF J 0 7 00 03 A G 000 OFF K 0 7 00 01 A O 000 OFF M 0 3 00 00 A O 000 3FF 0 1 00 00 000 7FF Q 0 0 00 00 A O 000 FFF 6 74 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Revert Announcement Group or Revert Fleet ID Enter the Emergency Default Announcement TalkGroup in this field This field contains the Emergency User TalkGroup for Announcements during an emergency for the current personality The Emergency Default Announcement TalkGroup is a 3 digit hexadecimal number While in the emergency call state with tactical emergency disabled your radio will monitor this talk group for fleetwide
146. XEC BAT file RD DIRNAME Remove a subdirectory called dirname Removal of the subdirectory requires that it be empty Files can be deleted by the DEL command RMDIR is the same as RD VER Prints MS DOS version installed on the computer such as MS DOS Version 5 0 XCOPY Copies files and directories including all subdirectories This command uses disk space more efficiently and can speed up file access time For further information on these and other commands consult your MS DOS User s Manual 2 8 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED You may have noticed some special characters in the preceding table Certain keyboard characters mean special things to DOS Some of these are Table 2 4 Special DOS Command Characters Special DOS Character What it means Wildcard character You can substitute this character for any type or quantity of characters digits that follow not precede it Backslash A special character to separate directories when specifying path names By itself it also represents the root directory Wildcard character meaning you can substitute match it for any single digit or character Front slash Used for setting options of commands There are a couple limitations you may want to know about DOS RSS files and directories 1 First DOS only allows file names to be 8 characters long However file names can have an optional 1 2 or 3 character extension after the file name The extension mu
147. a number of special keys that perform special functions The NAVIGATING THROUGH THE RSS MENU section describes some of these special keys and how they perform with the RSS 2 3 UNDERSTANDING COMPUTER STORAGE SYSTEMS The computer can store amazing amounts of data software programs code data files in several places Some of these places are the random access memory RAM the read only memory ROM the hard disk drives and the diskettes The RAM ROM hard disks and diskettes all vary in function and all have certain size limits memory They all store data in terms of bytes a byte equalling approximately one character as typed on the keyboard 1 024 bytes equals one kilobyte or 1K For comparison purposes one page of double spaced typed text equals approximately 2K 68P81074C50 2 5 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 3 1 Random Access Memory RAM Random Access Memory RAM is a storage place in the system unit used to run programs and operating systems The amount of RAM varies from computer to computer and it directly affects which programs will run on your computer With more RAM you can run larger programs Most programs indicate how much RAM is required to run the RSS You must have at least 200k of free RAM to execute this RSS 2 3 2 Read Only Memory ROM Read Only Memory ROM is a storage place in the system unit that is used by the computer for start up booting and Power On Self Test POST purposes
148. all Li5t sisti eni None Emergency Disabled Hot Disabled Revert Rvt Table Entry 3 Phone Operation Unlimited Receive Transmit Direct Frequency MHz 851 06250 806 01250 851 06250 Squelch Type DPL DPL DPL Code 023 023 023 DPL Invert Enabled Enabled Enabled F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE MDC PHONE MORE EXIT PERS PERS PERS PERS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS This screen allows you to edit the information for conventional operation using MDC type signalling NOTE If Signalling requires MDC or GE STAR capabilities you cannot have Quick Call Il Follow CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screens with signalling deactivated None for Quick Call Il capabilities PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW menu appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F3 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen appears 2 3 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD PERS Add Personality allows you to add a Conventional personality Each personality must be connected to a channel on the Zone Channel Summary menu F4 F
149. alue Field Definition This is the secure receive discriminator level softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 24 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 3 SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU F4 RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press E MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN SERVICE SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU HELP DTMF High Speed MDC 1200 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP DTMF HIGH MDC EXIT ALIGN SPEED 1200 Refer to your radio service manual for the signalling alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Signalling deviation should be checked any time the radio is serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has been replaced All radio compensation deviation adjustments must be made before adjusting signalling deviation PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F4 The SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 DTMF ALIGN DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Transmit Deviation Alignment Refer to your radio service manual for the DTMF signalling deviation alignment procedure This procedu
150. alue specifies the good excellent boundary Domain L 00 lt L lt FF The default is 69 VC RSSI Accpt Threshold Voice Channel RSSI Acceptable Threshold While in a voice call RSSI samples will be compared against the Voice Channel RSSI Acceptable Threshold If samples fall below this threshold the radio will initiate an attempt at site switching causing an interruption in the voice call Valid RSSI values range from 1 to FF Selecting Disabled will set the threshold to 0 disabling voice channel RSSI site switching The factory default is Disabled Special Note On RSSI Threshold Constant Settings The default values for the RSSI received signal strength indication threshold constants programmed in your radio may not be optimal for your system These values are critical for proper site switching Please review the following information to set the RSSI threshold constants for your SmartZone system configuration and desired site switching performance 68P81074C50 6 43 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 1 2 VOICE ON CONTROL OPTIONS F4 NA F2 ra RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model TRUNKING WIDE OPTIONS VOC Options VOC Options VOC Capable RSSI Acceptable Threshold VOC Site Lock Time VOC Pended Emer Time VOC Activation Time F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT This screen allows you to change o
151. at radio will be serviced on a First In First Out FIFO basis G 5 GLOSSARY RSS Quik Call II Radio Check Software Read Receive Frequency Recent User Priority Repeater RIB Radio Interface Cable RAM Read RSS RSS 232 Rx Save Screen Sub directory G 6 A two tone sequential tone signally system A signalling feature that lets your radio be polled to see if it is turned on and in range The user receives no indication of the poll except perhaps a brief lighting of the transmit or busy light Radio Service Software purchased by Motorola product resellers through a license agreement that is delivered on a 5 1 4 and 3 1 2 diskettes and used to program two way radios with a unique set of features called personalities The transfer of information from the radio codeplug to the computer s temporary memory RAM via the RIB communication link The center of the receive channel in MHz The ability of the Motorola Central Controller to ensure uninterrupted communications to a recent user of the trunked system Recent User Priority ensures that a group engaged in a conversation will get priority access even if there is a significant delay between transmissions An electric device with transmit and receive capabilities A repeater will retransmit information at 125 70 or 35 Watts of power A trunked repeater used in 800 MHz trunking systems will typically have the transmit and receive frequencies
152. ate ease of operation Call ID Enter the six digit decimal Call ID or Universal ID for this member of the call list The Call ID is used in Private Call or Call Alert to uniquely identify the individual that is to be called or paged For Type and lli radios use the Universal ID if available 68P81074C50 6 81 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 CONVENTIONAL MENU RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function Key F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV CONVENTIONAL MENU HELP Conventional Radio Wide Configuration Conventional Personalities Options MDC Systems Options Call List Auxiliary Systems Conventional Message Alias List Conventional Status Alias List EXIT F2 F3 F4 F7 F8 F9 F10 CONV CONV MDC AUX MSG STATUS EXIT WIDEOPT PERS CONFIG SYSTEM ALIAS ALIAS This screen allows you to navigate to the conventional edit screens The options in these menus pertain only to conventional radio features PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 2 3 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 F2 F3 F4 F7 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field CONV WIDE OPT Conventional Radio Wide Options This screen holds the fields that are pertinent to all the conventional channels in th
153. ay be COM1 COM2 COM3 OR COM4 A tone generated by the radio over the voice channel to the trunked repeater Connect tone is used as a Signal to the central controller that a specific voice channel has been assigned There are eight different connect tones available They are 76 60 Hz 83 72 Hz 90 00 Hz 105 88 Hz 116 13 Hz 128 57 Hz 138 46 Hz The ability of the Motorola trunked system to ensure that a radio just coming into service will be sent to the appropriate voice channel to join the rest of the Fleet Subfleet or Talkgroup Once a group has been assigned a voice channel the control channel will continue to transmit the voice channel information for that call for the duration of the call In a trunking system one of the four highest frequencies that is used to provide a continuous two way communications path between central controller and all radios on the system The flashing marker used to indicate the current position on the display screen Carrier Squelch An organized file containing records or related data To decrease a value Standard settings the RSS uses for I O port locations files locations and display settings The value a field will automatically contain if a user does not specifically change it A catalog of files on a disk To view the catalog of files on a disk on drive A enter the DOS directory command DIR A lt Enter gt 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GLOSSARY Disk Drive Diskette DOS DPL DTMF
154. ble ont epe to eni ri e a ate de ak deen eae 6 115 6 2 9 4 Auxaliry Systems xcti ete ER PAIRE Eo I etii io 6 117 6 2 3 4 1 Singletone SySte uo eee neeite iiia a a ie iior 6 119 6 2 9 4 2 Singletone List REETTA AATE S A TATTA 6 121 6 2 3 4 3 Quik Gall Il Systetn 2 eorr cod ete tee vk dv 6 122 6 23 44 GE St r System ect eal i a ae edi eati eee netiis ted 6 125 6 2 3 4 5 Conventional Message Alias List eseseeeeneeeeneeeneen nennen 6 128 6 2 3 4 6 Conventional Status Alias List ssessessseeeeneeeneeeneeen nennen 6 130 6 2 4 Zone TalkGroup Channel Assignment ssssesseseseseeeeneennneneeen nennen nnne 6 132 SECTION 7 PRINT MENU FUNCTIONS 7 1 INTRODUCTION TO SEGTION n e eet cert eee ee re e bte TE i ee ee 7 1 7 1 1 Print Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu sssssssseseseeeneeeeeenennneen enne nennen nnne nens 7 3 TA I Trunking Menu reri e ERE DU RUE I EE E AEG RE REI I REI ee ies 7 4 4 9 Conventional Men Ghee d Atel do Ur LEE eine ee 7 5 SECTION 8 FILE MAINTENANCE MENU FUNCTIONS 8 1 INTRODUCTION TO uti m ie o e EG UR P DOR E ERE RICE 8 1 8 2 FIEE MAINTENANGE MENU eic cade eintreten cd e ec Pede etes re reete ted 8 1 8 2 1 Greate Directory Path Ree eme mi a tr dece m e Er ERES EUR ELE ee 8 3 8 22 Delete Archive Files o recs dte er eet nct edv eet 8 4 iv
155. brief series of beeps that provides the radio operator with an indication that a voice channel is available and assigned to them An audible tone honk heard from the radio s speaker when the PTT is depressed The tone will be heard when either the radio is out of range of the system or the radio is programmed with the incorrect system information Time out timer limits the transmission period to a pre defined time The radio will automatically stop transmitting when the time period expires and the radio will generate an alert tone to notify the user that no transmission is taking place TPL Tone Private Line coded squelch A channel that has TPL on the receive frequency will require both the presence of carrier as well as the correct TPL code before it will unmute Also if you have TPL on the transmit frequency all transmissions on that channel will be modulated at a sub audible level with the TPL code Modulation is continuous Time Out Timer Upon releasing the PTT the radio will return to monitor the Control Channel If the user desires to initiate another call A communications path The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users A type of trunking that is composed of Fleets and Subfleets and limited by the size of codes of those groups A type system handshaking includes sending of the Acknowledge tone and High Speed Handshake GLOSSARY RSS Type 1 Type lli Transmit Deviation Alignm
156. ccess lL ee et Lin OU eee F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 Repeater Rec ELE F4 F6 F4 F5 Required FEASElSOfIWAre dita dle re dtd dail eiu in ative odd deg F8 F3 Resetsl ype EN F4 F6 F7 F4 Retry Counter IEEE F4 F4 F4 F8 Reverse Burst TOC e hentai e eee quse t eiae dt ween eed rte F4 F6 F3 F9 Revert Announcement F4 F4 F4 F8 Revert Fleet D tc uut del E ER eset tata ait EE ete weitere F4 F4 F4 F8 Revert Individual ID essa leit ee eee ae ee cre iti De Lee cate ieee F4 F4 F4 F8 RENIE a ni E Ip EET F4 F4 F4 F8 Revert Size Code x iced dite e a i a iai eue Re oe Pu uev ee Du dee e F4 F4 F4 F8 R vert S bfleet idein radere tede teca orna hee een eda F4 F4 F4 F8 Revert Talkgroup 2 Lait elie ls F4 F4 F4 F8 Rotary Aler ae morra n r AE tret petiere tg ee ct e rt wat Pd Cere eet F4 F3 F2 Rotary Switch Scan uae eei Ie e give pa ea ee dad dran dde ce F4 F3 F2 Rx Channel Ranges MHz sssssssssssssssssseseneeee nennen tnmen ener intret etnies en nnns nens sn nnne F4 F4 F3 F6 Rx IMITARI F4 F6 F3 F9 RX FS Freg net ei eta eh 4 4 4 nag p EE F4 F4 F3 F6 F6 Dado F4 F4 F4 F6 dgio ala Lee F4 F4 F4 F7 Rx Hold Time S66 acad ee etc eee et p tere ente en tt eas F4 F3 F5 F8 Rx Modulation TL EE F4 F4 F3 F9
157. ch When Yes XL IC Present ende neon inet peine nga Yes TX Clear Alert Tones ctt recens Enabled Periodic Keyfail Alert Tone Enabled Non XL Scan Unsquelch Duration ms 275 XL Scan Unsquelch Duration ms 875 Secure P nch T ht aie neha Always On F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT This screen allows you to set up secure options that affect radio wide operation Note The Secure Equipped field must be set to Yes to access the secure screens FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F2 The RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears If the radio is secure Capable set the field Secure Equipped to Yes Press F6 The RADIO WIDE SECURE OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 68P81074C50 6 7 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Ignore Sec Clr Swi
158. cify archive file path C MRSS MTSX ARCHIVE At CONFIGURE COMPUTER type this archive file path name if you have a hard disk This is where you will keep your radio archive files If you don t keep archive files on your hard disk specify one of your diskette drive s Save this configuration F8 saves the field options displayed on the screen 2 30 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED Next are the steps to specify the serial port you use for interfacing with the radio and RIB The default port is COM 1 2 10 2 Setting a Communications Port Table 2 11 Setting a Port Instruction What to Type Explanation 1 Go to CONFIGURE COMPUTER Press F3 at SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU to go to CONFIGURE COMPUTER 2 Go to the RIB field Pressing Tab Enter or Return advances to the next field Press Tab five times Use the arrow keys to scroll through the 3 Select a port available ports Options are COM 1 or COM 2 on many computers Some computers will also have COM 3 and COM 4 Choose the port where you will connect the computer to RIB cable 4 Test the port You can test the port by pressing F6 COM TEST if OK it will beep and in the Instruction Area see letter B in Figure 2 7 of the screen the words Communication with the radio was successful will appear F8 saves the field options on the screen 5 Save this configuration Configuration File Written Successfully appears in Instruction Area B of the S
159. clear if 12 5 KHz is selected 6 100 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 2 3 1 CONVENTIONAL RAC OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Type MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS CONV PERS RAC OPTIONS Repeater Access Tone Signalling System Access Strapping Access Type RAB 1 Code Type RAB 1 Singletone Hz 300 0 RAB 2 Code Type Singletone RAB 2 Singletone Hz F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PREV NEXT EXIT PERS PERS This screen contains all the personality specific RAC related information This information contained in this screen will change depending on the current personality PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW menu appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F3 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen appears Press F7 The CONV PERS RAC OPTIONS screen appears 2 3 3 Press F9 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS screen appears 4 5 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 6 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 PREV PERS Previous Personality allows you to go to the personality before this one F4 NEXT PERS Next Personality allows you to go to the pers
160. control channel for the radio to lock onto This is used when the radio cannot find a control channel on any of the frequencies programmed on the RSS Factory default is OFF Full Spectrum CC Scan Timer sec This is the amount of time in seconds the radio has to perform full spectrum CC scan before returning to the normal CC scan The valid range is 5 to 31 seconds Factory default is 10 RSSI Acceptable Threshold Use the UP DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value directly In the RSSI sampling scheme RSSI values are separated into four levels poor acceptable good and excellent as shown i e all values below the acceptable constant fall into the POOR level values between the acceptable and good constants fall into the ACCEPTABLE level etc The value in this field specifies the POOR ACCEPTABLE boundary Domain L 00 lt L lt FF The default is 61 6 42 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW RSSI Good Threshold Use the UP DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value directly In the RSSI sampling scheme RSSI values are separated into four levels poor acceptable good and excellent This value specifies the acceptable good boundary Domain L 00 lt L lt FF The default is 66 RSSI Excellent Threshold Use the UP DOWN arrows to make your selection or enter a value directly In the RSSI sampling scheme RSSI values are separated into four levels poor acceptable good and excellent This v
161. creen 6 Exit screen when done Press F10 to exit this screen and go to previous menu 68P81074C50 2 31 2 11 EXITING THE RSS If you want to program a radio don t exit yet Whenever exiting the RSS always ask yourself these questions 1 Did you apply the changes to the radio save to the radio 2 Did you apply the changes to a computer file save archive file If you do want to exit exiting is very easy you use the Esc key to return to the MAIN MENU then press F10 F2 to exit to the DOS prompt 2 32 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 12 MAIN MENU RSS LOCATION Press any key when instructed on the BANNER Screen MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN MAIN MENU HELP SERVICE Alignment Requires RIB GET SAVE PROGRAM Codeplug Data from to Disk Radio CHANGE CREATE VIEW Radio Codeplug Data PRINT Codeplug Data FILE Maintenance FLASHport Upgrade SETUP Computer Configuration Exit Radio Service Software Return to DOS F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F8 9 10 SERVICE GET CHANGE PRINT FILE FIASHPORT SETUP EXIT MENU SAVE VIEW DATA MAINT UPGRADE MENU TO DOS The MAIN MENU is the top level of the program from which all function selections start All selections are made via the function keys labeled F1 through F10 on the keyboard All other menus contain an ESC key and by pressing it the operator may at any time return to the MAIN MENU After making a selection
162. cted coast tpe ra aust eeu ees F4 F4 F3 ACCESS TYP C F4 F4 F4 F8 ACCESS TYPO ERN 4 4 4 9 ACCESS Typa e a A A a F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 AGK Alert TOfle cete Te etudes F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Acknowledge Alert Tone EAA eA nennen e nennen an 4 6 4 Addressing MOde e E eto ite ede ater Lue defer e p ue F4 F6 F7 F5 Aff Hold Off eet LC ai daa nei ic te ae eet F4 F4 F2 F2 Amiata Ty PO EE F4 F4 F3 Alert Tone Vol Offset db epar A ea ial Gnd Ae doe eee ae ee F4 F3 F2 E 4 2 Alla C F4 F4 F3 Alt Display Time s ene entere reete rece F4 F3 F6 Announcement Group co Ie ieee ca i a eaux eg et dec Aen ee ae F4 F4 F4 Auto Access Code F4 F6 F3 F8 Auto Dial Holdoff ms cet ne ttle nae eevee cien eee dte eee d se Le o ee e E d F4 F4 F2 p DIS F4 F3 F6 Auto Reset Carr eta end Pai ee F4 F6 F7 F4 Auto Reset Duration sec R re a 4 6 7 4 Auto Reset Time sec eese t reete Le aed Ee A de ee F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 PAULO SCdliz ety et E e da
163. ction No tone will sound DIR Enable Disable Talkaround 1 MSG Enables the Message feature 3 MUTE Enable Disable the keypad beeps PAGE Select Call Alert ID 3 PHON Select DTMF Phone Number to be transmitted 1 PROG Change Phone Scan lists 1 PSWD Change Radio Lock Password 2 PWR Enable Disable Tx Low Power SCAN Enable Disable Channel Scan 1 STS Enables the Status feature 3 VIEW View Phone Scan lists 1 ZONE SYS Select Change zones NOTES 1 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Conventional Personality screen F4 F6 F3 2 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Radio Wide Display Options screen F4 F6 F3 3 For the radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the MDC System screen F4 F6 F4 F3 For PSWD to show on the RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGURATION screen RADIO LOCK must be enabled on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen F4 F3 F6 4 The radio display shows 3 valid menu items per screen When programmed menu items are not applicable for a specific zone channel combination the menu items will be discarded WARNING THE RADIO DISPLAY MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST 1 VALID NON BLANK MENU ITEM Failure to do so may result in improper behavior of the radio 6 20 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Trunk Item Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select Menu functions Use F7 to add and F9 to delete trunked items Depend
164. ction key F1 F10 4 5 Press F9 The MDC SYSTEM OPTIONS screen appears 6 7 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 PREV SYS Previous System allows you to go to the system before the current one F4 NEXT SYS Next System allows you to go to the system after the current one F9 MDC SYS MDC System MDC SYS REMOTE is used to change and view parameters associated with MDC System Remote Monitor Radio Trace features F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 68P81074C50 6 109 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS MDC System Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to change the MDC system or directly enter the system number Valid entries are 0 to 630ms in increments of 50ms System Pretime This is the amount of pretime used before the first MDC packet is transmitted Preamble During Pretime This is to enable preamble sequence transmission before voice transmissions Inter Packet Time The Inter sequence pretime is the period of time between consecutive MDC messages Valid entries are in the range 0 to 6350 ms in steps of 50 ms increments Due to the rounding that occurs when preamble during pretime is enabled the value shown may change by 50 ms when a codeplug is read from a radio o
165. currently displayed menu screen or field F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Field Definition This is the front end filter softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 18 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 2 2 RATED AUDIO ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU RATED AUDIO RATED AUDIO Frequency Current Value New Softpot Value 938 0625 Std Audio 201 Std Audio F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PROGRAM EXIT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the rated audio calibration procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Press F3 The RATED AUDIO screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F8 PROGRAM VALUE function wi
166. d allows the user to select and transmit a specific status from a list pre programmed into the radio A complete activation of the Status feature therefore includes first enabling the feature and then programming the desired status list to be made available to the user Status list programming is performed by means of the Status Alias screen MAIN MENU F4 F6 F9 The factory default is Disabled Status Request This field indicates whether or not the Status Request feature is enabled If Status Request is enabled the radio responds to a remote status interrogation with the last attempted status Disabling the feature prohibits the radio from responding to a remote status interrogation The factory default is Disabled Message This field indicates whether or not the Message feature is enabled Message when enabled allows the user to select and transmit a specific message from a list pre programmed into the radio A complete activation of the Message feature therefore includes first enabling the feature and then programming the desired list of messages to be made available to the user Message list programming is performed by means of the Message Alias screen MAIN MENU F4 F6 F8 The factory default is Disabled Emergency This field indicates whether or not the Emergency feature is Enabled 6 106 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Emergency Type Alarm Only An emergency message is repeatedly sent to the base station until it is cancelled wh
167. d by qualified service personnel F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 4 4 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 1 1 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model REFERENCE OSCILLATOR REFERENCE OSCILLATOR Frequency Current Value 869 9875 155 New Softpot Value Transmitter Off dob ee a ee S a F8 PROGRAM VALUE The New Softpot Value is the working value of the reference oscillator reference frequency Refer to your radio service manual for the reference frequency alignment procedure The reference oscillator is adjusted by first keying the radio via F6 then press the up down arrow keys to increase or decrease the frequency respectively A three minute time out timer is enabled when the radio is keyed via F6 Shift up down arrow keys will increase the adjustment speed The radio will transmit on the test mode 1 frequency A relative adjusted value will be displayed on the status bar but the actual transmitter frequency must be determined from the frequency counter or the service monitor PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F2 The TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Press F2 The REFERENCE OSCILLATOR screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired functi
168. d for signalling Type in the Conventional Personality screen F4 F6 F3 and or the Trunking personality screen F4 F4 F4 F8 In addition the Emergency button must be configured from the Radio Wide Button screen F4 F3 F3 F2 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F2 The RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears Press F7 The RADIO WIDE EMERGENCY OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 68P81074C50 6 9 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Silent Alarm When enabled the radio will operate silently when transmitting an emergency signal No audible or visual indicators will occur This feature is not compatible with Emergency Receive To enable Silent Alarm the Emergency Receive F4 F3 F6 must be disabled Emergency operation must be enabled on the Conventional Personality screen F4 F6 F3 and or the Trunking Personality Emergency Options screen F4 F4 F4 F8 In addition the Emergency button must be configured from the Radio Wide Button screen
169. d only be attempted by qualified service personnel F8 SECURE DISCR Secure Receive Discriminator Level Adjustment Refer to your radio service manual for the secure receive discriminator level alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 4 17 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 2 1 FRONT END FILTER ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model FRONT END FILTER VHF amp UHF ONLY FRONT END FILTER VHF amp UHF ONLY Current Frequency Value New Softpot Value 450 02500 0 465 22500 475 22500 484 97500 500 27500 511 97500 519 97500 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PROGRAM EXIT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the front end filter alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F3 The RECEIVER ALIGNMENT VHF amp UHF ONLY MENU appears Press F2 The FRONT END FILTER ALIGNMENT screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the
170. d receive on Failsoft Frequency Enter the frequency directly in MHz A transmit and receive frequency are required if the system is UHF or VHF Strapping This field contains the transmit mode of Talkgroup or Subfleet If set to Clear or Secure the Talkgroup or Subfleet is forced to that particular transmit mode When set to Select the user is allowed to select the secure or clear transmit modes via the radio s two position concentric switch 68P81074C50 6 71 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 2 4 3 TRUNKING EMERGENCY DATA CONFIGURATION 5 0 f RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Choice MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS EMER EMERGENCY DATA CONFIGURATION Protocol Type see lli Access Type Fast Emergency 1 Disabled Revert Size Code A Emergency Alarm Disabled Revert Fleet ID 0001 Strapping teet eee Clear Retry Counter sese 1 Revert 001 Emergency Hot Disabled Strapping soi ier tee dein Clear TxPeriods uec ieu 10 Tactical 2 eem pes Enabled Revert PTT ID Disabled F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXI
171. defined on this screen are assigned to the trunking system of the Trunking System screen F4 F4 F3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F5 The CALL LIST TABLE screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD LIST allows you to add another call list F3 PREV LIST Previous List allows you to go to the list before the current one F4 NEXT LIST allows you to go to the list after the current one 6 80 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW F5 DELETE LIST allows you to delete a call list F6 ADD CALL ID allows you to add a new call ID F7 DELETE CALL ID allows you to delete a call ID F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Call List Each trunking system may have a unique call list and each list may have a maximum of 19 IDs The call list defined on this screen are assigned to trunking personalities in the trunking personality screen FA FA F4 This assignment must be made or the list will not be accessible Call Text Enter the alphanumeric name for this Call ID The name will appear on the radio display to facilit
172. deviation limit alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Transmit deviation limit alignment is a way of correcting for deviation sensitivity versus RF frequency variations in the VCO The transmit and receive bands are divided into frequency zones with a calibration point value in each zone Compensation for each of these points must be checked and adjusted if the VCO is replaced PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F2 The TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F5 The TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Field Definition This is the VCO softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 4 10 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 1 5 TRANSMIT DEVIATION LIMIT ALIGNMENT REFERENCE SOFTPOT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE
173. e Installation Data MTSXINS 002 executable files This is a compressed version of the file that the install program uncompresses during installation to your hard disk A file can be a program a set of commands to tell the computer what to do or a collection of data or information As mentioned in the DOS section DOS files generally have two parts a file name followed by a file extension which is optional The extension provides an easy way to at a glance identify or tag files for easy grouping or categorizing In the computer world some file extension naming conventions have evolved and Motorola uses these conventions in the RSS as you may have noticed Now you know what s on the RSS diskettes we supply Next you ll learn how to organize your own disk and diskettes that you ll use to store your radio archive files We suggest that frequent RSS users and computer pros skip the ORGANIZING YOUR HARD DISK AND DISKETTES section and join us back in the STARTING THE RSS section New users should read all sections 2 10 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 6 ORGANIZING YOUR HARD DISK AND DISKETTES When you first start using computers you typically do not have a lot of files to organize But after a while it gets increasingly difficult to distinguish between file types to pick out a specific file in a long list to keep track of what s in which file or to remember which files are similar in content Therefore it s important
174. e Systems Singletone List Quik Call Il Systems GE STAR Systems F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HELP SINGLE SINGLE QUIK GE STAR SYSTEM TONES CALLII SYSTEM This screen is used to define the Singletone System information the Singletone list frequencies the Quik Call 11 Systems information and the GE STAR Systems Information PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 2 3 Press F7 The AUXILIARY SYSTEMS MENU screen 6 7 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 SINGLE SYSTEM Singletone feature allows the capability to selectively access repeaters The Singletone Systems defined from this option can be specified in the CONV PERS RAC OPTIONS Screen from Main F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 by enabling the Repeater Access field F3 SINGLE TONES Singletone List contains the programmable tone frequencies for the Singletone Feature F4 QUIK CALL II Quik Call Il feature provides a decoding method for the radio to unmute when receiving the proper tones programmed in the systems The systems defined from this option can be chosen in the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY Screen from Main F4 F6 F3 under the following 2 conditions 1 If GE ST
175. e desired duration The Pretime Duration specifies the duration of the pretime transmission preceding the PTT ID and Emergency GE STAR data The range is O to 2550 ms in 25 ms increments The Factory Default is 500 Baud Rate Use the Up Down arrows to select 400bps or 800 bps The Baud Rate specifies the baud rate of the GE STAR data in bits per second The Factory Default is 400 bps DOS Data Operated Squelch Use the Up Down arrows to select Enabled or Disabled DOS specifies whether or not Data Operated Squelch is Enabled The Factory Default is Enabled Unmute Hold Off ms Use the Up Down arrows to scroll or directly enter the desired time The range is 25 through 2550 in increments of 25 This feature may also be Disabled The Unmute Hold Off specifies the duration that the radio waits with speaker muted for a DOS detect after a carrier is first detected The Factory Default is 550 Coast Time ms Use the Up Down arrows to scroll or directly enter the desired time The range is 0 through 500 in increments of 25 Coast Time specifies the duration that the radio waits with speaker muted after DOS detect has been lost but before unmuting The Factory Default is 100 68P81074C50 6 125 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Emergency Alarm Use the Up Down arrows to select Enabled or Disabled The Emergency Alarm field specifies whether or not GE STAR Emergency Alarm is Enabled The Factory Default is Disabled Monitor w Sil Emer Use the Up Down arrow
176. e eene 3 24 3 9 16 Exit the RSS eet no ect Aan dua ec e da deg des d dev e du ne ed 3 25 3 4 CLONING MORE RADIOS THE SAME WAY ssssssssssseesseeeneeen nennen trennen snnt 3 25 3 4 1 Desired Features ete aedes eee do o tente d nan cr ue eh o xo ree eee ue deve des 3 25 3 4 2 Major Decisions Involved nennen nennen nnn nee nennen nnn 3 25 3 4 8 Step by Step Specific Programming 3 25 3 4 4 Read Desired Source Archive File esssssssssssssss eene 3 26 3 4 5 Clone Current Radio From Archive File ssssssssseeeeeee eene 3 26 3 4 6 Cloning Remaining 3 27 3 4 7 Cloning Additional Radios enr sitne enn sene enn 3 28 7 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TABLE OF CONTENTS cont 348 Exitthe RSS cse ined tete dida e e anh beatae 3 28 3 5 ADDITIONAL RADIO 3 29 3 5 1 MTS 2000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item 3 30 SECTION 4 SERVICE MENU FUNCTIONS 414 RADIO SERVICE VIA RSS MANUAL 1o iit Lacie eser ERE Lii doce eL vede eene iain 4 1 42 face Sees Une MIO nnm idt 4 1 4 21 Transmitter Alignment Menu
177. e is mutually exclusive with Emergency Alarm and Emergency Call operations MDC Hot Mic Tx Period sec When the MDC Emergency Hot Mic feature is enabled the MDC Hot Mic Tx Period determines the time period the radio will be transmitting with the microphone unmuted without user intervention The MDC Hot Mic Tx Period ranges from 10 to 120 seconds in increments of 10 seconds The factory default is 10 seconds 6 108 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 3 2 1 MDC SYSTEM OPTIONS F6 F4 F3 F9 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press Hall LE LEN MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model CONV MDC SYSTEMS OPTIONS MDC System System Pretime ms Emergency Preamble During Pretime Polite Retries Inter Packet Time ms Impolite Retries Limited Patience sec Emer Priority Tx Inhibit Emer Limited Patience sec DOS Data Squelch Operation RAC Repeater Access Code Coast Time ms Pretime ms Sel Call Reset Ack Alert Tone Auto Reset Time sec Preambles Sidetone F3 F4 F9 F10 PREV NEXT MDC SYS EXIT SYS SYS REMOTE This screen contains more options for MDC systems PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears 3 Press F4 The MDC CONFIGURATION MENU screen appears Press F3 The MDC SYSTEM screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired fun
178. e moved overwritten by the user or renamed Prior to performing a FLASHport Upgrade MRSS displays the list of files that exist in the path entered here The user is then asked to select the desired FLASHport Upgrade Software Kit and press F8 to start the upgrade process Errors such as UNABLE TO OPEN THE SELECTED UPGRADE FILE FILE CHECKSUM ERROR UNABLE TO OPEN THE SELECTED UPGRADE FILE or INCORRECT UPGRADE SOFTWARE KIT mean that the selected file cannot be accessed or the selected file has an invalid format the file is not MRSS compatible or the Software Kit No in the file does not match the one on your FLASHKEY respectively In case of such errors make sure the selected file is the one that was shipped to you with your upgrade kit Bootstrap Code Path amp File Name Enter the default directory path and the default file name for this file The default path established by the RSS for this field is C MRSS MTSX UPGRADE MTSXBOOT ENC SRIB Software Path amp File Name Enter the default directory path and the default name for the SRIB Software file The default path established by the MRSS installation program is C MRSS MTSX SRIB and the default file name is SMARTRIB ENC In order to assure a successful FLASHport Upgrade it is strongly recommended that none of the files installed by the MRSS installation program be moved overwritten by the user or renamed Errors such as UNABLE TO OPEN THE SRIB SOFTWARE FILE or SRIB SOFTWARE CHECKSU
179. e ne cog e o ie RR aa dead actin Waa d o d qe d e ve Da dn eis F8 F8 Display Light Time Sec cte e re F4 F3 F6 Display Site Thu spon F4 F4 F2 F2 015 5 5 506 2 te rn 4 6 Dynamic Priority ail ee dr ite aree tudo Dep eo dc ede ttd pee eld cle F4 F3 F5 Dynamic Fegro plrg usce cene us bb etes eed cene ten aee it F4 F4 F3 E EMERGENCY DATA CONFIGURATION rnnt nnn senes nen nnne F4 F4 F4 F8 ENHANCEMENT OPTIONS F8 F2 F7 ENVIRONMENT ser F4 F4 F2 F2 Echo Mute Time MS sso csc ete eo dee ea ee a a eee F4 F6 F3 F6 Emer Limited Patience sec nnne nennen nn F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Emer PTT 1D Sidetone miin eenid ee ded curate Allg cies i ele ie F4 F6 F4 F3 Emer Prio Ex Inhibition tei ene ptite ptr eee ciu debe ede MX F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Emerg P TT 1D iio Rae decr Pi eae ed eed a a ee ud F4 F6 F3 Emergency aste re rode ut NUR Hen meets oti ie F4 F6 F4 F3 Emergency Alarm sarsii iar erraia E ela ell ieee Laelia eee elias F4 F4 F4 F8 Emergency MA AN AA e Teu at ceat ede ote eee F4 F6 F7 F5 euren aep F4 F4 F4 F8 Emergency HOt MIG 5 5 ip Ae nei ER tach nee F4 F4 F4 F8 Emergency RecelVve ei nena aes F4 F3 F6 jeu F4 F6 F4 F3 F FS Fred
180. e radio such as monitor type CONV PERS Conventional Personalities This screen is used to define the conventional frequencies coded squelch type PL DPL and to define conventional options phone scan etc and signalling MDC permitted on each channel MDC SYSTEM This screen is used to define the MDC signalling configurations of each conventional personality Each system can be defined with a unique PTT ID emergency operation and signalling timing options This function will only be active when a radio with MDC capabilities has been read Not all radios have this capability AUX SYSTEM Auxiliary System This menu contains the advanced Conventional Signalling features that are in addition to MDC such as Quick Call 1 GE Star Singletone etc This function will only be active when a radio with these signalling capabilities has been read 6 82 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW F8 MSG ALIAS This screen contains the Conventional Message Alias List and is used to view and edit the Message Alias Number and Message Alias Text F8 STATUS ALIAS This screen contains the Conventional Status Alias List and is used to view and edit the Status Alias Number and Status Alias Text F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 83 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 1 CONVENTIONAL RADIO WIDE OPTIONS F6 F2 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use
181. e receiver audio so that no radio traffic is heard Factory default is Disabled Console Acknowledgement Required If a Console Acknowledge is Required then an Emergency Alarm is not considered successful unless a Dispatcher Acknowledge is received When an Emergency Alarm is not successful the full four beep Acknowledge Tone is not sounded and the Alarm is automatically sent again until the number of retries specified is exhausted Factory default is Disabled Retry Counter If an unlimited number of retries is desired then select Infinite otherwise enter a value from 1 to 255 Normally if the radio is unsuccessful in sending a transmission it will retry for one ISW sequence before quitting For Emergency Alarms however the radio will retry for the number of ISW sequences specified by the Retry Counter NOTE Emergency alarm must be enabled for this field to be valid 68P81074C50 6 73 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Tactical Tactical Default Emergency Alarms and Calls are made on the selected talkgroup unless a The Announcement is selected or b The Dynamic Regrouping talkgroup is selected and there is not a valid dynamic ID In both cases the default Talkgroup is used Non Tactical The radio uses the default Talkgroup and default Announcement group for Emergency transmissions Revert PTT ID When enabled Default Talkgroup or Announcement Group transmissions will be PTT ID style Factory default is Disabled Revert Size code Use the
182. e scan list 1 Go to Phone Operation Select None Unlimited or List Only Go to Receive Frequency field Enter frequency data Go to Receive Squelch Type field Make selection PL Go to Code field Enter Code Go to Transmit Frequency field Enter frequency data Go to Transmit Squelch Type field Repeat steps 11 through 13 for Transmit field Go to next Personality Repeat steps 4 through 18 for additional personalities Go to Change View Menu What to Type lt lt lt How to do it What it Means From the Change View menu press F6 to see Conventional menu Personality will be highlighted Pressing F2 repeatedly will add desired number of personalities Press F4 to return to Personality 1 Press Tab to advance to Scan List field Press up down arrow keys to select 1 Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Press up down arrow keys to scroll for choices Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Enter frequency data via keyboard or up down arrow keys Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Press up down arrow keys to select TPL DPL or CSQ Or enter PL via the keyboard Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Press up down arrow keys to scroll for choices or enter code via the keyboard Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Press up down
183. e source of the tuning data is the target radio The cursor movement keys located on the numeric keypad The up and down arrow keys are used to increment and decrement values A data communications method in which information is transmitted one character at a time A start bit precedes each character and a stop bit follows each character The ability of radios in a Type II or Type Ili system to automatically transmit their talkgroup and unit ID information to the Central Controller Affilliation occurs after the radio has locked on to the control channel frequency It does not require the radio user to press the PTT The ability of the portable radio to send up to 16 inbound signalling words in a four second period if the outbound signalling word is not received from the central controller after the radio has made a request to transmit A duplicate file of the archive file that is used in event that the original archive file becomes damaged or erased BSI An identifier which is programmed into the central controller and sent out in Morse code ID on the lowest frequency trunked repeater A channel that is not assigned a transmit frequency A channel that is not assigned a receive or transmit PL code To load the computer s operating system A feature on conventional modes that gives listening privacy The radio will not key when there is a carrier on channel unless it is your PL DPL group Instead you will hear a busy tone while P
184. e to be used It affects the values in the following fields Code A Code B Code C Code E The available signalling types include Motorola GE Plectron Federal The factory default is Motorola Signalling Muting Type Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections This field dictates the signalling Muting Type to be used during Quik Call Il operations AND OR AND Both signalling Unmuting Quik Call and Radio Unmuting must be satisfied to unmute OR Either Signalling Unmuting Quik Call or Radio Unmuting must be satisfied to unmute The factory Default is AND Initial Squelch Type this field is for view only This field dictates the Initial Squelch Type to be used upon entry to a Quik Call II channel Released Quik Call The factory Default is Quik Call Reset Type Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections This field dictates the Quik Call II Call Reset Type to be used Manual or Auto When Manual Reset is selected a Monitor button is required for proper Quik Call Il operations The Factory Default is Auto Auto Reset Carr Ovrd Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections When this feature is enabled the Auto Reset Duration will be reloaded into the Auto Reset Timer when the radio mutes The Factory Default is Enabled Auto Reset Duration sec Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections or directly enter the desired value Integer
185. ease or decrease power respectively SHIFT up down will increase the adjustment speed A relative Tx power value NOT WATTS will be displayed but the actual transmitter power output must be determined from your service monitor PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F2 The TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F3 The TRANSMIT POWER screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value Function key descriptions and field definitions are on the following page 4 6 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS New Softpot Value High Pwr This is the power level 1 for this frequency The status bar shows the setting in relation to the minimum and maximum settings New Softpot Value Low Pwr This is the power level 2 for this frequency The status bar shows the setting in relation to the minimum and maximum settings 68P81074C50 4 7 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 1 3 TRANSMIT DEVIATION BALANCE COMP
186. eatures you want it is time to actually program them into the radio Programming the personality into the radio s codeplug must be done after creating or editing the personality of a radio or else the changes will be lost Make sure that the radio is connected to the RIB and that both the RIB and the radio are powered up before pressing F8 Table 3 22 Steps to Save Personality to Radio s Codeplug Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to GET SAVE menu Press Esc to back up to MAIN MENU Press F3 at the MAIN MENU to see the GET SAVE menu Pressing F8 at the GET SAVE menu advances you Go to Program Codeplug to the PROGRAM RADIO screen where the current data stored in the computer s RAM what you can see on the RSS screens is programmed into the radio s codeplug CAUTION When programming or calibrating a radio DO NOT disconnect the radio from the RIB when the computer is communicating with the radio it may leave the radio in an inoperable state The only recommended time to disconnect the radio is at the MAIN MENU or GET SAVE screens 3 24 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 3 16 Exit the RSS Table 3 23 Steps to Exit the RSS Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means 1 Goto MAIN MENU menu Press Esc to back up to MAIN MENU PerESDIO DOS Press F10 then F2 to exit to DOS 3 4 CLONING MORE RADIOS To clone copy radios they must be of the same model type and vers
187. ed Factory default values are Infinite 30 60 and 120 seconds 6 12 68 81074 50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 2 RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG FEATURES RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU HELP Button Rotary Configuration Switch Configuration Menu Item List Configuration F10 EXIT Return to Radio Wide Configuration Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP BUTTON SWITCH MENU EXIT CONFIG CONFIG ITEM This screen is a multi level menu that is used to change view or modify codeplug features and option configurations that affect both conventional and trunking operation Typically when you begin to edit a codeplug you will come to this menu and configure the radio wide options first by working your way through the screens of this menu This will allow the options on other screens to reflect the radio wide options Some fields will not be visible if the radio does not support that option PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears 3 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU appears 4 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen
188. ed No phone operation is allowed 68P81074C50 6 67 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Hot Keypad DTMF Use up down arrow keys to enable DTMF while transmitting operation for this personality When this feature is enabled the keypad is live during all dispatch operation Pressing any digit 0 9 or will cause that digit to be transmitted Factory default is Disabled Status Enables Disables the transmission of pre determined Status messages IMPORTANT NOTE The radio controls may require additional setup for your Status configuration Also refer to the Radio Wide Button Switch Menu screen F4 F3 F3 In addition Status number and name aliasing is available on the Trunking System Options screen F4 F4 F3 F9 Message Enables Disables the transmission of pre determined canned messages IMPORTANT NOTE The radio controls may require additional setup for your Message configuration Also refer to the Radio Wide Button Switch Menu screen F4 F3 F3 In addition Status number and name aliasing is available on the Trunking System Options screen F4 F4 F3 F9 Call ID List This is the number of the Call ID list that this personality will use for Private Call IMPORTANT NOTE Refer to the Trunking Wide Call List screen F4 F4 F6 The radio controls may require additional setup for your Private Call configuration on the Radio Wide Button Switch Menu screen F4 F3 F3 The Private Call and Call Alert features must have a call list assigned for U
189. ed as Secure Tx Select N Two Position Concentric Position B Conventional and Trunking This field determines the function of the two position switch when it is in the position marked with the 0 symbol Press the up down arrow keys to select the function of the two position concentric switch located at the top of the radio Press Help F1 for a list of possible selections For the Secure equipped radios position B is fixed and defined as Clear Tx Select Three Position Toggle Position A Conventional and Trunking This field determines the function of the three position switch when it is in the position marked A Press the up down arrow keys to select the function of the two position toggle switch located at the top of the radio Press Help F1 for a list of possible selections Three Position Toggle Position B Conventional and Trunking This field determines the function of the three position switch when it is in the position marked B Press the up down arrow keys to select the function of the three position toggle switch located at the top of the radio Press Help F1 for a list of possible selections Three Position Toggle Position C Conventional and Trunking This field determines the function of the three position switch when it is in the position marked C Press the up down arrow keys to select the function of the three position toggle switch located at the top of the radio Press Help F1 for a list of possible selectio
190. een or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS System Use the up down arrow keys to scroll from system 1 to the number of systems in the radio System Key A system key or FTR key is required to access this field Otherwise the TCMS download procedure must be used F3 F4 System Type If the Trunking System is Type I the range of the ID changes for different size codes The ID is a three digit hexadecimal number If you have more than one fleet on a system you may want to use a Universal ID so people calling you can use one ID If the Trunking System is type II or Ili the individual ID is a four digit hexadecimal number For Type II trunking your radio will have a single Individual ID per system independent of the number of talkgroups user groups or personalities it is affiliated with on that system TYPE I or TYPE II Ili indicates the trunked signalling protocol used on this system Type is the original MOTOROLA trunked signaling protocol Type II Ili is an enhanced version of the original protocol that provides additional fleet management flexibility for a given system via an expanded signalling format Each radio has a single individual ID per system independent of the number of talkgroups user groups or personalities it is affiliated with on that system The screen for a II Ili system contains some information different than that for a Type 68P81074C50 6 49 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS System ID This field contains the 4 dig
191. elch setting to the desired value This screen allows you to adjust the squelch level for each test mode frequency Use the up down arrows to change the value of the squelch Use the Tab key to move between frequency points PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F3 The RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F5 The SQUELCH 20KHz screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Field Definition This is the squelch attenuator softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 68P81074C50 4 21 SERVICE 5 RSS 4 2 2 5 SQUELCH ATTENUATOR 25 35KHZ ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model SQUELCH 25 30KHz SQUELCH 25 30kHz Current Frequency Value New Softpot Value 851 0625 860 0625 869 9375 851 0625 860 0625 869 9375 F8 PROGRAM VALUE Refer
192. ely A relative deviation value is displayed but the actual transmitter deviation must be determined from your service monitor Set your modulation analyzer to read peak deviation PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F4 The SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Press F2 The DTMF TRANSMIT DEVIATION screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value The function key descriptions and field definition are on the following page 4 26 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITION New Softpot Value This is the DTMF softpot value The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 68P81074C50 4 27 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 3 2 TRANSMIT SIGNALLING HIGH SPEED RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model TRANSMIT SIGNALLING HIGH SPEED TRANSMIT SIG
193. en all the allowed retries both polite and impolite have been sent or reception of an acknowledgement from the base station or the first PTT press or a long press of the emergency button occurs Alarm and Call An emergency message is repeatedly sent to the base station until either all the allowed retries both polite and impolite have been sent or the radio receives an acknowledgement from the base station Once an acknowledgement is received from the base station the user can talk to the base station An emergency PTT ID will be sent with the voice on each PTT press The emergency call is canceled by a long press of the emergency button Both types of emergency support reverting transmitting emergency on a predetermined channel Acknowledge Alert Tone Enable this option if you want an emergency acknowledge beep to be sounded when the radio receives acknowledgement of its emergency call Revert Table This is the Emergency Revert Channel table which contains the channels pointed to in the conventional personalities where the radio reverts to when entering Emergency call mode Enter the zone numbers and the channel numbers in the table Each MDC personality will select one of these channels or it may choose itself First create personalities then go to the Zone Channel Assignment screen and enter channel information and you will be able to set the MDC emergency channels WARNING The emergency revert channels MUST be conventional chan
194. ency call For 6 character display models EMGRCV will be displayed This feature is not compatible with Silent Emergency Emergency must be enabled on each Trunking personality F4 F4 F4 F8 if your radio supports the emergency feature Factory default is Disabled Display Sys Sub Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to Enable SYS SUB mnemonics to be displayed on the radio menu instead of ZONE CHAN This feature permits customization of trunking applications to minimize user training The factory default depends on the model Backlight While in MTVA Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select Enabled or Disabled When this feature is Enabled the backlight on the radio will be continuously on while it is in the MTVA Any key press that would normally affect the status of the backlight will be ignored When the radio is removed from the MTVA the backlight will turn off and button presses affecting it will resume normal operation When this feature is Disabled the MTVA will not affect backlight operation The factory default is Disabled Radio Lock When this field is enabled the user will be required to enter the Radio Lock Password on power up before using the radio In order to use this feature a PSWD function must also be enabled on the Radio Wide Menu screen F4 F3 F3 F4 Factory default is Disabled Mandatory Password When this field is enabled the user must enter a password each time the radio is turned on f this option is disabled the user ma
195. ent Tree Tx Unit ID Universal ID User Scan Voice Channel Wide Area Call Workspace G 8 A type of trunking system that is composed of Announcement Groups and Talkgroups A Type Il system is limited on talkgroups and individual ID combinations to 48 000 IDs and 4 000 talkgroups per system The Type II system handshaking does not include sending Acknowledge tone and High Speed Handshake A type of trunking system composed of Fleets Subfleets and Talkgroups This trunking type supports both Type and Type II handshaking This trunking type allows Type radios to communicate with Type II radios on the same voice channel An electronic method of adjusting the modulation of the transmitter to a constant value across the operating frequency range A way to describe the organization of the RSS The Main menu is considered the trunk and the the functions listed on the screen are considered the branches Transmit The electronic tuning alignment information of a particular radio A particular personality in a radio unit which is chosen as the one whose trunking identity will always be used to address this unit In this manner a unit would respond to an individual call Private Call Call Alert Phone Interconnect etc regardless of the current personality chosen Scan type which is programmable through the front panel buttons on the radio A trunked repeater that is used to transmit and receive data and voice from the radios
196. eplug Requires RIB Get Codeplug Data from Archive Disk File Get TCMS Codeplug Update Disk File Clone Radio Save Codeplug Data to Archive Disk File Program Data into Radio Codeplug Requires RIB Radio Programming History Exit F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP READ GET MERGE CLONE SAVE PROGRAM VIEW EXIT RADIO ARCHIVE TCMS RADIO ARCHIVE RADIO HISTORY The GET SAVE functions are used to transfer codeplug data from your radio or an archive file into your computer in order for you to Change View or Print it GET SAVE functions also permit you to PROGRAM modified data back into your radio or to SAVE a copy of the codeplug data in an archive file CAUTION Do NOT turn off the radio or disconnect it from the computer while attempting to PROGRAM the codeplug Interrupting the programming process WILL destroy the codeplug contents and completely DISABLE the radio PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Select the desired function key F1 F10 The function key descriptions are on the following page 68P81074C50 5 1 GET SAVE PROGRAM MTSX RSS FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 READ RADIO function reads the information data stored in the radio codeplug EEPROM and transfers it to the computer s memory The time required to READ a codeplug will depend directly on yo
197. er receiving an MDC Remote Monitor Radio Trace command This Tx Base Time is multiplied by a second value that is sent from the dispatch console and transmitted to the radio via an MDC Remote Monitor Radio Trace command The range is from 10 to 120 seconds in 10 second increments Rx Base Time sec Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired MDC Tx Base Time The value may also be entered directly The MDC Rx Base Time is a value used to calculate the period that a radio will listen after keying up while it is in the Remote Monitor mode This Rx Base Time is multiplied by a second value that is sent from the dispatch console and transmitted to the radio via a Remote Monitor Radio Trace command The range is from 10 to 120 seconds in 10 second increments 68P81074C50 6 113 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 3 3 CALL LIST TABLE RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model CHANGE VIEW CONV MDC MDC CALL LIST CALL LIST TABLE Call ID Call Text Call ID Call Text 1 1234 HUGUES 11 6789 JAVIER 2 3245 WILKER 12 9876 TORBEN 3 4567 CECILIA 13 7654 JASON 4 7689 ALICIA 14 9086 TOM 5 3457 CASSANDE 15 2957 CORY 6 9087 IRENE 16 7654 MIRIAM 7 2987 GABRIELE 17 6785 BETTY 8 7865 GEUMER 18 45769 ARISTID 9 4565 FRANCIS 19 9879 BILL 10 4653 ARUN F2 F4 F5 ADD DELETE CALL ID CALL ID This screen is used to edit Conventional MDC Call ID s and
198. er s owner s manual for a complete description of path names and asynchronous communication ports F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at at time 2 36 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 13 1 Configuring Paths and Port RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press 51 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter Path MTSX Model MAIN CONFIGURATION PC CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT Archive Path C MRSS MTSX ARCHIVE FLASH Software Path C MRSS MTSX UPGRADE Bootstrap Code Path amp Filename C MRSS MTSX UPGRADE MTSXBOOT ENC SRIB Software Path amp Filename C MRSS MTSX SRIB SMARTRIB ENC System Key C MRSS MTSX SYSKEY TCMS Path C MRSS MTSX OFP F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP SAVE EXIT TEST This screen is used to set default disk drive paths for archive files and backup files It is also used to select which asynchronous communications port COM 1 or COM 2 the RIB radio interface box will be connected to Refer to your computer s owner s manual for a complete description of directory path names and asynchronous communications ports FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 COM TEST Communications Test is used to verify that your computer is set up properly and is able to READ and PROGRAM a radio codeplug properly After your computer and RIB are connected pe
199. ert tone beep and the display will indicate UNPROG Elec Stop Turning the Rotary control passed the first channel position in either direction will cause an alert tone None Turning the Rotary control causes no alert tone Secure Equipped Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable secure operation for radios equipped with the secure hardware option Setting this field to Yes allows access to the secure screens Caution The user must make sure that the secure hardware is installed in the radio when setting this field to Yes otherwise it will lead to improper operation of the radio Home Mode Selection This feature allows a radio operator to traverse to a dedicated zone channel by a short press of the Home button available in portable radios A long press of the Home Button will program the Home Mode to be set to the radio s currently selected zone channel Note If the user programmed Zone or Channel onto any of the buttons or switches pressing the Home key will override the hardware settings The radio will realign to the button or switch settings once the button or switch is toggled 6 6 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 1 1 RADIO WIDE SECURE OPTIONS F3 F2 F6 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press id MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model CONFIG RADIO OPTIONS SECURE OPTIONS RADIO WIDE SECURE OPTIONS Ignore Sec Clr Swit
200. ervice Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model TRANSMIT SIGNALLING MDC 1200 TRANSMIT SIGNALLING MDC 1200 Frequency Current Value 869 9875 21 New Softpot Value Transmitter Off S esM F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TOGGLE PROGRAM EXIT PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the MDC signalling deviation alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel MDC deviation should be checked any time the radio is serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has been replaced All radio compensation deviation adjustments must be made before adjusting MDC deviation MDC deviation is increased or decreased by first keying the radio via F6 and then by pressing the up down arrow keys respectively A relative deviation value is displayed but the actual transmitter deviation must be determined from your service monitor Set your modulation analyzer to read peak deviation PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F4 The SIGNALLING ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F4 The TRANSMIT SIGNALLING MDC 1200 screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value The function key descriptions and field definition are on the following page
201. es the Call Alert feature 2 Phone Used to answer or initiate a Phone Call 2 Private Call Enables the Private Call feature 2 Reprogram Request Enables the Reprogram Request feature which transmits a trunking reprogram request Scan Enables Disables Scan 2 Site Display Srch Displays the current Site or enables a Site search for AMSS or SmartZone operation 1 Site Lock Unlock Enables Disables Site automatic site changes for AMSS or SmartZone operation 1 Status Enables the Status feature 2 Unprogrammed No function A bad key chirp tone will sound Volume Set Tone Generates a tone for the duration of the press Zone Sys Change Zones Rotary Only NOTES 1 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Trunking System screen F4 F4 F3 2 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Trunking Personality screen F4 F4 F4 3 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Trunking System Option screen F4 F4 F3 F9 6 16 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 2 2 RADIO WIDE SWITCH CONFIGURATION RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model CONFIG FEATURES SWITCHES RADIO WIDE SWITCH CONFIGURATION Switch Labels Conventional Feature Trunking Feature Two Position Concentric Position A Blank Scan
202. ess F4 The TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen appears Press F7 The TRUNKING SUBFLEETS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD SUB FLT Add Subfleet allows you to add a Subfleet F5 DELETE SUB FLT Delete Subfleet allows you to delete a Subfleet F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 69 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 2 4 2 TRUNKING TALKGROUP 191 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll UP DOWN to Select ID MTSX Model in Hex MAIN CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS TLK GRP Personality TRUNKING TALKGROUPS Grp Failsoft F S Frequency Strapping 001 This screen is used to create the list of Talkgroups If the radio is a secure equipped radio then strapping fields will be visible and secure strapping can be set up for each field The personality usually has 16 positions the number of positions on the rotary switch indicated by the numbers 1 16 The Announcement Talkgroup is usually in the sixteenth position PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F4
203. ess F9 The RADIO WIDE DISPLAY MORE OPTIONS screen appears 5 Press UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FIELD DEFINITIONS Caller ID The Caller ID feature displays ID information of the last radio to initiate a call that the radio unmuted upon This information is automatically displayed Id Only The radio will display the ID of the radio which initiated the current call Alias Text The radio will attempt to match the Caller ID with a member of the current Call List and display a name instead of a number The factory default is Disabled 68P81074C50 6 37 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 2 TRUNKING MENU F4 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press E MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MENU CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING TRUNKING MENU F1 HELP F2 Trunking Radio Wide Options F3 Trunking Systems System ID Control Channels etc F4 Personality Talk Groups Emergency options etc Trunking Call List Data F10 EXIT Return to Change View Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 HELP TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK TRUNKID WIDEOPT SYS PERS LIST This menu allows you to navigate to the trunking edit screens The options in these screens pertain only to trunking radio features PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS
204. evel Receive Initial Delay msec 250 Digit Duration msec 150 Inter Digit Delay msec 100 Status Aliasing Enabled Channel Bandwidth 25 0 kHz Message Aliasing Enabled ISW Retry Disabled Site Aliasing Enabled F1 F2 F5 F6 F7 F9 HELP PREV NEXT ONE STATUS MSG SITE SYS SYS TOUCH ALIAS ALIAS ALIAS This screen has more options for this particular trunking system PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears 3 Press F3 The TRUNKING SYSTEM screen appears 4 Press F9 The TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS screen appears 5 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 6 Ifa field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTION F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 PREV SYS Previous System allows you to go to the system before the current one F4 NEXT SYS Next System allows you to go to the system after the current one F5 ONE TOUCH when enabled is used to change and view the Trunking System One Touch Features and the One Touch Indices assocated with the Features F
205. ference Tx VCO Crossover Frequency Secure Tx Deviation Exit Return to Service Menu F1 F2 4 5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP REF TX DEV DEV REF VCO SECURE EXIT OSC PWR BAL LIMIT ATTEN DEV Standard periodic alignment procedures are performed from this menu Refer to you radio service manual for alignment procedures These procedures should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Failure to perform alignment procedures properly may result in seriously degraded radio or system performance Signalling deviation for DTMF MDC Single Tone Secure and High Speed trunking data should be checked any time the radio is serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has been replaced Before adjusting signalling deviation radio compensation deviation adjustments must be made No adjustments are required for DPL PL or trunking connect tone deviation PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears 2 Press F2 The TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 REF OSC Reference Oscillator Alignment This is the working value of the reference oscillator reference frequency Refer to your radio service manual for the transmitter power alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service
206. ff 1S aisi F4 F6 F7 F5 Unmute Type cio ec iie cc oe ei cn dr een An ea F4 F6 F3 F7 Unmute Mute Type 4 6 9 Upgrades Purchased nce deed eise tu F8 F3 Upgrades Remaining tendit utter asd he toit aedi Eu a RETE aede Te eee d F8 F3 Upgrading Radio BIoCk ancient ree tpe e pce dei F8 F8 F8 V VOO CROSSOVER eee ette eid ded puede eee F2 F2 F7 VMGO GROSSOVER edades ree tete S Ret ot ete toti tices F2 F3 F7 VOC Activation Time MSEC sii nennen entente nennen nnne nensis F4 F4 F2 F3 VOG Gapabl6 cnm te e er tee Pu edite peu gh eats Pea iode Peu La feuda edd F4 F4 F2 F3 VOG OPTIONS eit etra te dt xr tia pO Du ber doe F4 F4 F2 F3 VOC Pended Emer Time senten eene trennen nnns nnns nennen snnt rennes F4 F4 F2 F3 VOG Site LOCK TIME E F4 F4 F2 F3 Variable ID o ate tdt tr ca credits CORRETTA REPRE EDI ns ext EM TR rg RR F3 F5 VENETA F3 F5 F3 Eo p pr F3 F5 F4 MEE F4 F6 F4 F3 WAG AMSS FAIESQOF T i ie cabe e Eae tite e dg ve EL Do c P eed ud Se Ee aan F4 F4 F4 F6 X XE IG Pres nta eere e e duae sa Vue nach Re ue Re aue F4 F3 F2 F6 XL Scan Unsquelch
207. field is also given The GLOSSARY defines terms and abbreviations used within this manual The INDEX provides a quick way of locating particular items NOTES CAUTIONS and WARNINGS are used throughout this manual The following definitions apply to the these statements NOTE An operating procedure or condition which is essential to highlight CAUTION An operating procedure or practice which if not strictly observed might result in damage or destruction of equipment WARNING AN OPERATING PROCEDURE OR PRACTICE WHICH MIGHT RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE IF NOT CORRECTLY FOLLOWED 68P81074C50 1 3 INTRODUCTION MTSX RSS NOTES 1 4 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED SECTION 2 GETTING STARTED AND INITIAL SETUP Introductions accomplished it s time to get started In the GETTING STARTED subsection we ll guide you through identifying installing and learning the necessary hardware and software to run the RSS which will be used to service and program a radio In the GETTING STARTED subsection we ll also familiarize you with the computer the keyboard and the RSS menus screens and fields The INITIAL SETUP subsection prepares you for SECTION 2 through SECTION 8 which describe how to service and program a radio and maintain your radio service files 2 1 ASSEMBLING THE HARDWARE The figure below shows t
208. field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTION F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Button 1 4 Features Use the up down arrow keys to select the feature that corresponds to this One Touch Button One Touch Buttons 1 through 4 may be selected as Trunking Buttons Side Button 1 Side Button 2 Side Button 3 and the Orange Button on the Radio Wide Button Screen F4 F3 F3 F2 Index Enter the value for the index into the list of the feature Phone Private Call Call Alert Status or Message assigned to the One Touch Button 6 60 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 3 2 TRUNKING STATUS ALIAS A2aae RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU pres MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model SYSTEM OPTIONS STATUS ALIAS TRUNKING STATUS ALIAS Num Status Alias Number Status Alias Text 1 1 STATUS 1 F1 F2 4 5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD DELETE EXIT ITEM ITEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F3 The TRUNKING SYSTEM screen appears Press F6 The TRUNKING STATUS ALIAS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10
209. file management tasks from within the radio service software package Such tasks as creating directories deleting files updating backup and restoring database files can be done without exiting the program 68P81074C50 8 1 FILE MAINTENANCE MTSX RSS PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F6 at the MAIN MENU The FILE MAINTENANCE MENU appears 2 Select the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 DEFINE PATH allows you to enter a new pathname F5 DELETE FILE allows you to delete a file from the path similar to DEL filename in DOS F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 8 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS FILE MAINTENANCE 8 2 1 CREATE DIRECTORY PATH RSS LOCATION At the FILE MAINTENANCE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter Path MTSX Model MAIN FILE MAINT CREATE CREATE DIRECTORY PATH New Path Name C MRSS MTSX tmp F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP DEFINE EXIT PATH This screen allows you to create a new directory on your computer disk drive This is similar to the mkdir OR MD command in DOS PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F6 at the MAIN MENU The FILE MAINTENANCE MENU appears 2 Press F2 The CREATE DIRECTORY PATH screen appears 3 Typein the new directory path name or press the desired function key F
210. for System 2 Type A Trunking System refers to a specific repeater site the system ID the individual radio ID for that System the control channel frequencies and the connect tone required to operate on that System Each system that the radio is programmed to operate on is linked to one or more trunking personalities The personality defines the features available for the radio while operating on that system Each radio is uniquely identified on each system by its individual ID PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F3 The TRUNKING SYSTEM screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value 6 48 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTION F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD SYSTEM allows you to add a system F3 PREV SYSTEM allows you to go to the system before the current one F4 NEXT SYSTEM allows you to go to the system after the current one F5 DELETE SYSTEM allows you to delete a system F6 CHAN ASSIGN or CONTROL CHANNEL MENU allows you to enter the control channels for the system F9 MORE OPTIONS makes available other options for the trunking system F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one scr
211. for this channel The ID will be displayed in hex Select ATG for an announcement group or DYN for a dynamic regrouping position or FLT for Fleetwide Valid talkgroups or subfleets for each personality must be defined on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen F4 F4 F4 F7 before they may be assigned on this screen The Dynamic Regrouping feature must be enabled on the TRUNKING SYSTEM screen F4 F4 F3 in order to be selected as a talkgroup Announcement group and Fleetwide must also be enabled on the Trunking Personality Screen F4 F4 F4 to function properly Strapping Read Only This field contains the transmit mode of the talkgroup or subfleet for trunked personality types If set to Clear or Secure the talkgroup or subfleet is forced to that particular transmit mode When set to Select the user is allowed to select the Secure or Clear transmit modes via the two position concentric switch 68P81074C50 6 133 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS NOTES 6 134 68P81074C50 SECTION 7 PRINT MENU FUNCTIONS 7 1 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION F5 RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN PRINT PRINT MENU HELP Radio Wide Buttons Switches Display Scan Trunking Systems Personalities Call Lists Options Conventional Systems Personalities MDC Options Zone Channel Assignment Radio Codeplug Data Summary EXIT Return to Main Menu F3 F4 F6 F8 F9 RADIO TRUNK C
212. ftware Enter or Scroll to Select MTSX Model Personality MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS OPTIONS Personality 1 CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS SMart PTT iint Inhibit On Carrier Quik Key Override Enabled Override Timer ms 500 Rx Enabled Tx Power Level High Tx Emphasis Enabled Busy LEDs aee ert Enabled Unmute Mute Standard Tx 5 0 KHz Rx Unmute Delay ms 1 0 Tx Deviation T A 5 0 KHz Reverse Burst TOC Enabled Channel Spacing 25 0 KHz Squelch Fine Tune 0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PREV NEXT RAC EXIT PERS PERS OPTIONS This screen permits access to additional features and options to further customize the radio configuration to your specific communication needs Caution should be observed when changing parameters on this screen System parameter changes can substantially degrade system performance if they are made on one or a few radios but not all radios system wide PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F3 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY scree
213. g Up MAIN MENU Assemble connect and power up the hardware and computer After the computer has successfully booted the prompt will be C 3 If you have not yet installed this latest RSS version make a backup RSS copy see Section 2 7 1 and install it on your hard disk see Section 2 7 4 Type MTSX Press Return Press any key at the BANNER screen see Figure 2 4 Section 2 7 7 The MAIN MENU appears 68P81074C50 3 1 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 2 PROGRAMMING A BASIC 16 CHANNEL MT2000 CONVENTIONAL RADIO In this tutorial we list the desired features address the major decisions involved and give step by step instructions for programming the 16 channel conventional portable radio 3 2 1 Desired Features Let s assume the following features are desired 16 Transmit Receive Frequencies Private Line Digital Private Line TPL DPL Codes Assign Scan to the concentric switch and create two scan lists Enable Telephone Operation for full keypad models only We will assume that factory defaults are suitable for most parameter values 3 2 2 Major Decisions Involved To program the desired features above the approach with the RSS will be Determine desired number of personalities channels desired Determine desired feature systems to use basic scan signalling Determine desired features to program radio wide all channels Determine desired features to program per personalities individual channels only ROD
214. gardless of the type of diskette drive that is available Handle the diskettes carefully avoid contact with the shiny brown magnetic disk surface under the protective plastic cover on the 5 1 4 diskette and the magnetic disk surface under the sliding metal plate on the 3 1 2 diskette Such contact could damage the data or make it unreadable by the drive 2 6 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED Diskette drives come in two sizes one to accommodate the 5 1 4 diskettes With the 5 1 4 diskette drives after a diskette is inserted as far as it will gently go you must close or push down the drive door located on the outside of the drive or else the computer will not read the data on the diskette This drive door generally swings down and locks into place when firmly pressed and it releases when gently pressed back the other direction when you want to remove your diskette Most diskette drives are labeled A or B A generally being the topmost or highest one The drives are labeled by the computer dealer before delivery to the customer Instructions steps tables and procedures that apply to computers with only diskette drives no hard disk drive will be displayed in a shaded box NOTE To learn more about computer basics read The Personal Computer Book by Peter McWilliams Prelude Press Los Angeles CA Call 1 800 LIFE 101 to order or secure further information 2 4 UNDERSTANDING THE DISK OPERATING SYSTEM DOS A co
215. gen F4 F4 F4 F9 EP 4 6 9 A to Sel Call Transit urit Dee remet Cn cea Le sunt F4 F6 F3 F7 B BACKGROUND wis cco ieee aie oh o Rr de an eee F9 F7 Backlight While in MIVA tiie ci uiae dre eet xn tona tide dee enit re ane dde F4 F3 F6 Baud Rate i EP F4 F6 F7 F5 Block Pending CAP Guninita iit eiie athens Le t edu eo es nee deve Le Du Eu Rc p ede Dae F4 F3 F2 Bootstrap Code Path amp FileName ssssssssssssssseseseeeeeen nennen enne nnns nnns F9 F3 Busy EE F4 F6 F3 F9 Busy Override Chirp F4 F4 F2 F2 Busy Override Delay Sec eee tuere cdi deen da dg cave Leo a E Eee aca a aufi o vaa F4 F4 F2 F2 B tton TE Gatun eae usen dumme ee etre Setup este tise sas F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Button 2 FO ature ster ce ined ne esae esed eti eae dea ee ea ei eee i eet F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Button S Features i e tta rore INEST P bape Ee Rude RUIN peint ef dena F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Button 4 Feature ise eet educa anaes eee andl eee Da F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 C BIST TABLE ce Rp Rede re ide c td qu orae See A e Dot RUN eR da ce vip du F4 F4 F5 68P81074C50 INDEX 1 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX CALL LIST TABLE uae e apt dag eo Pee Edd dg d ut cad e e cie Da F4 F6 F4 F4 eel PHp A VANNICMC F4 F3 F2 CCID Registration
216. ght MOTOROLA Inc 1994 1996 All rights reserved Figure 2 4 The Banner Screen 2 18 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 7 8 The Main Menu After pressing any key at the BANNER screen the MAIN MENU appears MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN MAIN MENU HELP SERVICE Alignment Requires RIB GET SAVE PROGRAM CLONE Codeplug Data From to Disk Radio CHANGE VIEW Radio Codeplug Data PRINT Radio Codeplug Data FILE Maintenance FLASHport Upgrade SETUP Computer Configuration EXIT Radio Service Software Return to DOS F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F8 F9 F10 HELP SERVICE GET CHANGE PRINT FILE FIASPPORT SETUP EXIT TO MENU SAVE VIEW MENU MAINT UPGRADE MENU DOS Figure 2 5 The Main Menu From here you can begin to program a radio but first we will explain how to move around within the menus and screens of the RSS with the keyboard keys The parts of the menu are described in the Anatomy of a Menu section 2 8 NAVIGATING THROUGH THE RSS MENUS You have successfully started the RSS and are ready to learn just what it is you see on the display how to move around how the RSS is organized how to change the feature choices and finally how to exit Now that the RSS MAIN MENU is on your display to proceed any further you may want to know about the keyboard keys and what they do Below is a picture of a typical computer keyboard EZ Figure 2 6 The Computer Keyboard 68P81074C
217. ght Time ms 15 Zone Text Size sss 12 Auto Lighi eene Enabled Emergency Receive Disabled Slow Scroll Rate ms 500 Display Enabled Fast Scroll Rate 250 Backlight While in MTVA Disabled Slow Scroll 3 Radio LOCK es suse ret Enabled Mandatory Password Disabled Max Password Length 8 Native Language English Passwords 1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP MORE EXIT OPTIONS This screen permits modifications of display options to customize the radio to specific user applications The features and options shown here apply to all systems and personalities PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F6 The RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 Press UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F9 MORE OPTIONS allows access to additional parameters that can be used to customize the radio to the
218. h mode The valid range of values are 1 to 255seconds The factory default is 60 seconds Emergency Limited Patience Time When the radio is in Emergency Call Mode this is the amount of time in seconds the radio will wait before impolitely sending voice if voice transmission is inhibited by the Emergency Priority Inhibit feature The valid range of values are 1 to 255seconds The factory default is 5 seconds 6 110 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW RAC Repeater Access Code Pretime ms This is the amount of pretime used before the first MDC Repeater Access Code RAC packet is transmitted Valid entries are 0 to 6350 ms in steps of 50 ms The factory default is 200 ms Ack Alert Tone If this field is enabled when a Repeater Access Code RAC packet is transmitted the repeater will indicate acceptance of the packet by causing the radio to sound 4 beeps The factory default is Disabled Preambles This is a view only field displaying the number of preambles before RAC packet is transmitted Sidetone If this field is enabled the radio will generate a sidetone upon Automatic Repeater Access Code transmission to warn the user not to talk until the transmission is complete The factory default is Enabled 68P81074C50 6 111 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 3 2 2 MDC SYSTEM REMOTE OPTIONS F6 F4 F9 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press E E Heli Hel 2 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System
219. hannels will be shifted down 12 5 KHz and the radio will interpret the channel numbers received over the air as splinter channels as well Channels in the 821 band will not be affected Factory default is Disabled Rx Modulation This field should be based off of the expected receive data format for the personality This field allows the user to configure the radio s personality for strictly binary 2 level receive operation strictly multi level 4 level receive operation or both binary and multi level receive operation Auto Receive When operating in Auto Receive mode the radio will automatically detect the received signal type and process the data accordingly As a side note however 2 level sensitivity is reduced when operating in the Auto Receive mode and thus should not be used on channels or systems that are strictly binary 2 level This field applies only to Secure radios Channel Bandwidth Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Channel BandWidth This value must be set to the Channel BandWidth of the system the radio is to operate on NOTE Strapping fields for Announcement Group Fleet ID Talkgroup etc will be forced to Clear if 12 5 kHz is selected The factory default is 25 0 kHz ISW Retry Timer Use the up down arrow keys to select the value for this field This field changes the interim spacing between ISW retries Spacing between retries is extended to accommodate System access delays Valid entries are Disabled 2
220. he Status will be display dependent This field contains the ASCII text for each of the Status Alias Text Fields The factory default will be either STS X or STATUS X where X is the Entry number The length depends on the display type of the radio 6 130 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 4 ZONE TALKGROUP CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT F8 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press i MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW ZONE CHAN Zone Number ZONE TALKGROUP CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Zone Name Personality Talkgroup Channel Number Channel Name Type Number Number Strapping 1 CHAN 1 Conv 1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE ADD DELETE EXIT ZONE ZONE ZONE ZONE CHAN A zone is an artificial grouping of channels or talkgroups to permit ease of operation Generally all members of a zone will reflect some common characteristic such as geographic location job function signalling type etc Each member of a zone is defined by selecting a conventional personality or a trunking personality and a talkgroup An optional name can also be assigned to each member of the zone Each zone can also be named on radios equipped with a display The number of characters allotted for the zone name versus the channel name is defined on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen F4 F3 F6 Zones and channels can be added and deleted via the functio
221. he desired function key F1 F10 7 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD ITEM allows you to add a trunking message alias item F5 DELETE ITEM allows you to delete a trunking message alias item F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Message Alias Number This field corresponds to status number that is transmitted over the air Message Alias Text This field contains the text that is displayed when the corresponding status number is selected 6 62 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 4 TRUNKING PERSONALITY RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MENU CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS Personality TRUNKING PERSONALITY Protocol Type Private Call Type System ID Operation Supervisor Pool ID Size Code Call Alert Operation List Only Fleet ID Phone Interconnect List Only Hot Keypad DTMF Disabled Individual ID Failsoft Type Call ID List This Call ID PC I Time Out Timer This Call ID PC 11 Scan List F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 PREV NEXT DELETE SUB EMER MORE PERS PERS PERS FLEETS OPTIONS OPTIONS TRUNKING PERSONALITY Screen for Protocol Type I MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrow
222. he features you want it is time to actually program them into the radio Programming the personality into the radio s codeplug must be done after creating or editing the personality of a radio or else the changes will be lost Make sure that the radio is connected to the RIB and that both the RIB and the radio are powered up before pressing F8 Table 3 10 Steps to Save Personality to Radio s Codeplug Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means 1 Goto GET SAVE menu Press Esc to back up to MAIN MENU Press F3 at the MAIN MENU to see the GET SAVE menu Pressing F8 at the GET SAVE menu advances you to the PROGRAM CODEPLUG screen where the current data stored in the computer s RAM what you can see on the RSS screens is programmed into the radio s codeplug 2 Goto Program Codeplug CAUTION When programming or tuning a radio DO NOT disconnect the radio from the RIB when the computer is communicating with the radio it may leave the radio in an inoperable state The only recommended time to disconnect the radio is at the MAIN MENU or GET SAVE screens 68P81074C50 3 11 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 2 13 Program the Personality Into Archive and Backup Files You have just saved the personality to the radio but it is important to save it on disk too Below are the steps to save the radio s personality to an archive file and a backup file Table 3 11 Steps to Save Radio Personality to Archive and Backup Files Instruct
223. he file names found in this directory You will see the file named XXXXXXXX XXX that you saved in the first tutorial Select desired file fras Press Tab until the selected file is highlighted Get selected file Press F8 to get the selected highlighted file Return to the GET SAVE Menu Press F10 to return to the GET SAVE menu Connect target radio Assemble the hardware and connect the radio you want cloned Save source into target radio Press F5 from GET SAVE to clone the current radio s codeplug with the selected source file s personality Clone the Radio Press F8 The cloning process will check for compatibility of the two radios automatically You will receive an error message if cloning cannot be performed If for any reason the radios cannot be cloned an error message will appear Check all connections or refer to Appendix A Disconnect radio When Step 8 is completed you can disconnect the radio In a matter of seconds the second radio was cloned Disconnecting the radio should only be done at the GET SAVE menu or the MAIN MENU or the radio may be left in an inoperable state 12 Proceed to Step 1 in next table for cloning additional radios 68P81074C50 3 27 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 47 Clone Additional Radios Table 3 25 Cloning Additional Radios Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means 1 Connect the next target radio Connect cable from RIB to the radio 2 Clone the radio
224. he required and optional equipment to program a radio The computer recommended is an IBM Personal System 2 model 30 or higher computer with 640K of RAM one diskette drive and one hard disk drive e Figure 2 1 Equipment Setup 68P81074C50 2 1 GETTING STARTED O or o 2 2 Computer An IBM Personal Computer XT or compatible may be used but we recommend as a minimum a 386 based computer is required to improve throughput a 80386 based computer or higher is preferred or IBM Personal System 2 model 30 or higher Computer should have 640k of RAM one diskette drive and one hard drive computer should run DOS 5 0 Radio Interface Box RIB to Computer Cable 30 80369B72 cable for IBM Personal Computer AT or compatible computer 9 pin end and a 15 pin end or 30 80369B71 cable for computers requiring a 25 pin serial port connection 25 pin end and a 15 pin end Smart Radio Interface Box SRIB to Computer Cable 30 80390B49 cable for IBM Personal Computer AT or compatible computer 9 pin end and a 15 pin end See Appendix A for connection details Radio Interface Box RIB RLN4008B RIB For laptop computer and on the road use only omit item D below and use a 9V battery not included Smart Radio Interface Box SRIB for FLASHport Only RLN1015A RIB required for FLASHport upgrade 8 CAUTION Use a fresh 9V battery LED remain
225. he zone name versus the channel name is defined on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen F4 F3 F6 The zone name will appear to the left of the channel name on the radio display For single zone radios the zone name is optional Channel Number Read only A channel number refers to the position in the list which a particular member occupies Depending on the radio model and configuration channel selection may be via the rotary switch the toggle switch or the keypad Channel Name Each channel may be assigned an alphanumeric name The number of characters allotted for the channel name versus the zone name is defined on the RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen F4 F3 F6 The channel name will appear to the right of the zone name on the radio display Personality Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select either a conventional or trunked personality for each zone member Both types may be assigned within a single zone Personalities must be defined before they can be assigned on this screen Trunking personalities are entered on the TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen F4 F4 F4 and conventional personalities are entered on the CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen F4 F6 F3 Personality Number Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the personality number for this channel The number may also be entered directly 6 132 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Talkgroup Number Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the trunking talkgroup or Subfleet ID
226. highlighted Press F2 Scan List members will be added after the Zone Channel screen has been completed Press F10 to return to Radio Wide Configuration Menu 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 2 8 Program the Phone List Table 3 6 provides the steps required to create the phone list for your radio Table 3 6 Steps to Program the Phone List Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to Phone Configuration Press F4 at the Radio Wide Configuration Menu to screen see the Phone Configuration screen Go to Phone Num Display Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next Format field field Select USA Press up down arrow key to select USA Go to Phone Number field Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Type in desired phone number Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next Go to Phone Text field Type in desired name Repeat steps 2 through 7 to add additional phone numbers and names Go to Change View Menu Press F10 twice to go to Change View Menu 3 2 9 Programming Conventional Personalties Table 3 7 on the following page provides the steps required to program conventional personalities into your radio 68P81074C50 3 7 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 1 Table 3 7 Steps to Program Conventional Personalties Instruction Go to Conventional menu Go to Conventional Personalty screen Add new personalities Return to Personality 1 Tab to Scan List Select appropriat
227. his information must match the Central Controller exactly or the system will not work PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F3 The TRUNKING SYSTEM screen appears Press F6 The CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT DATA screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value 68P81074C50 6 53 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Status Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable this frequency split KH2 Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Channel Spacing for this frequency range End Freq Start Freq must be evenly divisible by the channel spacing so the range can be divided into an integer value to assign the control channel number properly Start Enter the Frequency Range Start point directly in MHz The Start frequency must be less than the end frequency and they must be within the allowed frequency range of the radio Do not use the UP DOWN arrow keys Caution This information must match the Central Controller exactly or the system will not work End Enter the Frequency Range End point directly in MHz The End frequency must be larger than the start frequency and they must be within the allowed frequency range of the radio Do not use the UP DOWN arrow keys Caution This information must match the Central Control
228. ield Select the desired mode of phone operation Press up down arrow keys to select List Only Go to Scan List field Press Tab to advance to Scan List field Select Scan List 1 Go to Next Personality Press F4 to go to Next Personality Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each additional personality Exit to Change View Menu Press F10 twice to exit to Change View Menu 68P81074C50 3 21 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 3 13 Program the Zone Channel Features Next Now that the personalities are programmed we ll assign them to switch positions using the Zone Channel screen Table 3 20 Steps to Program Zone Channel Features Instruction Go to Zone Channel Assignment screen Add a Zone Go to Previous Zone Add desired number of channels Go to Personality Type field Select Trunk Go to Personality Number Enter desired Personality Number Go to Next Zone Repeat steps 4 through 9 for each Zone Exit to Change View Menu 3 22 What to Type fras Type desired number How to do it What it Means From the Change View menu press F8 to see the Zone Channel Assignment screen Press F2 to add a Zone Pressing F3 takes you back to Zone 1 Pressing F6 repeatedly will add additional channels Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the Personality Type field Press up down arrow keys to select Trunk Press Enter or Tab
229. ilies pne d rat Le aet etd eat Laka F4 F6 F3 F9 CHANGE VIEW MENU hen o ete tet eate t ose ee qut tetas teo eat erasa iaa e saat FREU da nuda F4 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT i snnt sens F4 F4 F3 F6 CONFIGURE PATHS AND PORT sse nennen nennen ninh nens tenni had nennen nnns nens F9 F3 GONT ROL CHANNELS hive stig adi nl F4 F4 F3 F6 CONTROL GHANNEES 5 ete eoi F4 F4 F3 F6 F6 CONV MESSAGE ALIAS cine lial eel Sal pude d ede de Da F4 F6 F8 CONV amp aa F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 CONV STATUS ALIAS LIST tee biel eel eed Lat i aa eee tle F4 F6 F9 GONVEN TIONAL eta e ee b Tete toned dashes dhe F4 F3 F5 F8 GONVENTIONAL MENU 12 re te rte Le teet vee dicen aetna F4 F6 CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY F4 F6 F3 CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTION ssssseeeeseeneneneee enne nnn en nnns nnne nnns F4 F6 F3 F9 CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY PHONE sess nnne nnns nnns nns F4 F6 F3 F8 CONVENTIONAL RADIO WIDE OPTIONS sss ener enne nnns nnns F4 F6 F2 CONVENTIONAL SECURE PERSONALITY sss F4 F6 F3 F6 CREATE DIRECTORY PATH eo ayia cae e die cise Davai tae e o eee Lo na F6 F2 Call Alert Decode i
230. ill sound as soon as you press PTT and will continue until the data packet s has been sent You must wait until the tone stops before you begin talking Trailing PTT ID Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable or disable the MDC UNIT IDENTIFICATION data packet transmission at the END of each transmission EOT If the trailing PTT ID feature is enabled each time you release the microphone PTT the radio automatically will send the radio s unit identification code to the dispatcher The PTT ID Sidetone will NOT sound for trailing PTT IDs Radio Check Enabling this option allows the dispatcher to check the state of the radio turned on or off as long as the radio is within the range of the system clear mode Radio Inhibit This field indicates whether or not the Radio Inhibit feature is enabled Enabling this field allows the radio to respond to a remote inhibit command Upon receipt of this command the radio transmits an acknowledgement to the dispatch equipment it then goes into a dormant state in which the receiver audio is muted the transmit audio path is blocked all operator controls are rendered inoperative channel scan is stopped on the Radio Operating mode which received the command and all LEDs are turned off The radio can be un inhibited via sending a radio enable command or by reading and writing the codeplug with the RSS Status This field indicates whether or not the Status feature is enabled The Status feature when enable
231. imum number of personalities allowed for this model Receive Only Use the up down arrow keys to enable Receive only operation on this personality If enabled all transmissions including signalling are inhibited The factory default for this field is Enabled Direct Talkaround Use the up down arrow keys to enable Talkaround operation on this personality In talkaround or direct mode the radio will transmit on the receive frequency This is useful when a repeater is not in operation or is out of range Talkaround may be used in a manual or automatic mode In the manual mode a talkaround switch must be defined on the Radio Wide Button Switch menu F4 F3 F3 The switch may be either on the top or side of the radio or on the keypad menu if applicable If manual talkaround operation is enabled and no switch is assigned the radio will default to talkaround operation on this personality The factory default for this field is Disabled Time Out Timer Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the TOT Time out Timer for this personality Each personality may choose one of four different TOT values The four values for the radio can be changed on the Radio Wide Options screen FA FS F2 F9 The TOT determines the amount of time the radio can continuously transmit before the radio must be dekeyed When the time is about up the radio beeps and then stops transmitting The factory default is 60 sec Scan List Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to selec
232. in the radio spectrum measured in MHz G 3 GLOSSARY MTSX RSS Get Group Handshaking Hard Disk Hardware Help Highlighting Home channel Home Revert HZ Increment Inverse Video MDC 1200 Menu Message Trunking MHz Mode MS DOS G 4 The means by which a radio s personality is transferred from a personality file to the workspace A collection of radios which communicate together Refers to the data interchange that takes place between radio and Central Controller via the control and voice channels such that each knows that the other is present on the channel and ready to exchange information or allow a voice conversation to proceed An alterable permanent data storage medium that has a much larger storage capacity than a diskette A physical collection of PC boards solid state devices and interconnect cabling that you can touch and see An on line reference manual accessed via the F1 function key Press the F1 function key at any time for additional information about the current menu or highlighted data field Displaying the text on the monitor by using dark letters on a light background The channel the user was on prior to pushing the scan button The channel the user will revert to when PTT is pressed while in scan unless scan talkback feature is enabled Defines the transmit channel requirement for a feature Typically refers to scan mode operation Hertz or cycles per second To inc
233. ing on your radio version and model number you will be able to choose from all or some of the functions listed below CALL Select Private Call ID 2 CHAN SUB Select Change Channels or Subfleets BLANK No Function No tone will sound MSG Select Message to be transmitted 2 MUTE Enable Disable the keypad beeps PAGE Select Call Alert ID 2 PHON Select DTMF Phone Number to be transmitted 2 PROG Change Phone Private Call Scan lists 2 PSWD Change Radio Lock Password 3 PWR Enable Disable Tx Low Power RPGM Enable Disable Reprogram Request SCAN Enable Disable Channel Scan 2 SITE Change AMSS or SmartZone Site 1 STS Select Status to be transmitted 2 VIEW View Phone Private Call Scan lists 2 ZONE SYS Select Change zones NOTES 1 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Trunking System screen F4 F4 F3 2 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Trunking Personality screen F4 F4 F4 3 For radio to function properly this feature must also be enabled on the Radio Wide Display Options screen F4 F3 F6 For PSWD to show on RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen RADIO LOCK must be enabled 4 The radio display shows 3 valid menu items per screen When programmed menu items are not applicable for a specific zone channel combination the menu items will be discarded WARNING THE RADIO DISPLAY MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST 1 VALID NON BLANK MENU ITEM Failure
234. io interface box RIB is required to perform this operation PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Press F8 The PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG screen appears TRUNKING RADIOS ONLY If you do not have the necessary System Key files and are programming a radio the serial number of the attached radio must be identical to the one in the serial number field on the RSS and PROGRAMMING HISTORY screen If the serial numbers are different programming will be aborted To program this radio you must first read this radio using the F2 READ function FIELD DEFINITION Programming Codeplug Blocks This is the number of blocks that have been programmed The status bar shows the relative value of the number of blocks programmed so far compared to the total number of blocks to be programmed 5 12 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GET SAVE PROGRAM 5 2 6 PROGRAMMING HISTORY F9 RSS LOCATION At the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU press LN MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Information Only These Fields Cannot be MTSX Model Changed MAIN GET SAVE PROG HISTORY PROGRAMMING HISTORY Model Software None Serial Number 466ASNO0331 Radio Software Version R 1 31 Radio Codeplug Version 0004 Programmed Date
235. ion What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to GET SAVE menu Press Esc to back up to MAIN MENU Press F3 at the MAIN MENU to see the GET SAVE menu SALE ARCIV EEE Press F7 at the GET SAVE to see SAVE ARCHIVE FILE screen This displays the archive disk drive and path name current model number current radio serial number If there is no customer ID it can be added at this time 2 You will be prompted to enter an archive file path Change the archive path name name if necessary Specify archive path name DESIRED PATH NAME Path is user definable Pressing F8 at the SAVE ARCHIVE FILE screen Save the file saves the data in an archive file specified above 3 12 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 3 PROGRAMMING A BASIC MTX8000 TRUNKED RADIO In this tutorial we list the desired features address the major decisions involved and give step by step instructions for programming a basic MTX8000 trunked portable radio 3 3 1 Desired Features Let s assume the following features are desired Two systems two subfleets talkgroups each Talkgroup scan with one list Telephone interconnect with a call list We will assume that the factory defaults are suitable for most parameter values 3 3 2 Major Decisions Involved To program the desired features above the approach with the RSS will be 1 Determine desired number of systems and subfleets desired and their configuration 2 Determine desired feature systems to
236. ion Cloning applies predominately to conventional only radios To clone trunked radios you are required to have a system key for each of the trunked systems programmed into the source radio on file Most organizations that program trunked radios will not have access to these keys The process for cloning conventional and trunked radios however is the same 3 4 1 Desired Features The desired features are the exact same ones listed in the first tutorial section 3 2 1 3 4 2 Major Decisions Involved The major steps for cloning in this tutorial are reduced from six steps in the first tutorial to two steps here To program the cloned radio the approach will be a Pick desired archive file b Decide how many radios to clone 3 4 8 Step by Step Specific Cloning Instructions In following section you will a Read into the RSS the specific archive file you want to clone b Actually clone that source file into the current target radio s codeplug d Clone the remaining radios the same way and then Exit the RSS 68P81074C50 3 25 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 4 4 Read Desired Source Archive File MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Press Enter to Select File Name MTSX Model HO1WCF4DBSAN Press F8 to Load Codeplug File MAIN GET SAVE PROG GET FILE Archive ARCHIVE FILES A466ASNO 331 A467ASNO 361 A469ASNO 431 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP CHANGE DELETE CHDIR CHDIR GET EXIT ARCHIVE SELECTED DOWN ARCHIVE 3 4 5 Clone Cu
237. irectly The system may also be selected ia the function keys The radio may have a maximum number of 7 systems Addressing Mode Use the Up Down arrows to select Normal or Extended The state of this field determines the range of valid ID s that the radio can use Specifies the GE STAR addressing mode for the Radio ID The Factory Default is Disabled Radio ID Use the Up Down arrows to scroll or directly enter the Radio ID This field specifies the ID of the radio in decimal For normal addressing mode the possible radio IDs range from 0 to 2047 and for the extended addressing mode the possible radio IDs range from 0 to 9999 This ID is used for both PTT ID and Emergency Alarm data transmissions The Factory Default is 0000 PTT ID Type Use the Up Down arrows to select Disabled Leading Trailing or Lead Trail It specifies the placement of the PTT ID data in a GE STAR transmission The PTT ID Data can e sent as follows 1 Immediately after a PTT press and before voice Leading 2 Immediately after a PTT release and after voice Trailing or 3 Both immediately after a PTT press and PTT release Lead Trail The Factory Default is Disabled PTT ID Sidetone Use the Up Down arrows to select Enabled or Disabled The PTT ID Sidetone specifies whether or not the radio generates a sidetone when sending Leading GE STAR PTT ID data The Factory Default is Enabled Pretime Duration ms Use the Up Down arrows to scroll or directly enter th
238. ired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 RADIO CONFIG Radio Configuration is used to change or view radio parameters and options that affect the overall radio operation such as the button settings or default volume setting Both conventional and trunking operations are included F4 TRUNK DATA Trunking Data Configuration is a multi level menu used to change or view trunking only personalities systems etc Most personality and system data must be changed via the TCMS trunking code management system and can only be viewed However all lists call scan phone may be changed For conventional only models this function key will not be valid F6 CONV DATA Conventional Data Configuration is used to change or view conventional only parameters such as personalities buttons and MDC signalling For trunked only models this function key will not be valid F8 ZONE CHN ASSIGN Zone Channel Assignment is used to assign a group of channels or talkgroups to a particular zone based on some common characteristic such as geographic location job function signalling type etc F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU F3 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press 11 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software
239. ired function key F1 F10 6 Press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD SYS Add System allows you to add a system F3 PREV SYS Previous System allows you to go to the system before this one F4 NEXT SYS Next System allows you to go to the system after this one F5 DELETE SYS Delete System allows you to delete a system F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 118 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS System To select the desired Singletone System use the Up Down arrows keys enter the system number or use the function keys F3 previous and F4 next The radio may have a maximum number of 16 systems Tone Pretime ms Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select or enter the desired value directly The Tone Pretime for Tone Signalling specifies the length of time that dead carrier is transmitted between the initiation of the Tone RAC transmission and the actual Tone RAC transmission The valid range is from 25 6375 milliseconds in 25 millisecond increments The factory default is 250 millisecond increments The factory default is 250 milliseconds Tone Duration Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select or enter the desired value directly Upon expiration of the Singletone Pretime period the Singletone shall be encoded o
240. is option is enabled the radio will always unmute even on noise when the monitor button is pressed Silent Radio will be carrier squelched in Monitor mode Latch Enable Tone The monitor button may be momentarily pressed or may be latched by pressing the monitor button for a short period of time Latch Enable Time This option causes the radio to give a short beep each time the permanent monitor function has been enabled Permanent monitor is cancelled by pressing the monitor button again Factory default is Disabled Latch Enable Time sec Values between 0 0 and 6 0 seconds may be selected in 0 5 second increments Select Disable 0 to turn off this option Smart PTT Retry Timer ms Values between 0 and 5000 ms may be selected in 25 ms increments When Smart PTT is enabled this field adjusts the period at which the radio will sample for a clear channel Factory default is 275 ms Smart PTT Quick Key Timer ms Values between 100 and 5000 ms may be selected in 100 ms increments When smart PTT is enabled a quick key double press of the PTT button can override the feature and cause the radio to transmit although the channel is busy The timer determines the maximum amount of time between PTT presses i e how fast the user must press the PTT button to override Factory default is 500 ms Hub Defeats PL When HUB Defeats PL is enabled PL DPL will be disabled when the microphone is removed from the hang up box This allows for mon
241. it hexadecimal number which identifies the trunked system A system key or FTR key is required to access this field Otherwise the TCMS download procedure must be used F3 F4 This number must match the ID of the Trunking Repeater System Alias Up down arrow keys will Enable Disable the System Alias feature When enabled the upper 8 bits of the System ID are ignored Factory default is Disabled Connect Tone The Connect Tone is a sub audible tone required on the voice channel to access the trunked repeater The function is similar to the conventional repeater access tone This field is not applicable to SmartZone systems 0 105 88 Hz 4 97 3 HZ 1 76 60 Hz 5 116 13 Hz 2 83 72 Hz 6 128 57 Hz 3 90 00 Hz 7 138 46 Hz Coverage Type A system key or FTR key is required to access this field Otherwise the TCMS download procedure must be used F3 F4 The choices for this field are WAC AMSS Wide Area Coverage Automatic Multiple Site Select Local AMSS Local Automatic Multiple Site Select Smart Zone New Motorola system for wide area roaming Disabled Disable wide area coverage In an AMSS system multiple sites are linked together to form a larger trunked system Radios programmed for Wide Area AMSS can use the site that they are within range of and when they move between sites the radio can Switch sites without interruption of communications that are in progress Up to eight control channels can be used for Wide A
242. itical failure a radio s internal software malfunction You can install start or explore the RSS using just the diskettes and your computer if you don t have all the hardware You can even update existing radio archive files stored on disk What you cannot do without the hardware is read from or save to an actual radio CAUTION When programming or calibrating a radio DO NOT disconnect the radio from the RIB when the computer is communicating with the radio it may leave the radio in an inoperable state The only recommended time to disconnect the radio is at the MAIN MENU or GET SAVE PROGRAM screens NOTE If you are using a laptop computer and you plan to use the RSS while the computer is in battery mode you may need to set the serial parallel adapter to run on battery power This can be done with the application diskette supplied by the computer manufacturer If this is not done you will receive serial bus errors NOTE If your RIB has a switch and LED be sure to turn on the switch before each programming session 68P81074C50 2 3 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 2 UNDERSTANDING COMPUTER BASICS If you are already familiar with computers skip this section and proceed to STARTING THE RSS section Your computer can be compared to both an electronics technician and a file cabinet A file cabinet provides easy handling storage and retrieval of written data Your computer provides the same The technician can with tools manual
243. itional phone numbers and names Go 19 Radio Wide Press F10 to go to Radio Wide Configuration Menu Configuration Menu 68P81074C50 3 19 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 3 11 Program Talkgroup Scan with One List Table 3 18 provides the steps required to program Talkgroup scan with one list Table 3 18 Steps to Program Talkgroup Scan with One List Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to Scan List screen Press F5 at the Radio Wide Configuration Menu to See Scan List screen If not already highlighted press Tab to advance the Go to Scan Type field o to Scan Typ prompt to Scan Type field Select Talkgroup Scan A ER Press up down arrow keys to select Talkgroup Scan EEEN PAGE oT MN Note This is necessary to allow the Scan List to be referenced by a trunked personality Exit to Change View Menu Press F10 twice to exit to Change View Menu 3 20 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 3 12 Modify Personalities for Scan and Phone Features Table 3 19 provides the steps required to modify the personalities for scan and phone features Table 3 19 Steps to Modify Personalities for Scan and Phone Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to Trunking Menu At the Change View Menu press F4 to see the Trunking Menu Go to Trunking Personality Press F4 to see Trunking Personality screen screen Go to Phone Interconnect field Press Tab to advance to the Phone Interconnect f
244. itoring of a conventional channel to prevent transmitting during another conversation Factory default is Disabled Note This feature is only applicable to portable radios when a Vehicular Adapter is used Direct Frequency Enabled If the Direct Frequency flag is Enabled the user can enter if the direct frequency in the conventional Personality Screen F4 F6 F3 and change it Direct Frequency flag is Disabled and the direct frequency will be copied from the conventional Rx frequency Last Number Redial When this feature is Enabled the last number that was dialed will appear on the display and transmit when PTT is pressed When this feature is Disabled the last number that was dialed will be cleared This feature is only available on MT2000 radios with R02 00 firmware or later R02 00 was initially shipped in October 1994 The factory default is Enabled 68P81074C50 6 85 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 2 CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY USING GE STAR SIGNALLING VENENUM A RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Type MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY Personality Receive Only Signalling Direct Talkaround GE STAR System Time Out Timer Scan List Hot Keypad Phone Operation Receive Transmit Direct Frequency MHz 851 06250 806 01250 851 06250 Squelch Type DPL DPL DPL Code 023 023 023 DPI Invert Enabled Enabled Enabled
245. ity Channel Priority Levels Priority Sample Rate Private Line Privacy Plus Program Program tree PTT PTT ID Queuing 68P81074C50 The location of a sub directory on a disk or diskette Paths start at the root directory of the disk or diskette and end at the directory containing the desired file Personal Computer A collection of parameter values such as frequencies and PL codes Often used interchangably with the terms mode or channel in the RSS manual A file that contains the data to be stored in a radio s EEPROM This file contains information such as receive frequency transmit frequency squelch code etc Private Line coded squelch A channel that has PL on the receive frequency will require both the presence of carrier as well as the correct PL code before it will unmute Also if you have PL on the transmit frequency all transmissions on that channel will be modulated at a sub audible level by the PL code Modulation is continuous A two digit alphanumeric code for specific sub audible tones A message area that overlays on a data entry display area used to indicate non data entry error or to verify destructive commands and to provide function key choices for next course of action A hardware interface that the computer uses to communicate with other devices May be parallel 4 8 or more bits presented to the interface at a time or serial 1 bit presented to the interface at a time A channel
246. l from this scan list Optionally the channel number may be entered directly Non Priority Members When enabled the user may modify the non priority channel members Designated Tx Mem This is the number of the scan member to be designated transmit channel during scan operation Enter the number of the scan member to have a fixed channel This may not be a receive only channel Select Selected Chan to transmit on the last user selected channel Select Talkback to transmit on the same channel that the radio stopped scanning on If the channel is a receive only channel the radio will give a warning that transmission is not possible Zn This is the number of the zone of the scan member Check the zone summary form for the zone channel information Chn This is the number of the channel of the scan member Check the zone summary form for the zone channel information If the field displays then an invalid channel condition exists 6 30 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 4 1 RADIO WIDE SCAN OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG SCAN OPTIONS SCAN OPTIONS RADIO WIDE CONVENTIONAL Nuisance Mode Delete Disabled Carrier Detect Required Disabled Priority Scan Alert Disabled Priority Chan Marking Disabled
247. lect choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time New Softpot Value Field Definition This is the secure transmit deviation softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 68P81074C50 4 13 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 1 8 CONTROLLER BOARD INITIALIZATION CBI RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN SERVICE CBI CONTROLLER BOARD INITIALIZATION Serial Number THHEABC Model Number LUXXXXXXXXXXXX FLASHcode XXXXX20000CX F8 F10 PROGRAM EXIT RADIO F1 HELP This screen can be accessed from the SERVICE MENU only when a CBl programmed radio is connected to the computer via the RIB If not the RSS will display an error message This screen allows you to transfer codeplug information from the computer to the radio codeplug Enter a valid serial number and press F8 to proceed Note A CBI radio and RIB must be properly connected to the computer and the power turned on before you press F8 Note If the radio connected to the RIB is NOT a CBl initialized radio and
248. led the Second Priority field is hidden The factory default is Enabled 68P81074C50 6 29 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Priority 1 Type This field selects the type of priority scan the radio will use Selected Chan The radio will use the last selected channel as the priority channel First priority and second priority may not both be the selected channel Fixed The radio uses a selected member of the scan list as the priority channel This member is not programmable from the radio OP SEL The radio uses a selected member of the scan list as the priority channel The user must select the member of the scan list to be used as the priority member Disabled No priority channel will be allowed Priority 2 Type This field selects the type of priority scan the radio will use Selected Chan The radio will use the last selected channel as the Priority Member First priority and second priority may not both be the selected channel Fixed The radio uses a selected member of the scan list as the priority channel This member is not programmable from the RSS and may not be modified from the radio i e Fixed OP SEL The radio uses a selected member of the scan list as the priority channel This member can be programmed by the RSS and may also be modified from the radio controls i e OPerator SELectable Disabled No priority channel will be allowed Priority 2 Member Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Second Priority channe
249. ler exactly or the system will not work 6 54 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 2 2 CONTROL CHANNEL s n een Fs RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model IRUNKING SYSTEM CONTROL CHANNEL CONTROL CHANNELS Number Frequency 1 851 0125 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 9 10 ADD PREV NEXT DELETE EXIT CHAN SYS SYS CHAN This screen allows you to change or view the control channels for this particular system PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F3 The TRUNKING SYSTEM screen appears Press F6 The CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT DATA screen appears Press F6 The CONTROL CHANNELS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD CHAN allows you to add a channel F3 PREVIOUS SYS allows you to go to the system before the current one 68P81074C50 6 55 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS F4 NEXT SYS allows you to go to the system after the current one F6 DELETE CHAN allows you to delete a channel F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen
250. lert DeGode Eeat pu ier eut ete ated e ss ccr intr e ed RR Rd lees F8 F2 F7 Stat Alert Decode Feat Hoa denke dace adu d dea eve ane F8 F3 F5 F9 Stat Alert Encode Feat etr dern ache een eae ER Lan eve sad ede adus bat Leva F8 F2 F7 Stat Alert Encode Feat dre tede t dcs lo e Hz tie las e HEP e Ld gta F8 F3 F5 F9 ICI ERE F4 F4 F3 F6 iru F4 F4 F3 F6 SICUTI F4 F4 F4 Ss E F4 F4 F4 F6 SICUT Cr F4 F6 F4 F3 Status Alias NumbOt acidic oed ee al e Dit ee pee P i aav dente dedo ae ieee ane F4 F4 F3 F9 F6 Status Alias N mbe dd th et ree Ere EP RM HE etienne uude Ead Atout ieee F4 F6 F9 Status Alias Text i ie e e tne antennal ial aan E cS a e diete inte F4 F4 F3 F9 F6 Stats ANAS TEXT RECS F4 F6 F9 ICIATIS F4 F4 F3 F9 Status ROGUES bc sucio DIR Bee ces det aa eve F4 F6 F4 F3 oM 1 EE F2 F3 F3 Stndby Chirp SeO emitter ae epe diee tee chat and eb F4 F3 F2 flee IEEE F4 F4 F4 Sus F4 F4 F4 F7 Strapping p E S F4 F4 F4 F8 DUBIN SCE ested sh E F4 F4 F4 F7 Supervisor Pool EE F4 F4 F4 SWITCH Eab6els et n etre e e PR e RU ans it pt Oe te a iban F4 F3 F3 F3 E F3 F5 SS A debes th TER ecg eta dedu aede steam cease F3 F5 F3 SYS ido dads ade eue dedu daB v ee actu aegre ied doa euet hu tke a aa do eg dod epe kd F3 F5 F4 SUERTE F4 F4 F3 SIM TM PD F4 F4 F3 F6 SV
251. lert Decode Enabling Call Alert Decode allows the user to receive pages from the base station as well as from other radios The factory default is Disabled Call Alert Encode Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable disable Call Alert Encode Enabling Call Alert Encode makes it possible for the radio user to send pages to other radios The factory default is Disabled NOTE If this feature is enabled and selection of target radio s ID s via Call list is to be made available to the user data must be programmed into the appropriate Call List Table Selective Call Decode Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the MDC Selective Call Decode for this personality Selective Call allows the user to receive individual and group calls It is intended not so much to ensure privacy but to eliminate the annoyance of users receiving traffic that does not pertain to them The factory default is Disabled Unmute Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the muting type AND or OR AND Muting Radio must receive both the Selective Call code or Quik Call II tones and the proper code PL DPL and or secure before it will unmute OR Muting Radio will unmute on proper code PL DPL and or secure or on carrier after the Selective Call code or Quik Call Il tone is decoded The factory default is OR Selective Call Encode Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable disable Selective Call Encode for this personality Selective Call Encode when enabled allow
252. ll program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Std Audio Field Definition This is the rated volume softpot value for this frequency The status bar shows the relationship between this setting and the minimum and maximum settings 68P81074C50 4 19 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 2 3 SQUELCH ATTENUATOR 12 5KHZ ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model SQUELCH 12 5KHz SQUELCH 12 5KHz Current Frequency Value New Softpot Value 450 02500 465 22500 475 22500 484 97500 500 27500 511 97500 S ee 98 es ea F8 PROGRAM VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the squelch alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel The squelch attenuator setting is increased or decreased by pressing the up down arrow keys respectively A relative value between 0 and 63 will be displayed on the screen Adjust the squelch setting to the desired value This screen allows you to adjust the squelch level for each test mode frequency Use the up down arrows to change the value of the squelch Use the Tab key to move between frequency points PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F3 The RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F4 The SQUELCH 12 5K
253. low Scroll Count This is the number of menus to be scrolled before the radio switches to the Fast Scroll Rate Valid entries are 0 to 255 Factory default is 3 menus Native Language Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the value for this field This field allows the radio to produce displays in several different languages Valid entries are English Spanish French German Italian and Portuguese This field can be used only by MTS models The default value is English Alt Display Time ms This is the time an Alternate message will be displayed Valid entries are 250 to 6250 ms in 250 ms increments Factory default is 1 second 1000 ms Temp Msg Display Time ms This is the time a Temporary message will be displayed Valid entries are 250 to 6250 ms in 250 ms increments Factory default is 1 second 1000 ms Display Light Time sec This is the time the Display light will illuminate the display This time is given in seconds Valid entries are 1 to 255 in 1 second increments Factory default is 15 seconds 68P81074C50 6 35 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Auto Light When enabled this option causes the display to light each time a button or key is pressed except for PTT The light will time out per the Display Light Time just as if the light button had been pressed Factory default is Disabled Emergency Receive If Enabled the radio display will alternate between EMER RECEIVED and the current channel when it unmutes on an emerg
254. lows you to delete a file from the path similar to DEL filename in DOS F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITION FileName This is the DOS name of the file which you may want to delete Refer to your computer s owner s manual for a complete description of file names 8 4 68P81074C50 SECTION 9 FLASHPORT UPGRADE 9 1 INTRODUCTION TO FLASHport FLASHport is a revolutionary new method of upgrading the software in a subscriber radio This involves enabling new features downloading or FLASHing new software into the radio This section is a brief preview of FLASHport capabilities A detailed procedure is obtained through the FLASHport Users Manual 68P81077C65 that accompanies the software upgrade kit 9 2 FLASHING PROCEDURE Flashing or upgrading your radio requires the standard radio service software RSS which is used during normal radio programming and servicing procedures Refer to the Getting Started section for your radio s specific RSS part number The following is a brief description of the FLASHport Upgrade Menu NOTE The following RSS screens are shown as an example your screens may vary slightly The FLASHport path and key titles HELP EXIT FLASH RADIO etc may be the same for portable and mobile radios but the function keys may be different RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press 1731 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX M
255. ly and physically alter the radio s features and functionality Similarly the computer provides the same with the RSS a radio dealer or employee can give a radio unique features save those features for future reference copy or service a radio internally This can all be achieved without opening a drawer thumbing through papers picking up a tool or disassembling the radio Let s learn some of the types of computers used for programming radios the major parts of a computer and the ways and places to store your desired radio personality data The RSS is designed to run on the following IBM computers and their compatibles IBM Personal Computer AT and IBM Personal System 2 model 30 and higher The RSS is not a Windows or OS 2 program You must not have Windows or OS 2 loaded or the RSS program will not operate correctly 2 4 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 2 1 Identifying Major Computer Parts Computers range in complexity and size from ones that easily and lightly fit on your lap to ones the size of a car that require air conditioned smoke and dust free environments Falling between this range is the microcomputer which is common in many households and businesses today Whatever their size most microcomputers hereafter referred to as computers consist of a monitor a system unit and a keyboard 2 2 1 1 Monitor Monitors perform like a window into the computer allowing us to see on a display the data inside the computer
256. mber and Message Alias Text PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears 3 Press F8 The CONVENTIONAL MESSAGE ALIAS LIST appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD MESSAGE allows you to add a Message to the List F5 DELETE MESSAGE allows you to delete a Message from the List 68P81074C50 6 127 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Message Alias Number The Message Alias Number will match the message entry number in most cases However if the first entry in the list should cause the fourth message to be sent then 4 should be assigned to the Message Alias Number of entry 1 The factory default for the Message Alias Number matches the message entry number Message Alias Text Enter the text The size of the Message will be display dependent This field contains the ASCII text for each of the Message Alias Text Fields The factory default will be either MSG X or MESSAGE X where X is the Entry number The length depends on the display type of the radio 6 128 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 4 6 CONVENTIONAL STATUS ALIAS LIST RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROL
257. mmed for that channel Factory default is Disabled Priority Chan Marking When this option is enabled and the radio is in Priority Scan Mode the radio checks the channel for activity and proper PL If the channel has carrier but the wrong PL or no PL the channel is marked so the radio will not recheck for the proper PL The radio will not unmute on this channel until the carrier is dropped This is done to prevent the PL decode time from being added to the audio hole time when the radio is unmuted on a non priority channel and is sampling the priority channel Care should be exercised in using this feature it is possible for messages to be missed especially if long repeater hangtimes are used Factory default is Disabled Monitor Hold Time sec Scan monitor hold time is the time the radio remains on a conventional channel during scan after the monitor button has been released Valid entries are 0 to 255 seconds in 1 second increments Factory default is 6 seconds Voting Scan Conventional Voting Scan is used to select the best repeater to use in a multi frequency simulcast conventional system Enabling this field will cause all conventional personalities using a conventional scan list with Auto Scan enabled Main gt F4 gt F6 gt F3 gt F9 to perform conventional voting scan Before using Conventional Voting Scan you must first create a conventional scan list which contains all repeaters in the Conventional Voting Scan wide area network
258. mory Used by the radio to store its alterable personality data A synonym for the carriage return key Any condition that prevents the software from functioning properly or any input response that deviates from what the software was designed to accept The escape key pressing this key returns you to the main menu To leave the current screen and return to the previous screen The RSS uses the F10 function key for all exit operations In the event the Central Controller should fail the radios in the system will enter a conventional preassigned failsoft channel Each trunked repeater in the system will key and transmit a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into the failsoft mode and communication will act as a conventional radio repeater The changeable area located next to a feature on the screen The current selected field is always highlighted via inverse video A collection of information typically stored by the computer on a magnetic medium A grouping structure used in Type I trunking A fleet is a group of radio users with a common functional responsibility who under normal circumstances coordinate actions among themselves In the process of identifying who needs to talk to whom and how individual radio users should be grouped The fleet map also addresses expansion needs how many radios may be added to the system A disk drive that uses removable magnetic disks The location of the center of a channel
259. moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 6 112 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS MDC System This is the number of the MDC system Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to change the system or directly enter the number of the system Remote Mon Radio Trace Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable disable the MDC Remote Monitor Radio Trace feature When the MDC Remote Monitor Radio Trace feature is enabled the radio will be able to decode an MDC Remote Monitor or Radio Trace command sent from the dispatch console After decoding this command the radio will key up its transmitter for a time period calculated using the Tx Base Time and another value embedded within the Remote Monitor Radio Trace command The factory default is Disabled Remote Radio Mode Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the MDC Decode Operation The MDC Decode Operation allows the radio to operate in one of two possible states when it decodes an MDC Remote Monitor Radio Trace command Radio Trace The radio will automatically key up sending unmodulated carrier Remote Monitor The radio will automatically key up and unmute the microphone sending voice on the channel Tx Base Time sec Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired MDC Tx Base Time The value may also be entered directly The MDC Tx Base Time is a value used to calculate the period that a radio will key up aft
260. mputer user operates communicates with and commands the computer using the computer s Disk Operating System DOS The DOS commands have special meanings to the computer e Before you can use DOS commands they must be installed on your hard disk MS DOS version 5 0 or later is required to run the RSS DOS commands can be entered either in upper case or lower case letters This manual shows shows all DOS commands in upper case letters e Next is a table of DOS commands that you may use now or in the future for RSS work Words in italics mean you should substitute that word for the word that is appropriate for your specific situation 68P81074C50 2 7 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS Table 2 3 Some DOS Commands DOS Command What it means Go to drive A Go to drive B Go to drive C Return to the Root Directory CHDIR is the same as CD CD DIRNAME Change directory to the directory named dirname Maximum directory length is 8 characters cd used alone will display the current working path name COPY B A Makes an identical copy of all files The means all files within the directory specified You can also copy files in the same directory giving the file a different name as the second argument to copy command and you can combine several files into one file or append files In all cases the first argument is the source file the one to copy from and the last argument is the target file the one to copy to
261. n appears Press F9 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 PREV PERS Previous Personality allows you to go to the personality before the current one F4 NEXT PERS Next Personality allows you to go to the personality after the current one 68P81074C50 6 97 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS F7 RAC OPTIONS Repeater Access Options Allows access to personality specific RAC related information F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Personality Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired conventional personality The number may also be entered directly or selected via the function keys Refer to the radio catalog sheet for the maximum number of personalities allowed for this model Smart PTT Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the Smart PTT function The radio can either inhibit on carrier or if enabled the radio will not transmit on a busy channel This feature prevents the user from listening to conversations or transmitting over conversations that they are not part of The Monitor button is Disabled when this feature is active The factory default for this
262. n keys designated at the bottom of the screen Zone selection may be via the rotary switch the toggle switch or the keypad if applicable PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F8 The ZONE TALKGROUP CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen appears 3 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 4 Ifa field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value Function key descriptions and field definitions are on the following page 68P81074C50 6 131 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD ZONE allows you to add a zone F3 PREV ZONE allows you to go to the zone before the current one F4 NEXT ZONE allows you to go to the zone after the current one F5 DELETE ZONE allows you to delete a zone F6 ADD CHAN Add Channel allows you to add a channel F7 DELETE CHAN Delete Channel allows you to delete a channel F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Zone Number Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired zone The number may also be entered directly Zones may be added or deleted with the function keys designated at the bottom of the screen Zone Name Each zone may be assigned an alphanumeric name The number of characters allotted for t
263. nactive while operating in failsoft for this specified time in seconds the radio will momentarily leave failsoft and attempt to find a control channel A value of zero here indicates that the radio will not leave failsoft The valid range is 0 to 255 in 1 second increments Factory default is 120 Busy Override Delay sec This field specifies the time interval in seconds during which the user must depress the PTT button in order for the radio to issue a busy override signal The valid range is 2 to 6 in 1 second increments Factory default is 4 Aff affiliating Hold Off sec This field is the time in seconds that the radio should delay before affiliating at a new site when leaving a site which just incurred a failure The valid values are 1 3 7 15 31 63 127 and 255 in 1 seconds Factory default is 63 Busy Override Chirp Ack Setting this bit causes the radio to produce a chirping sound after a busy override has been issued Factory default is On Display Site Trunking Setting this bit causes the radio to display the Site Trunking message when the user is locked onto a site that is in site trunking mode Factory default is On Full Spectrum CC Scan Setting this bit causes the radio to perform a full spectrum Control Channel scan when the radio goes out of range of all its programmed Control Channel information Full spectrum scan searches the entire frequency band 800 MHz 900 MHz band 1 UHF band or VHF for a
264. nality selects a scan list by choosing the scan list number Only certain types of lists are allowed for a personality for example a conventional personality cannot choose a trunking II list NOTE Make sure the zone summary is complete and the personalities are created before attempting to create a scan list MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Type MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG SCAN Scan List SCAN LIST Scan Type Mem Channel Trunking System ID 1 Trunking System Type Priority 1 Type Priority 1 Member Priority 2 Type Priority 2 Member Non Priority Members Designated Tx Mem F3 F4 F6 F8 PREV NEXT DELETE SCAN LIST LIST MEMBER OPTIONS Scan List Screen with SMARTNET features If the SMARTNET Type feature has been purchased then this type may contain trunking personalities from the same Type system Up to 10 members 6 28 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears 3 Press F5 The SCAN LIST screen appears 4 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD LIST allows you to add a scan list F3 PREV LIST Previous List allows you to return to the previous scan list F4 NEXT
265. nd date the radio was last programmed Format is YYMMDDHHMM Y year M month D day H hour M minute Time is in military format 1 30 PM 1330 Program Source This field describes the source of the most recent internal codeplug programming RSS Programmed by a standard field RSS Factory Programmed in the factory Lab Programmed using a special development RSS FTR Key Programmed using a FTR Field Technical Representative hardware key 5 14 68P81074C50 SECTION 6 CHANGE VIEW MENU FUNCTIONS 6 1 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION This section describes all the functions available from the CHANGE VIEW MENU To guide you through these functions the following CHANGE VIEW related menus and screens are shown with their specific RSS location programming procedures from the MAIN MENU function key descriptions and field definitions NOTE All functions supported and unsupported will be displayed in the menu s working area The unsupported functions based on the radio s model or options will NOT be displayed in the F key ID area 6 2 CHANGE VIEW MENU FA RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press T MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CHANGE VIEW MENU HELP Radio Wide Buttons Switches Display Scan Phone Trunking Systems Personalities Call Lists Options Conventional Systems Personalities MDC Options Zone Channel Assignment EXIT Return to Main Menu F3 F
266. ned per system Dynamic Regrouping allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios operating in separate fleets and or talkgroups into a single group Factory default is Disabled Zone This is the zone position used when a radio is dynamically regrouped This is used in conjunction with the channel position to determine which zone channel Talkgroup will be used during Dynamic Regrouping Chan This is the channel position used when a radio is dynamically regrouped This is used in conjunction with the zone position to determine which zone channel talkgroup will be used during Dynamic Regrouping Universal ID Type Only When trunking type is selected a Universal ID is used all individual calls Phone Private Call and Call Alert will be received if they are addressed to the Universal ID even though the operator might have another personality in that system selected This simplifies individual communications with the radio Also the radio will initiate all Private and Phone Calls with the Universal ID Therefore only one ID per radio must be enabled at the Central Site Controller The radio will also respond to Dynamic Regrouping commands to the Universal ID making it easier for a regrouping console to regroup a radio Factory default is Disabled Individual ID Enter the three digit ID for this system Type Only Examples are 001 02A 1FF 200 An actual ID must be entered not a personality number Use the up down arrow
267. nels which do not have Quik Call II enabled nor can they be receive only 68P81074C50 6 107 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 3 2 MORE EMERGENCY OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model CONV MDC SYSTEMS MORE EMER OPT MDC System MORE EMERGENCY OPTIONS MDC Hot Mic Emergency MDC Hot Mic Tx Period sec This screen allows you to configure more MDC Emergency Options in addition to the ones located on the MDC SYSTEMS and MDC SYSTEM OPTIONS Screens PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F4 The MDC CONFIGURATION MENU screen appears Press F7 The MORE EMERGENCY OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 2 3 4 Press The MDC SYSTEM screen appears 5 6 7 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FIELD DEFINITION MDC Hot Mic Emergency This feature when enabled will activate the MDC Emergency Hot Mic Operation also known as MDC Emergency with Voice to Follow After one impolite transmission of emergency alarm the radio will automatically drop into Emergency Call mode and begin transmitting with the microphone unmuted for the time specified by the MDC Hot Mic Tx Period The factory default is Disabled This featur
268. nets moisture heat and possible damage 68P81074C50 2 15 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 7 2 What To Do with Previous Versions of RSS Diskettes After you have created a backup copy of the new RSS diskettes you may wonder what to do with the previous RSS versions you may have accumulated We recommend discarding the older versions so that you do not accidently program the radio with outdated data 2 7 3 Starting the RSS From the Hard Disk A hard disk drive installation program is on the RSS diskettes After installing the RSS on your hard disk follow the startup procedure 2 7 4 Installing the RSS on Your Hard Disk Install the latest RSS version as soon as you receive it Using the install program on the diskettes you received with this manual assures that you have the latest and greatest version of the RSS It also keeps important files in a consistent place for cross referencing and future use The software installation takes approximately three minutes The install program will Create the MRSS MTSX and ARCHIVE directories if they are not already there Write over the old version s program files with the same name if present The install program will not Write over your archive files Before doing the installation steps that follow be sure you have made a backup copy of the RSS explained in the Making a Backup Copy of RSS Diskette s section and Table 2 7 Steps to Backup the RSS Diskette s The steps below in
269. niquely identifies your radio on a particular system or Personality for Type 1 A system key or FTR key is required to access this field Otherwise the TCMS download procedure must be used F3 F4 Type II Ili Only Valid IDs will be between 1 and FFFF The decimal equivalent of the Individual ID is used for your radio s Private Conversation Call ID 7 ID interconnect land to portable unit calls 7 ID and interconnect land to portable talkgroup calls 7 ID Type Il systems have a single Individual ID per radio independent of the number of talkgroups user groups or personalities that radio has on that system Type systems have a unique ID for each personality Access Type Use the up down arrow keys to select the Trunking Access type Slow The original trunking signaling protocol with acknowledgments high speed for all channel grants Rx Slow Tx Slow Fast An enhancement to the original protocol that eliminated the channel grant acknowledgments thus improving the channel access time Rx Fast Tx Fast This information must be coordinated with your system manager to insure proper operation of the system Conversation Type Use the up down arrow keys to select the Trunking Conversation type either Message or Transmission Message Trunked Systems After the initiator dekeys the radio the voice channel stays active hangtime so other members of the talkgroup can respond on the same channel If a radio in the
270. nlimited and List operation Factory default is 1 list per trunking system Scan List IMPORTANT NOTE Refer to the Radio Wide Menu screen F4 F3 F5 The radio controls may require additional setup for your Scan configuration on the Radio Wide Button Switch Menu screen F4 FS F3 To change or view the scan list select the Scan Menu F4 F3 F5 Trunking personalities may use Subfleet Priority Monitor and Talkgroup type scan lists Factory default is None 6 68 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 4 1 TRUNKING SUBFLEETS F4 F4 F7 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press 2 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll UP DOWN to Select ID MTSX Model in Hex CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS SUBFLEET Personality TRUNKING SUBFLEETS Subfleet Failsoft F S Frequency 001 This screen is used to enter the Subfleets that will use each personality Once the subfleets are entered they are assigned to the Zone System or Channel Subfleet selector at the Zone Summary screen F4 F8 If the radio is a secure equipped radio then strapping fields will be visible and secure strapping can be set up for each field The personality may have up to 16 talkgroups the number of positions on the rotary switch indicated by the numbers 1 16 including an Announcement and or a Dynamic Regrouping talkgroup PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Pr
271. nne 4 21 4 2 2 7 Secure Receive Discriminator Level essesssssseeseseeeeeneeeneen nennen nnne nnne 4 22 4 2 3 Signalling Alignment Mehl serea iinei edd tec ee dud 4 23 4 2 3 1 Transmit Deviation e lel eee 4 24 4 2 3 2 Transmit Signalling High 4 26 4 2 3 3 Transmit Signalling MDC 1200 treten nennen e innen enn 4 27 SECTION 5 GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU FUNCTIONS 5 1 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION oni ecrire re cete te de e E Poe dene 5 1 52 GEI SAVE PROGRAM MENU 1 MSN ERREUR RE ORUM MERERI RM ER 5 1 5 231 Reading Godepl g Data ranner eerta Debe a dee tete o m ce edet e trie Seo E tedio de 5 3 5 2 1 1 Reading Codeplug Data From the Radio ssssssssesseeeeeeeenenennneen eren 5 3 5 2 1 2 Reading Codeplug Data From an Archive File essssseeeeneeeenneneee nennen 5 4 5 2 2 Get TCMS Ccodeplug update disk file nennen nennen nnne nennen 5 6 6 2 2 Radio Cloning ostende atc iet tae dtd dedi a colto PA ca oe e cd es ee roh e eee 5 7 5 2 4 Saving Codeplug data to an archive file essen nennen nennen nnne nnne 5 10 5 2 5 Programming the
272. nnener enne nnneren nnns nnrnnr inns inns enne nnns n nens F4 F3 F3 F3 RATED AUDIO cor ANd A tee e pe duet a el F2 F3 F3 READ RADIO CODEPLUG eura de ute Dade ne Aiea F3 F2 RECEIVER ALIGNMENT F2 F3 REFERENCE OSC IEEATOR S eer ett e ite tetto era LY adie F2 F2 F2 imum mm F4 F4 F2 ce EE F9 F3 RM Base Tite IE F4 F4 F3 RSSI Acceptable Threshold ssessssssssssssssssseseeeee ener enint nr entres nens enne F4 F4 F2 F2 RSSI Acceptable Threshold dade dee ued de e eed i F4 F4 F2 F3 RSSI Excellent Threshold essen enne nnnm nnns nnn rennes F4 F4 F2 F2 RSSI Good Threshold once welt s ed a dec Eu te dO Doa te de F4 F4 F2 F2 RSSI OSW GOUnt6er ac ed rettet stet breed ate ren aed F4 F4 F2 F2 gtieimeloq c F4 F6 F4 F3 gtieomeinsmp c r F4 F3 F2 Radio Codeplug Versi 9 FRAG DEP F4 F6 F7 F5 Radio Inhibits 212 Em F4 F6 F4 F3 Radio F4 F3 F6 Radio Software Version a ait lee iuge fen ave ed Xe re RE De Fate dede aeu ladies F3 F9 nnns nnne 2 unen Em F4 F6 F3 Remote MOMON 2 neti F4 F4 F3 Repeater A
273. ns 6 18 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 2 3 RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGURATION RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONFIG FEATURES MENUS RADIO WIDE MENU ITEM CONFIGURATION HE Trunk Item Trunk ltem Conv Item Conv Item ZONE SYS DIR MUTE ZONE SYS 9 MUTE MUTE CALL STS MSG RPGM PROG VIEW F1 F2 4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD DELETE DELETE EXIT CNV ITM CNV ITM TRK ITM TRK ITM This screen allows you to edit the radio wide menu list Radio models with front display utilize a Menu to simplify the operation of the radio This screen is used to customize the radio for the required feature set The radio will automatically use either the Conventional or Trunking menu functions as required If a personality does not use a specific feature the radio will not display that menu item for that personality The menu items are displayed in the order in which they are placed in the list Therefore the first three items will always be shown when the menu is entered assuming that personality uses those items Use F2 to add and F4 to delete conventional items Use F7 to add and F9 to delete trunking items WARNING Do NOT duplicate a function on multiple controls i e a button and a switch or a button and a menu or a switch and a menu This may cause
274. nt Unmute OR Mute The radio unmutes only when there is a valid PL or DPL signal AND there is a carrier strong enough to break squelch The radio mutes when the PL or DPL signal is no longer present OR the squelch closes weak carrier The factory default is Standard Rx Unmute Delay Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select a Receive Unmute Delay for this personality Eight choices between zero and 1000 msec are available The Rx Unmute Delay is the amount of time the radio waits to unmute after squelch has been detected The factory default is 0 msec Reverse Burst TOC Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the Reverse Burst PL or turn off code DPL to be transmitted after the radio is dekeyed The Reverse Burst or turn off code is used to signal the receiving radio that the transmission is ending and to mute the audio By muting before the carrier drops the noise burst squelch tail on the receiving end is substantially reduced The factory default for this option is Enabled Squelch Fine Tune Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to adjust the Squelch Fine Tuning This value is combined with the master squelch setting to determine the overall squelch for this personality This feature can be used to tighten the squelch on frequencies that are experiencing interference while maintaining maximum sensitivity on all other frequencies The factory default is 0 Auto Scan Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the Autoscan o
275. nto the carrier for the duration of the value specified in this field The valid range is from 25 6375 milliseconds in 25 millisecond increments The factory default is 500 milliseconds PTT Sidetone Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to Enable or Disable this field When the PTT Button is pressed the radio shall generate a continuous sidetone during transmission of the Automatic Repeater Access Codeword RAC preceding a voice transmission under the following conditions 1 This field is Enabled 2 Repeater Access is Enabled 3 The Repeater Access Type is Automatic RAC RAB Sidetone Use the UP DOWN arrow keys or enter directly to select Enabled or Disabled If this field is Enabled a continuous sidetone will sound during transmission of the Manual Repeater Access Codeword MRAC when MRAC is initiated via the Repeater Access Button RAB 1 or RAB 2 Termination of the RAB Sidetone indicates that transmission of the RAC has been completed and you may begin talking 68P81074C50 6 119 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 4 2 SINGLETONE LIST 56 MEN E MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Frequency MTSX Model RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press CONV AUX SINGLETONE LIST 1 SINGLETONE LIST Tone Hz Tone Hz 300 0 F2 F5 ADD DELETE TONE TONE This screen contains Singletone List information It allows you to modify the frequencies for the Singletone List PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
276. number Model Number This is a read only field It displays the model number of the radio currently attached to the computer using the RIB The model number is retrieved from the radio s controller board and is displayed for verification purposes only FLASHcode This is a read only field It displays the FLASHcode of the radio currently attached to the computer using the RIB The FLASHcode is retrieved from the radio s controller board and is displayed for verification purposes only 68P81074C50 4 15 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 2 RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU F3 RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press Lel MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN SERVICE RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU RECEIVER ALIGNMENT MENU HELP Front End Bandpass Filter Rated Audio Calibration Squelch Attenuator 12 5KHz Squelch Attenuator 20KHz Squelch Attenuator 25 30KHz Rx VCO Crossover Frequency Secure Rx Discriminator Level Exit Return to Service Menu F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 FRONTEND AUDIO SQUELCH SQUELCH SQUELCH VCO SECURE FILT ALGN 12 5KHz 20 2 25 30KHz DISCR Standard periodic receiver alignment procedures are performed from this menu Refer to your radio service manual for receive alignment procedures These procedures should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Failure to perform alignment procedures properly may result in seriously degraded radio or system performance PROGRAMMING PROCEDUR
277. o be able to quickly restore customer information is case of a codeplug failure F8 PROGRAM RADIO function is used to transfer codeplug information from the computer to the radio codeplug A radio and RIB must be properly connected to the computer and power turned on before you attempt the program function After pressing the F8 function key the programming of the codeplug commences and data validation occurs During this step data ranges formats and screen interdependencies are checked The time required to PROGRAM a codeplug will depend directly on your computer type and the size of the codeplug you are programming The status of the PROGRAM operation is displayed at the bottom of the Screen F9 VIEW HISTORY gives all the information about the last time the radio was programmed This includes where and when the radio was programmed and if the programming was authorized CAUTION If software versions of the radio and the current data are not compatible then Read the radio codeplug and enter the data again Conventional data can be entered from the RSS screens or cloned from another radio Trunked data must be down loaded from the trunking code management system TCMS via a TCMS codeplug update F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 5 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GET SAVE PROGRAM 5 2 1 READING CODEPLUG DATA You may read the codeplug from the radio or from the archive disk After reading
278. o how can Motorola design radios with such a wide range of features and still offer a variety of radio services with the ability to customize and personalize radios The answer is embedded in modern microprocessor chip technology in the radio and the development of the MTSX RSS a computer program that when interfaced with a radio electronically programs and personalizes a radio with a unique set of features for each individual customer No tools are needed This RSS computer program resides on the diskettes you received in the package with this manual package RVN4097 1 Here are just some of the features and functions available using the RSS Table 1 1 Types of RSS Programmable Features and Functions MTSX RSS Programmable Features MTSX RSS Service Functions Transmit Tx frequencies Reference oscillator alignment Receive Rx frequencies Transmit deviation alignment PL DPL codes Transmit power alignment Signalling system parameters Replaced power amplifier calibration Scan lists and scan options Replaced logic board calibration FLASHport Upgrade requires FLASHport Replaced RF board calibration upgrade package This radio s customization and servicing is accomplished by using an IBM Personal System 2 model 30 or higher computer NOTE We recommend you test any computer s RSS compatibility before purchasing by taking the computer to your shop connecting all the hardware installing the software starting the RSS and reading and w
279. ode Unmute Type Selective Call Encode Auto Sel Call Transmit MDC Unlimited Calling This screen permits access to additional MDC features and options to further customize the radio configuration to your specific communication needs NOTE Signalling must be set on MDC to review this screen CAUTION MDC System parameter changes can substantially degrade system performance if they are made on one or a few radios but not all radios in the system PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW menu appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F3 The CONVENTIONAL PERSONALITY screen appears Press F7 The PERSONALITY MDC OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 6 Ifa field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 6 92 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Personality Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired conventional personality The number may also be entered directly or selected via the function keys Refer to the radio catalog sheet for the maximum number of personalities allowed for this model Call Alert Decode Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable MDC Call A
280. odel MAIN MAIN MENU HELP SERVICE Alignment Requires RIB GET SAVE PROGRAM CLONE Codeplug Data From to Disk Radio CHANGE CREATE VIEW Radio Codeplug Data PRINT Codeplug Data FILE Maintenance FLASHport Upgrade SETUP Computer Configuration EXIT Radio Service Software Return to DOS F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F8 F9 HELP SERVICE GET CHANGE PRINT FILE FLASHport SETUP MENU SAVE VIEW MENU MAINT UPGRADE MENU 68P81074C50 9 1 FLASHPORT UPGRADE MTSX RSS 9 3 FLASHPORT UPGRADE RSS LOCATION At the FLASHPORT UPGRADE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN FLASHport Upgrade FLASHPORT UPGRADE MENU HELP View Radio Configuration View FLASHkey Configuration Upgrade Radio EXIT Return to Main Menu F2 F3 F8 VIEW VIEW UPGRADE RADIO FLASHKEY RADIO FLASHport Upgrade is a multi level menu that is used to view the radio s configuration to view the FLASHkey s contents to upgrade the codeplug and to FLASH the radio The HELP screen F1 will guide you through the upgrade process as well as the users manual that accompanies the FLASHport Upgrade package FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 VIEW RADIO CONFIGURATION displays the radio s current system and enhancements prior to the FLASHport upgrade The displayed information is necessary at the time of ordering a FLASHport Upgrade
281. ogramming cable connections 2 Eliminate background routines on the PC 3 Check power to the RIB Transmit register time out Check serial port Busy low time out 1 Check that the radio is turned on 2 Check radio s battery 3 Check Com port selection on SETUP screen Communication collision 1 Retry operation 2 Check Com port selection on SETUP screen 3 Check power to the RIB 4 Check programming cable connections Programmer not receiving its own transmission 1 Check Com port selection on SETUP screen 2 Check RIB to PC cable 3 Check power to the RIB 4 Check serial card 5 Eliminate background routines on the PC Re transmission not acknowledged NAKed Retry operation CRC error Retry operation MTSX RSS APPENDIX A APPENDIX A CONT COMPUTER TO RADIO COMMUNICATION ERROR CODES 08 CRC error Possible corrective action Retry operation 09 No Acknowledgment received Possible corrective actions 1 Check radio s battery 2 Check power to the RIB 11 Busy high after pulled low Possible corrective actions 1 Check COM port selection on Set Up screen 2 Check COM port 3 Check RIB to PC connections 4 Check power to the RIB NOTE A low level hum or buzz in the received audio MAY be experienced when TPL code OZ 254 1 Hz is used This PL code is at the high end of the subaudible frequency range and may be heard in the audio under certain circumstances Use of
282. ol F3 Trunking Systems F6 Control Channel F F9 Trunking System Options L F5 One Touch F6 Trunking Status Alias F7 Trunking Message Alias F4 Trunking Personality F7 Trunking Talkgroup F8 Emergency Data Configuration F9 Trunking Personality Options F6 SmartZone Preferred Sites F5 Trunking Call List F6 Conventional Menu I F2 Conventional Radio Wide Options r F3 Conventional Personality Options m Conventional Secure Personalities F7 Personality MDC Options I F8 Conventional Personality Phone Options F9 More Conventional Personality Options F4 MDC Configuration Menu L MDC Systems F9 MDC System Options F7 Auxiliary Systems F2 Singletone Systems Singletone List m F4 Quick Call Il Systems F5 GE Star Systems F8 Zone Talkgroup Channel Assignment Figure 2 9 RSS Menu Mapping at a Glance page 2 of 2 2 26 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 8 5 The Relationship Between Screens Some screens contain fields that require or take values from other screens and features and thus are dependent upon each other For example the signalling system values specified on the CHANGE VIEW CONV PER are assigned at the CHANGE VIEW CONV MDC SYSTEM screen MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE V
283. oldoff 2525 RF Modern aie bremen Disabled F1 F2 F3 HELP SMRTZN ENV OPT The options and parameters on this menu apply to all trunking operation independent of system personality or talkgroup Other radio wide options that apply to both conventional and trunking operation are located on the Radio Wide Options screen F4 F3 F2 Conventional options are located on the Conventional Radio Wide Options screen PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F2 The TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 SMRTZN ENV calls up the screen which allows setting of parameters which are related to the SmartZone operating environment This function will only be visible when a radio with the SmartZone software option has been read F3 VOC OPT calls up the screen which allows setting of parameters which are related to the Voice On the control option This function will only be visible when a codeplug wlth the Voice On Control option has been read F10 HELP moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 68P81074C50 6 39 M
284. omputer s owner s manual for a complete description of asynchronous communications ports and how to configure them 2 38 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 13 2 Setting Screen Colors RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use Up Down arrows to Select MTSX Model MAIN CONFIGURATION SCREEN COLORS SCREEN COLORS STATUS TEXT MESSAGE TEXT HIGHLIGHT BACKGROUND SELECTED TEXT POPUP BACKGROUND F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP SAVE EXIT This screen is used to select the type of display monitor that you are using with your computer that is Monochrome or Color For proper color operation you must have a color monitor and the appropriate color display interface card installed in you computer Please refer to your computer s owner s manual and or your computer dealer if you have questions regarding the color capability of your computer You may also further customize your screen by selecting colors for the screen s text status line message line highlighted text background frame selected text and popup background FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F8 SAVE is used to save the configuration information to a file on your program disk Every time you use the Radio Service Software the configuration that you SAVED last will be used At anytime the configuration may be changed and SAVED
285. on key F1 F10 5 Ifa field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VALUE function will program the selected value into the radio F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 4 5 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 1 2 TRANSMIT POWER ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press 5 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model TRANSMIT POWER TRANSMIT POWER Current Value New Softpot Value Frequency High Pwr Low Pwr High Pwr Low Pwr 806 0125 30 26 30 26 815 0125 42 42 42 42 824 9875 50 50 50 50 851 0125 60 60 60 60 860 0125 70 70 70 70 869 9875 80 80 80 80 Off F1 F2 4 5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TOGGLE PROGRAM EXIT PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the transmitter power alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel The adaptive splatter control feature uses the transmitter power settings for reduced transmit power under strong received signal conditions to reduce adjacent channel interference Transmitter power is adjusted by first keying the radio via F6 and then by pressing the up down arrow keys to incr
286. onality after this one F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 101 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Repeater Access Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the desired conventional personality The number may also be entered directly This option enables Repeater Access on this personality Repeater Access is used to access a repeater Typically upon receiving Repeater Access Codeword the repeater will remain in repeat mode until the hang time expires See help screen for extensive information Tone Signalling System Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the tone signalling system to be used by this personality The factory default is 1 Access Strapping Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Repeater Access strapping or Mode Slaved for this personality The factory default is Mode Slaved Access Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Repeater Access Type Choices will be Manual RAC or Auto RAC The factory default is Manual RAC RAB 1 Code Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Repeater Access Button operation Depending on your radio capabilities choices will be Singletone DTMF or MDC The factory default is Singletone RAB 1 Singletone Hz For Singletone and MDC enter the index from the Singletone List or the MDC repeater ID List For DTMF enter the tone value DTMF Tone values are 0 9 and Optionally the UP Down arrow keys could
287. one Use the up down arrow keys to select the Talk Permit Tones When enabled a Talk Permit Tone beep will be made every time a transmission is made The tone indicates that the user may begin the talking The factory default is Enabled 68P81074C50 6 77 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 2 4 4 1 SMARTZONE PREFERRED SITES Ga Lr Le Les RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model TRUNKING PERS OPT PREFERRED SITES SMARTZONE PREFERRED SITES Site ID Prefer Status Preferred Least Always None F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD DELETE EXIT ITEM ITEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING PERSONALITY screen appears Press F9 The TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS screen appears Press F6 The SMARTZONE PREFERRED SITES screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD ITEM allows you to add a SmartZone site F5 DELETE ITEM allows you to delete a SmartZone site F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are
288. onventional Feature will be highlighted Select Scan for Position A Press up down arrow keys to select Scan for Select Blank for Position B Position A and Blank for position B Repeat process for Trunking Column Go to Three position Toggle Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field field Select Zone Sys Select for Press up down arrow keys to select Zone Sys Positions A B and C Select for all three switch positions Repeat process for Trunking Column Exit to Radio Wide Press F10 twice to see Radio Wide Configuration Configuration Menu menu 3 18 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 3 10 Program the Phone List Table 3 17 provides the steps required to program the phone list for your radio Table 3 17 Steps to Program the Phone List Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Press F4 at the Radio Wide Configuration Menu to Go to Phone Configuration see the Phone Configuration screen Screen Go to Phone Num Display Pressing Tab advances the prompt to Phone Num Format field Display Format field Select USA Press up down arrow key to select USA gt Go to Phone Number field Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field lr Type in desired phone number Phone number Type in desired phone number Go to Phone Text TAB Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Type inaesireamame Type in desired name Repeat steps 4 through 7 to add add
289. option is Disabled Quik Key Override Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the Smart PTT Push to Talk Override feature If this override feature is enabled the user can transmit on a busy channel by a quick key double press of the PTT switch The factory default for this option is Disabled Override Timer ms This is the amount of time in ms the user can transmit on a busy channel by a quick key double press of the PTT button The factory default is 500 ms Tx Power Level Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select High or Low transmit power for this personality The transmit power may be reduced to 1 watt for 800 and 900 MHz models and to 2 watts for VHF and UHF models The factory default for this feature is High Busy LED Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the flashing RED LED to indicate the presence of a carrier busy channel The factory default for this feature is Enabled Unmute Mute Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the receiver muting and unmuting characteristics for this personality Standard The radio unmutes the audio when there is a valid PL or DPL signal and mutes when the PL DPL signal is no longer present Use this option for Carrier Squelch operation 6 98 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Unmute Std Mute The radio unmutes only when there is a valid PL or DPL signal AND there is a carrier strong enough to break squelch The radio mutes when the PL or DPL signal is no longer prese
290. or field F2 BUTTON CONFIG Button Configuration allows you to edit button assignments for the radio F3 SWITCH CONFIG Switch Configuration allows you to edit switch assignments for the radio F4 MENU ITEM allows you to edit menus that appear on the radio s display Menu Items are supported on Front Display models only F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 13 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 1 2 1 RADIO WIDE BUTTON CONFIGURATION F3 F3 F2 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press 2 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model CHANGE VIEW CONFIG FEATURES BUTTONS RADIO WIDE BUTTON CONFIGURATION Button Conventional Trunking Orange Button Volume Set Tone Nuisance Delete 16 Pos Rotary Chan Sub Select Channel Select Side Button 1 Top Light Light Side Button 2 Unprogrammed Phone Side Button 3 Monitor Private Call F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT Depending on your radio version and model number you will be able to choose from all or some of the functions listed on the following page NOTE Factory default button assignments are listed in Tables 3 3 3 13 3 27 and 3 28 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F2 The
291. or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS System Number The number of this trunking system To select a system use the UP DOWN arrows to scroll enter the number directly or use the function keys F3 F4 to scroll through the available systems Control Channel A system key or FTR key is required to access these fields Otherwise the TCMS download procedure must be used F3 F4 Use the function keys to add and delete control channels Four Control Channel Frequencies are standard eight if Wide Area Coverage Type is AMSS 4 for Local AMSS and 32 for SmartZone Add channels by pressing F2 and delete the extra channels by pressing F5 Enter the CONTROL CHANNEL Receive frequency directly in MHz 6 56 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 3 TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING SYSTEM OPTIONS Tx Power 1 High Phone Timing 1 Trunk Repeater Offset 45 MHz Initial Delay msec 250 Digit Duration 150 Channel Assgn Type Domestic Inter Digit Delay msec 100 Splinter Channel Disabled Hot Timing eeen 1 Rx Modulation 2 L
292. ot Keypad DI MP eui tat utem Seid cota t nl ed ae F4 F4 F4 Hub Defeats PL tu REPE iste e b F4 F6 F2 SW Retry Times te lists sala 4 4 9 ISW Window AdjUst xit eae ce E epa tek F4 F4 F2 Ignore Site Resource Preference nennen F4 F4 F4 F9 F6 Lrjero claw DLE F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 iere REMES seta etd ee eet ate F4 F6 F7 F5 enu rape ENT F4 F4 F3 Nene F4 F4 F4 Mavi Diera arciteco in ae ted annie F3 F5 Initial Delay MSOC C F4 F4 F3 F9 Initial Delay Irisec icit aed cssc dede e F4 F6 F3 F8 itidem eto e dared F4 F6 F7 F4 Integer Delay msec 4 necare idc ek F4 F6 F3 F8 Inter Digit Delay MSOC hn en pa aa ara 4 4 9 Inter Packet Time mis cda Ld Ye F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 68P81074C50 INDEX 4 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX iier tone Duration nn innt rennen F4 F6 F7 F4 F9 International Radio cce ote eel oe ae Done Due a ca dene lene etl F8 F2 F7 International Radio o eee tete Rhine he ce ite
293. package by the subscriber Because the FLASHport upgrade involves downloading new software to the radio the memory size of the radio s controller board is also displayed in order to reveal possible memory limitations for FLASHing the radio F3 VIEW FLASHkey CONFIGURATION displays the contents of the FLASHkey you will receive after purchasing a FLASHport Upgrade package The FLASHkey CONFIGURATION screen displays such information as the required FLASH software number of purchased and remaining upgrades and a side by side comparison of the features currently enabled in the radio and the features which will be enabled in the radio after FLASHing the radio F8 UPGRADE RADIO will take you to the SELECT FLASH SOFTWARE screen which reads and displays the name of the files that exist in the default directory for the FLASH Software The user is asked to select the FLASH Software file and press F8 in order to start the upgrade process F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 9 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS APPENDIX A APPENDIX A COMPUTER TO RADIO COMMUNICATION ERROR CODES Error code 01 Possible corrective actions 02 Possible corrective action 03 Possible corrective actions 04 Possible corrective actions 05 Possible corrective actions 06 Possible corrective action 07 Possible corrective action 68P81074C50 Description No response from the radio 1 Check pr
294. personnel F3 TX PWR Transmit Power Alignment Refer to your radio service manual for the transmitter power alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel 68P81074C50 4 3 SERVICE MTSX RSS F4 DEV BAL Transmit Deviation Balance Compensation Alignment Refer to your radio service manual for the transmit deviation balance compensation alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F5 DEV LIMIT Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment This is the reference softpot value for this frequency Refer to your radio service manual for the transmit deviation limit alignment reference attenuator procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F6 REF ATTEN Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment Reference Softpot Refer to your radio service manual for the transmitter deviation limit alignment reference attenuator procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F7 TX VCO Transmit VCO Crossover Alignment This is only available and VHF model radios Refer to your radio service manual for the transmitter power alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F8 SECURE DEV Secure Transmit Deviation Alignment Refer to your radio service manual for the secure transmit deviation alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempte
295. press F3 the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU will be displayed 2 12 1 1 Reading the Codeplug You may read the codeplug from the radio or from the archive disk After reading the codeplug will be checked for valid serial number model number checksums etc 2 12 1 2 Reading Codeplug Data from the Radio Turn the radio on and press F2 A series of status messages will appear in the upper right corner of the screen If a communication error occurs a pop up window will be displayed If no errors occur the center of the screen will display the progress of the codeplug read The read process will take approximately one minute After the codeplug is read the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU will be displayed 2 12 1 3 Reading Disk Codeplug Files Press F3 from the GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU The Disk File Names screen will be displayed An archive path and the list of files in that path will be displayed By default the path will be the corresponding archive path specified on the Paths and Port screen If you want to retrieve a file from another path press F2 type in the path name and then press Enter The names of the files in the new path will be displayed To verify the model number and serial number of the codeplug file before reading it select the desired file by pressing Enter Tab Shift or the arrow keys until the desired filename is highlighted To retrieve a selected file press F8 The selected file will be retrieved validated and placed in computer memor
296. ption for this personality When enabled the radio will automatically scan when on this personality To use a scan on off switch or button this option must be Disabled The factory default is Disabled 68P81074C50 6 99 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Rx Emphasis Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable receive de emphasis on this personality The choices are Enabled and Disabled Pre emphasis Amplifies the higher frequencies so when they are transmitted the signal to noise ratio is better De emphasis Reverses the pre emphasis after the signal has been received The factory default is Rx de emphasis Enabled Tx Emphasis Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable transmit pre emphasis on this personality The choices are Enabled and Disabled Pre emphasis Amplifies the higher frequencies so when they are transmitted the signal to noise ratio is better De emphasis Reverses the pre emphasis after the signal has been received The factory default is Tx pre emphasis Enabled Tx Deviation Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Transmitter Deviation for this personality The choices are 2 5 KHz 900 MHz Band 12 5 KHz Channel Spacing 4 0 KHz 821 MHz Band 20 KHz Channel Spacing 5 0 KHz VHF UHF and 800 MHz Bands 38 25 25 KHz Channel Spacing This is the maximum amount that modulation can cause the carrier to deviate from its unmodulated frequency NOTE Secure Clear Strapping Conventional Secure Personality Menu is forced to
297. r file This is just in the Radio Service Software not the radio Limited Patience Time This is the amount of time that transmission of a polite MDC signal will wait before sending out an impolite signal The range of values are 1 255 sec and Infinite The factory default is 60 seconds DOS Data Squelch This enables the Data Operated Squelch feature This keeps the radio from unmuting when data is being received Operation When this field is disabled only the 1800 Hz criteria for Data Operated Squelch is needed When enabled then both 1200 Hz and 1800 Hz signals are required for DOS The factory default is 1200 1800 Hz Coast Time This is the delay for which the audio will remain muted after the received MDC message is finished Valid entries are from 0 to 1134 75 in 4 45 ms increments Sel Call Reset This determines how the Select Call mode is reset after receiving a Select Call and the radio has unmuted The radio will return from carrier squelch mode to select call packet required mode according to this field Auto resets the radio after the Sel Call Auto Reset timer has expired Auto w carrier override resets the radio waits until the voice stops Both modes can be reset manually by pressing the monitor button Auto Reset Time This is the time the radio will remain in carrier squelch mode after the radio has received a select call directed to it Once the auto reset time has expired the radio will reset to the Select Call squelc
298. r tete e thee cete te d ete abuse dus F8 F3 F5 L Bp MM EET RE F4 F3 F2 Last Number Redial eee cd aet dati ee ek Lue ck e de LE Xe E jul F4 F6 F2 Last Programmed netta ee F3 F5 F3 F7 Last Programmet eiaeaen epe Led e eee edges i leet a due ce YE pi ere uci F3 F5 F4 F7 Last Programmes 5 7 Last Programmed ant idl ode D ddan tives F3 F5 F8 Last Programmed centi ee eee teste cette td ee aaa oe Beste RARE eet F3 F7 batch Enable Time seoc oiii eller deca e code o E e e hs F4 F6 F2 Latch SI A F4 F6 F2 Leading PT TID E F4 F6 F4 F3 Limited Patience SOC t F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Long Keypress Duration 4 2 Long Tone Duration sec ametid 4 6 7 4 Low Battery Alerts entienden ne put EI F4 F3 F2 LOW EM F2 F2 F3 M MDC CONFIGURATION MENU sese seas F4 F6 F4 DATA GCEONINQG dg e Eee Ede Leve F3 F5 MDC DATA CEONINQG eret Aree ter stc eM aere ene eee F3 F5 F3 MDGC DATA CLONING a ei aie en i ieee F3 F5 F4 MDC Hot Mic
299. r view the Voice on Control options PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU appears 3 Press F2 The TRUNKING RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears Press F3 The Voice On Control Options screen appears 4 5 Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 6 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 68P81074C50 6 45 RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Voice On Control Capable When a radio is VOC Capable it is able to handle the transition of a site going into and out of Voice On Control Mode without entering the Out of Range state Factory default is Disabled RSSI Acceptable Threshold This field defines the minimum signal strength RSSI value for a radio to determine that it is in range of a valid voice or control channel If a site enters Voice on Control the radio will remain locked onto that site One of the possible conditions that would cause the radio to roam to another site or possibly enter the Out of Range state is when the radio determines there is about 5 seconds of low signal strength RSSI below this threshold on
300. r your Radio Service Software manual and you have selected the appropriate communication port turn on your radio and execute COM TEST by pressing F6 COM TEST will verify your system is functioning properly by sending commands to the radio and checking for the proper response No codeplug changes will result from these commands An OK response will be displayed in the Status Window if the system checks OK Otherwise error messages will be displayed Consult Appendix A for proper corrective action F8 SAVE is used to save the configuration information to a file on your program disk Every time you use the Radio Service Software the configuration that you SAVED last will be used At anytime the configuration may be changed and SAVED F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at at time 68P81074C50 2 37 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS FIELD DEFINITIONS Archive Path Enter the default directory path where archive files are to be located The GET SAVE SAVE FILE function will default to this path Refer to your computer s owner s manual for a complete description of directories and path names FLASH Software Path Enter the default directory path where archive files are to be located The default path established by the MRSS installation program is C MRSS MTSX Upgrade In order to assure a successful FLASHport Upgrade it is strongly recommended that none of the files installed by the MRSS installation program b
301. range of the ID changes for different size codes The ID is a three digit hexadecimal number If you have more than one fleet on a system you may want to use a Universal ID so that people calling you can use one ID Press F8 to go to the Universal ID screen where you can enter the information required to use a universal ID If the Trunking System is type II or Ili the individual ID is a four digit hexadecimal number For Type II trunking your radio will have a single Individual ID per system independent of the number of talkgroups user groups or personalities it is affiliated with on that system TYPE I or TYPE IMi indicates the trunked signalling protocol used on this system Type l is the original MOTOROLA trunked signalling protocol Type II Ili is an enhanced version of the original protocol that provides additional fleet management flexibility for a given system via an expanded signalling format Each radio has a single individual ID per system independent of the number of talkgroups user groups or personalities it is affiliated with on that system Announcement Group Enter the Announcement Talk Group in this field This field contains the user TalkGroup for Announcements for the current personality The Announcement TalkGroup is a 3 digit hexadecimal number Strapping This field configures the transmit mode of Announcement Group or Fleet ID If set to Clear or Secure the Announcement Group or Fleet ID is forced to that particular t
302. ransmit mode When set to Select the user is allowed to select the secure transmit modes via the radio s two position concentric switch Individual ID Contains the Individual ID number that uniquely identifies your radio on a particular system Valid IDs will be between 1 and FFFF The decimal equivalent of the Individual ID is used for your radio s Private Conversation Call ID 7 ID interconnect land to portable unit calls 7 ID and interconnect land to portable talkgroup calls 7 ID For Type Il trunking your radio will have a single Individual ID per system independent of the number of talkgroups user groups or personalities it is affiliated with on that system Failsoft Type When the Central Site Controller fails in a Trunked system the system goes into Failsoft operation Depending on the type of system there will be different choices for Failsoft operation Disabled No failsoft used Personality Fleet Uses the Announcement Group Failsoft Frequency for all talkgroups within the personality Talkgroup Subfleet The frequency is determined by the Subfleet selected These are set in the Subfleet screen WAC AMSS The Failsoft frequency used depends on which AMSS site the radio is using at the time The frequencies are entered via the F6 function key 6 66 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Talk Permit Tone Enable this option if you want the Talk Permit tone every time the PTT is pressed The talk permit tone is
303. re should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F3 HIGH SPEED Refer to your radio service manual for the transmitter deviation limit alignment high speed procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F4 MDC 1200 Refer to your radio service manual for the MDC signalling deviation alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 4 25 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 3 1 DTMF TRANSMIT DEVIATION RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model DTMF TRANSMIT DEVIATION DTMF TRANSMIT DEVIATION Frequency Current Value 809 01250 10 New Softpot Value Transmitter Off s SS eS F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TOGGLE PROGRAM EXIT PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the DTMF signalling deviation alignment procedure This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service personnel DTMF deviation should be checked any time the radio is serviced and must be adjusted whenever any of the modulation circuitry has been replaced All radio compensation deviation adjustments must be made before adjusting DTMF deviation DTMF deviation is increased or decreased by first keying the radio via F6 and then by pressing the up down arrow keys respectiv
304. rea Systems If WAC AMSS is selected and WAC AMSS Failsoft is selected on the Trunking Personality screen F4 F4 F4 the F6 function key on the personality screen will be used for entering the failsoft channels Radios programmed for Local AMSS are only allowed to use one site This site is entered as the Site ID below the Coverage Type field Remote Monitor Use the up down arrow keys to enable disable Radio Trace remote monitor for this system RM Base Time Use the up down arrow keys to select the base time in seconds The radio will transmit during a Radio Trace for this system 15 30 45 or 60 secs Affiliation Type Type IIli Automatic On PTT Use the up down arrow keys to select the Affiliation type Automatic The radio will immediately affiliate with the central controller as soon as it is turned on and will automatically re affiliate each time the talkgroup is changed On PTT Affiliates only when the PTT is pressed Factory default is On PTT 6 50 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Dynamic Regrouping The up down arrow keys will enable disable Dynamic Regrouping for this radio A system key or FTR key is required to access this field Otherwise the TCMS download procedure must be used F3 F4 A Dynamic Regrouping Talkgroup position DYN must be assigned on the zone summary F4 F8 screen Enabling Dynamic Regrouping will automatically add DYN to the list of talkgroups on that screen Only one DYN position may be assig
305. rease a value by one unit or step Displaying text on the monitor by using light letters on a dark background A Motorola proprietary signalling format It is a binary format using 1200 baud minimum shift keying modulation A menu contains a list of functions that can be selected and performed by the RSS user by pressing a function key A menu contains a list of functions Also see Screens Upon releasing the PTT the portable radio will remain on the voice channel for a preprogrammed period of time This allows a response to be made by the other members of the talkgroup without returning to the control channel for another voice channel assignment Message trunking is commonly referred to as Hang Time on the repeater Message Trunking Systems generate less Control Channel traffic per conversation than Transmission Trunking Systems Megahertz or millions of cycles per second A mode is a collection of parameter values such as frequency PL codes and scan lists Often used interchangably with the terms channel or personality in the RSS manual MicroSoft Disk Operating System DOS is a group of programs that control the way the computer interfaces with other programs tells the computer how to use read and return information to and from application programs and how to organize and use the information on disks 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GLOSSARY Path PC Personality Personality file PL PL Code Pop Up Window Port Prior
306. reen or field F3 SYSTEM DATA configures the radio to work with various MDC systems F4 MDC CALL LIST allows you to navigate the MDC Call ID List screen F5 MDC REPEATER ID LIST allows you to navigate the MDC Repeater ID List screen F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 68P81074C50 6 103 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 3 3 1 MDC SYSTEMS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV MDC SYSTEM MDC System Primary ID Secondary ID Enter or Scroll to Select System MDC SYSTEM Enabled Alarm and Call Emergency Emergency Type Variable ID Emer PTT ID Sidetone Enabled Leading PTT ID Acknowledge Alert Tone Enabled PTT ID Sidetone Disabled Trailing PTT ID Disabled Revert Table Radio Check Disabled Zone Channel 1 Status Request i 1 Message 1 F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP ADD PREV NEXT DELETE MORE EMER MORE EXIT SYS SYS SYS SYS OPTIONS OPTIONS This screen allows you to change or view parameters that pertain to an MDC system The settings shown are only for the system shown PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F4 The MDC CONFIGURATION MENU screen appears Press F3 The MDC SYSTEM screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If
307. rge screen F3 F4 Merge the new target codeplug with the file downloaded from TCMS for the target radio You now have a target codeplug image which contains the conventional and radio wide data from the source radio and the trunking data from the TCMS merge 5 Program the target radio by pressing F8 from the normal programming screen F3 F8 or the cloning screen F3 F5 6 Archive the target codeplug image NOTE A radio and RIB must be properly connected to the computer and power turned on before you attempt the READ function The time required to READ a codeplug will depend directly on your computer type and the size of the codeplug you are reading The status of the READ operation is displayed at the bottom of the screen FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 READ SER NUMBER Reads the serial number from the target radio so it can be correctly placed within the workspace F3 CONV ID Conventional ID navigates you to a screen where you assign the MDC IDs This function will only be active when a trunking capable radio is being cloned F4 LIMITED CLONE This function is used for cloning the Conventional and Radio Wide sections of the codeplug This deletes the Trunking data and reads the serial number from the radio Trunking System keys or FTR Key are required for cloning the Trunking System data Limited Clone requires the
308. riting data to and from a radio If problems occur call the phone number on the front cover for help do this prior to purchasing your computer 68P81074C50 1 1 INTRODUCTION MTSX RSS 1 2 PREREQUISITES To use the RSS to program the radios we recommend a basic working knowledge of the following 1 Microcomputers 2 MS DOS operating system version 5 0 or later This application requires 80386 or 80486 DOS 5 0 or later 4 Megabytes of RAM or greater The powerful features and extensive flexibility of these new radio families require much more codeplug data validation than in the past For complex configurations it is recommended that the RSS be executed from a RAM disk This will reduce execution time significantly an order of magnitude 3 The radio s available features see the appropriate radio Operator s Manual 4 Your customers needs For computer beginners we ll teach some computer and MS DOS basics However this manual is written for both beginners and advanced users so the primary prerequisite for using the RSS is the desire to program and deliver an excellent radio to a ready customer 1 3 INTRODUCTION OF NEW RELEASE This release of the MTSX RSS utilizes the extended memory capability of the 386 and 486 PCs To take advantage of these performance enhancements your machine must be a 386 or 486 based machine with 4M of memory 1M lower 3M or more extended This application is compatible with DOS 6 0 but
309. rk The Man Down switch is an optional switch that can be attached to the radio to detect when the radio position is not vertical Valid delays are 1 to 120 seconds Factory default is 10 seconds Man Down Post Alert sec This delay is the period between the Man Down alert tone and the actual transmission of the Emergency Alarm sequence The radio must have an external Man Down switch for this feature to work The Man Down switch is an optional switch that can be attached to the radio to detect when the radio position is not vertical Valid delays are 1 to 120 seconds Factory default is 10 seconds 6 10 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 1 3 MORE RADIO WIDE OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press T MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model CONFIG RADIO OPTIONS OPTIONS RADIO WIDE OPTIONS Mic AGC Disabled Num Time Out Timer Table sec Infinite F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT The option parameters listed on this screen are radio wide in that they apply both to conventional and trunking operation PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears Press F2 The RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears Press F9 Another RADIO WIDE OPTIONS screen appears showing more options Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10
310. rrent Radio From Archive File Radio codeplugs consist of both personality and tuning data Cloning allows you to merge two codeplugs together The archive file or radio with the desired personality will be referred to as the source file or source radio The other will be referred to as the target radio The result will be an image that can be programmed into a radio and or saved to an archive file This image will have the source codeplug s personality yet the tuning data of the target codeplug will remain unchanged In this tutorial the source personality is the file saved in the first tutorial and the target radios are the remaining radios not yet programmed NOTE The IDs for MDC 1200 DTMF etc must be changed manually if you want to have unique IDs You may do this by going to CHANGE VIEW immediately after cloning each radio 3 26 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 4 6 Cloning Remaining Radios Table 3 24 Steps to Clone Radios Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to GET SAVE menu Press Esc to back up to MAIN MENU Press F3 E at the MAIN MENU to see the GET SAVE menu Go to GET ARCHIVE FILE F3 Press F3 at the GET SAVE menu to go to GET ARCHIVE FILE screen A list of files is displayed which look like serial numbers that the RSS found under the archive path name Change the Archive path IA Press F2 to highlight the archive path Type in path name CAMRSS MTSX ARCHIVE This tells the RSS to display t
311. s Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected enter the access or deaccess code via the keyboard Function key descriptions and field definitions are on the following page 6 24 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 ADD CODE adds another access deaccess code pair F5 DELETE CODE deletes an access deaccess code pair from the list F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Access Code This is the code used to access the phone line Some conventional interconnect systems require a to access the telephone line Some systems require a multi digit access code which consists of 1 to 4 digits and may or may not contain a Multi digit access codes are used to prevent unauthorized subscriber units from accessing the interconnect system NOTE From the keypad enter pause P by pressing and then Deaccess Code This is the code to deaccess the phone line Enter 1 to 4 digits to compose the multi digit release code Some conventional interconnect systems require a to release disconnect the telephone line when you are through using it Release codes are used for system management purposes to improve system loading by eliminating dead air time after interconnect calls are completed NOTE
312. s lit with a D weak battery this may cause certain errors on screen RIB Power Supply 01 80357A57 110 Vac Power Supply or 01 80358A56 220 Vac Power Supply SRIB Power Supply 01 80302E27 120 Vac Power Supply For FLASHport Only Using the power supply is more reliable than using a weak battery RIB to Radio Cable RKN4035A Cable Radio MT 2000 MTS 2000 MTX 838 MTX 8000 or MTX 9000 Portable Radio MTSX RSS 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED Table 2 1 Steps to Connect Hardware Steps to Connect the Hardware 1 Connect A and C with B First plug the Connect F and C with E The 25 pin end of E goes into C 9 pin end of B into the communications port and the modular telephone connector end plugs into the side of A Then connect the 15 pin end to C connector on the front of F If your computer has a 25 pin connections Plug D into the wall outlet and connect the other end to C port connector you will need the cable 30 80369B71 to insert between A and B After you connect the hardware turn on the radio by turning the volume control clockwise You will hear one of the following types of tones Table 2 2 Installation Tone Identification This tone Means this Higher pitched short tone Hardware is connected correctly and the radio s internal firmware is operating correctly Note This tone may be disabled in the codeplug and may not be heard Continuous low tone Cr
313. s of the RSS on a hard disk and finally it lists how to start the RSS with the appropriate executable command 2 7 1 Making a Backup Copy of RSS Diskette s As with any program it is important to make a backup copy of the RSS diskette before you begin to use it Whenever you receive a new version of the RSS you should make a backup copy We recommend a backup copy of your RSS even if you have a hard disk To make a backup copy follow the steps below These steps assume you have one diskette drive named A or you have two diskette drives that are not the same size and density and that DOS is loaded Note DISKCOPY will not copy from one drive to another if the drives are not the exact same size and density Table 2 7 Steps to Backup the RSS Diskette s Instruction What to Type Explanation Insert RSS diskette Put supplied RSS diskette into drive A close the door Make the backup copy DISKCOPY A A This copies the data on the source diskette in drive A supplied RSS diskette to the target diskette the newly formatted diskette Caution accidentally reversing the insertion order of the diskettes will erase the contents of the RSS diskette DOS will tell you when to insert the source diskette RSS one and when to insert the target diskette the newly formatted one When the diskcopy is complete use the target diskette as the new working copy Keep originals safe Store the original RSS diskettes in a safe place away from mag
314. s the user to send calls to an individual or to a group of radios This feature is intended not so much to ensure privacy but to eliminate the annoyance of users receiving traffic that does not pertain to them The factory default is Disabled 68P81074C50 6 93 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS NOTE If this feature is enabled and selection of target radio s ID s via Call list is to be made available to the user data must be programmed into the appropriate Call List Table Tx Inhibit On Busy Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable the MDC Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel option for this personality When this option is enabled polite MDC transmissions will be inhibited when a carrier is present on the channel The factory default is Disabled Auto Sel Call Transmit Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable or disable the Auto Selective Call Transmit option If the Auto Sel Call Transmit option is enabled the radio will remain in Selective Call mode after the PTT switch is released otherwise it will exit Selective Call mode as soon as the PTT switch is released The factory default is Enabled MDC Unlimited Calling Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable disable Unlimited Calling With this option enabled the user is able to directly enter the ID of radios to be called by means of the radio keypad Target Radio ID selection via the programmed Call List instead still remains available for models so equipped The factory default is Disabled NOTE
315. s to Select Choice MTSX Model MENU CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS Personality TRUNKING PERSONALITY Protocol Type Private Call Type System ID Operation Supervisor Pool ID Call Alert Operation Phone Interconnect Hot Keypad DTMF Individual ID Failsoft Type Call ID List This Call ID PC 1 Time Out Timer This Call ID PC II Scan List F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 PREV NEXT DELETE SUB EMER MORE PERS PERS PERS FLEETS OPTIONS OPTIONS TRUNKING PERSONALITY Screen for SMARTNET Type 68P81074C50 6 63 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Type MTSX Model MENU CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS Personality TRUNKING PERSONALITY Protocol Type i Private Call Type Disabled System ID Call Alert Operation Disabled Individual ID Phone Interconnect Unlimited Size Code Hot Keypad DTMF Enabled Announcement Group Strapping Failsoft Type Trunking Status Enabled Talk Permit Tone Message Enabled Time Out Timer Scan List F3 F4 F5 F7 F8 F9 PREV NEXT DELETE SUB EMER MORE PERS PERS PERS FLEETS OPTIONS OPTIONS TRUNKING PERSONALITY Screen for System Type lli MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Type MTSX Model MENU CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS Personality TRUNKING PERSONALITY Protocol Type Private Call Type System ID Operation Call Alert Operation Unlimited Announcement Group Phone Interconnect Unlimited Disabled Individual ID Disabled Failsoft
316. s to select Enabled or Disabled The Monitor w Sil Emer field allows the monitor button to function during silent emergency The Factory Default is Disabled Impolite Retries Use the Up Down arrows to scroll or directly enter the desired value The range is 1 to 255 This field specifies the number of impolite emergency alarm packets that the radio will send The Factory Default is 10 Revert Table Zone Channel Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available zone channels Directly enter the desired value This table specifies three conventional zone channel combinations that the selected conventional zone channel can use or revert to when initiating GE STAR Emergency Alarm transmissions The radio remains on the revert channel only for the duration of the Emergency Alarm transmissions The factory default is Num Zone Channel 1 Blank Blank 2 Blank Blank 3 Blank Blank 6 126 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 3 4 5 CONVENTIONAL MESSAGE ALIAS LIST RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press E MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select Value MTSX Model CHANGE VIEW CONV MESSAGE ALIAS LIST CONV MESSAGE ALIAS LIST Entry Message Alias Number Message Alias Text MESSAGE 1 MESSAGE 2 MESSAGE 3 MESSAGE 4 MESSAGE 5 MESSAGE 6 MESSAGE 7 MESSAGE 8 F2 F5 ADD DELETE MESSAGE MESSAGE This screen contains the Conventional Message Alias List and is used to view and edit the Message Alias Nu
317. s via the radio s two position concentric switch Emergency Hot Mic This feature when enabled will activate the Emergency Hot Mic operation also known as Trunking Emergency with voice to follow When an Emergency Alarm is generated and the emergency alarm acknowledge is received the radio will automatically drop into emergency call mode and begin transmitting for the time specified by the Tx Period with the mic unmuted IMPORTANT This feature is mutually exclusive with normal emergency operation That is if this feature is enabled emergency operation will always operate in this manner Tx Period sec When the Emergency Hot Mic feature is enabled the Tx Period determines the time period the radio will be transmitting with the mic unmuted without user intervention The Tx Period ranges from 10 120 seconds in increments of 10 seconds Default Tx Period is 10 seconds 68P81074C50 6 75 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS 6 2 2 4 4 TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press i MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select MTSX Model Personality MAIN CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING PERS OPT Personality TRUNKING PERSONALITY OPTIONS Conversation Type Message Auto Scan Disabled Proper Code Detect Disabled F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PREV NEXT PREF EXIT PERS PERS SITES PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F4 The TRUNKING MENU
318. st be off PgDn Displays the next page of information on the screen This is on the numeric keypad On some keyboards the Num Lock key must be off GETTING STARTED 5 RSS 2 8 2 Within the RSS there are menus that will take you to screens where you can change the choice or value of a field The only difference between a menu and a screen is the information shown in the working area shown as C in the figure below A menu or screen has four areas labeled below as A B C and D MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model HO1WCF4DB5AN MAIN Q MAIN MENU HELP SERVICE Alignment Requires RIB GET SAVE PROGRAM CLONE Codeplug Data from to Disk Radio CHANGE CREATE VIEW Radio Codeplug Data PRINT Radio Codeplug Data FILE Maintenance FLASHport Upgrade SETUP Computer Configuration EXIT Radio Service Software Return to DOS F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP SERVICE GET CHANGE PRINT FILE FIASHPORT SETUP EXIT MENU SAVE VIEW DATA MAINT UPGRADE MENU TO DOS Figure 2 7 An RSS Menu Q RSS Location ID Area In this area you will find the words MOTOROLA Radio Service Software and a menu or screen pathname for the current menu or screen shown on the display Each menu and screen name will be separated by a colon For some examples of this pathname glance ahead in this manual to see the menus and screens that are deeper into the RSS tree pas
319. st be separated from the file name by a period sometimes called a dot 2 Second DOS allows only 111 files under the root directory topmost on any diskette or hard disk We highly recommend that you further subdivide your files into more directories before you accumulate this many files in any directory not just the root directory It s very confusing and time consuming to work with or view this many files at once 3 Last the maximum number of files allowed by the RSS in any non root directory whether diskette or hard disk is approximately 400 This is an RSS limitation not a DOS or computer limitation If you have more than 400 files create another directory The RSS is not a Microsoft Windows program The RSS can be executed only from the DOS prompt on computers which are not running Microsoft Windows 68P81074C50 2 9 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 5 WHAT S ON THE RSS DISKETTES Below are the files located on the diskettes you received with this manual File Name File Type Description These files are in the top ROOT directory DISK 1 INSTALL EXE installation file RSS Installation program Change to the floppy drive amp type install to begin INSTALL DAT installation file Installation Data This is a compressed version of the file that the install MTSXINS 001 executable files program uncompresses during installation to your hard disk DISK ID installation file Installation Data DISK 2 DISK ID installation fil
320. stall the RSS on your computer After each What to Type step below press Return or Enter Table 2 8 RSS Hard Disk Installation Procedure Instruction What to Type Explanation 1 Put RSS diskette in drive A Insert the RSS Diskette into Drive A close the door later you will be instructed to insert the other one 2 Go to drive A A This tells the computer to work from drive A 3 Start the installation INSTALL This transfers the RSS to your hard disk Follow directions and answer questions on the display when they appear You will be instructed to switch diskettes in the diskette drive for example INSERT DISK CONTAINING FILE 7 When the prompt returns you may start the RSS see next section 4 Store diskettes in safe place Keep the RSS diskettes in a safe place and start RSS from the hard disk from now on 2 16 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED After installing the RSS on a hard disk you may notice a BAT extension and a ODB extension These types of files are explained briefly below Do not delete or move these files from the CAMRSSWTSX directory BAT A batch file The INSTALL command file creates a file called MTSX BAT in the top level directory of the hard drive CFG Created and modified by the RSS the configuration file CFG contains the PC port choice the default pathnames and the display type data ODB Used by the RUNTIME EXE file to properly configure your radio 2 7 5 Installing
321. sting the high frequency content that tends to get washed out in such conditions The Secure Punch Thru feature is activated when the radio is receiving in the secure mode and the volume knob is beyond an RSS programmable position The feature turns off the de emphasis filter in the receive secure audio path leaving the audio pre emphasized from the transmitter i e the lower frequencies are reduced and the higher frequencies are increased The factory default is Disabled Note This feature requires the transmitting radios to use pre emphasis which is normally the case Also the Secure Punch Thru feature activation point can be anywhere from the volume knob s lowest position i e turned on all the time when receiving secure to its highest position i e turned off all the time when receiving secure 6 8 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 1 2 RADIO WIDE EMERGENCY OPTIONS F3 F2 F RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press L MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model CONFIG RADIO OPTIONS EMERG OPT RADIO WIDE EMERGENCY OPTIONS Silent Alarm Unmute Option Channel Delay sec Man Down Pre Alert sec Man Down Post Alert sec F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 9 F10 HELP EXIT The Emergency parameters listed on this screen are radio wide in that they apply both to conventional and trunking signaling Emergency operation must be enabled in the system selecte
322. such as Console Acknowledge Required This function will only be active when a radio containing the SMARTNET or SmartZone software option has been read F9 MORE OPTIONS allows you to change or view more trunking personality parameters F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time FIELD DEFINITIONS Personality Up down arrow keys will scroll through the available personalities Alternately the F3 F4 function keys can be used to navigate through the available personalities Personalities can be added by pressing F2 or deleted by pressing F5 function keys You will be prompted before the delete occurs Protocol Type The Protocol Type refers to the type of trunking system Type I Il or II Ili Type is the original MOTOROLA trunked signalling protocol Type Il is an enhanced version of the original protocol that provides additional fleet management flexibility for a given system via an expanded signalling format Type lli is a hybrid of type and II that permits a radio to operate as a type II unit on a type system System ID The up down arrow keys will select the Trunking System this personality is to use The system ID is shown by the system number The trunking system F4 F4 F3 should be set up before the personality information is entered since some of these fields depend on the system information 68P81074C50 6 65 CHANGE VIEW MTSX RSS Type If the Trunking System is Type the
323. summary of current zone channel information for the radio F9 RADIO CODEPLUG DATA SUMMARY The Radio Codeplug Data Summary function prints a summary of the key radio programming parameters F10 EXIT returns you to the Main Menu 7 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS PRINT 7 1 1 PRINT RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press E51 MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN PRINT FEATURES RADIO WIDE FEATURES CONFIGURATION MENU HELP Radio Wide Options Buttons Switches Menu Items Phone Lists and Options Scan Lists and Options Display Options Exit Return to Print Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP RADIO FEATURE PHONE SCAN DISPLAY EXIT OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 RADIO OPTIONS allows you to print the radio wide option screen F3 FEATURE OPTIONS Buttons Switches Menu Items allows you to print the Button Configuration Screen Switches Configuration Screen and Menu Item Configuration screen F4 PHONE OPTIONS allows you to print the screen which shows the Phone Options screen F5 SCAN OPTIONS allows you to print the screen which show scan lists and scan related options F6 DISPLAY OPTIONS allows you to print the screen which shows the Display Options screen F10 EXIT returns you to the Print Men
324. t Transmit Power Alignment Transmit Deviation Balance Compensation Alignment Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment Transmit Deviation Limit Alignment Reference Softpot Transmit VCO Crossover Alignment Secure Transmit Deviation Rated Audio Alignment F3 Radio Wide Buttons Scan Phone F4 Trunking Systems Personalities Options F6 Conventional Personalities F8 Zone Summary F9 Radio Codeplug Data Summary Squelch Attenuator 12 5kHz Alignment Squelch Attenuator 20kHz Alignment Squelch Attenuator 25 30kHz Alignment RX VCO Crossover Frequency Secure Receive Discriminator Level Figure 2 9 RSS Menu Mapping at a Glance page 1 of 2 68P81074C50 2 25 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS MAIN MENU CHANGE F4 VIEW F3 Radio Wide Configuration Menu F2 Radio Wide Options F6 Radio Wide Secure Options F7 Radio Wide Emergency Options F9 More Radio Wide Options F3 Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu F2 Radio Wide Button Configuration Radio Wide Switch Configuration F4 Radio Wide Menu Item Configuration F4 Phone Configuration I F8 Access Deaccess Codes F9 Dial Options F5 Radio Wide Scan Lists And Options F8 Radio Wide Scan Options F6 Radio Wide Display Options F4 Trunking Menu F2 Trunking Radio Wide Options F2 SmartZone Environment Voice On Contr
325. t always revert WARNING For the radio to function properly during the emergency transmission the three emergency revert channels mentioned above MUST be Conventional Channels which are not receive only nor have Quik Call Il Enabled Frequency MHz Enter the Receive Transmit or Direct Talkaround frequency directly in MHz Optionally the UP DOWN arrow keys may be used to scroll through valid channels Blank receive frequencies are not allowed Refer to the Motorola Catalog Sheets Price Pages for valid receive frequencies for this model Squelch Type Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the Receive Transmit or Direct Talkaround squelch type CSQ Carrier Squelch PL Tone Private Line DPL Digital Private Line Disabled Transmit and direct only A data field for a PL DPL code will be displayed for PL or DPL 6 90 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW PL Code Enter the PL Private Line frequency directly in Hz Ex 192 8 or the alpha numeric code Ex 7A The UP DOWN arrow keys may be used to scroll through the standard frequencies and codes The code can also be selected by pressing the first letter and then scrolling to select the correct code Standard Private Line Frequencies Motorola Code Freq Code Freq Code Freq Code Freq Code Freq Code 67 0 XZ 91 5 ZZ 123 0 34 167 9 62 225 7 4 693 WZ 94 8 ZA 127 3 173 8 6A 229 1 9Z 71 9 XA 97 4 ZB 131 8 3B 179 9 6B 233 6 5 74 4 WA 100 0 12 196 5 47 186 2
326. t de seta eripi ewe eae ai eae F8 F3 Monitor Hold Time sec F4 F3 F5 F8 Auefetomh dem F4 F6 F2 Monitor quao cere enden iva eene dava V aa Rn TR easet aU luna dev eas F4 F6 F7 F5 N NEW TRUNKING IDS vriezen aaaea nae ice ae deed odes ae F3 F5 Native Language e ete castes nna sea een te esa Dds Pend ea casted pees F4 F3 F6 New FLASH COG ES F8 F3 New a geo F8 F3 F5 New FEEASHCOGG acuit ao dale ae ees ee ee alle F8 F3 F5 F9 New EL F6 F2 Non XL Scan Unsquelch 4 2 6 NonPriority Members x ER emer ater o EN iste ae F4 F3 F5 Nuisance Mode Delete F4 F3 F5 F8 ONE TOUCH BUTTON OPTIONS innen nnns inns F4 F4 F3 F9 F5 Observ Window Dur cycles F4 F6 F7 F4 F9 ende mie F4 F3 F2 Override Mimer MS Er F4 F6 F3 F9 P F4 F6 F3 F7 PHONE CONFIGURATION F4 F3 F4 PHONE OPTIONS 2 terne e stets E Ete F4 F3 F4 F9 POPUP BACKGROUND dats a ecu oit Haeo ru ae dead de ai a eve de aie F9 F7 PRINT MENU te beer e t e
327. t rec titre ret tbe cie hene ee i e pede crece 2 30 2 12 Service Software Configuration Menu Options esssssesssseeeeeeeneneeneee neret enne 2 31 3 1 Button Locator Diagram Button Location Purposes Only nennen 3 5 3 2 Button Locator Diagram Button Location Purposes Only nennen 3 16 vii 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS NOTES viii 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS INTRODUCTION SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION Welcome to the world of two way radio programming from Motorola s Radio Products Group 1 1 INTRODUCING THE MT 20007 MTS 20007 MTX 838 MTX 80007 AND MTX 90007 MTSX RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE This Radio Service Software RSS manual is targeted for anyone who wants to program features into the MT 2000 MTS 2000 MTX 838 MTX 8000 and MTX 9000 radios or align a radio This feature programming or customizing personalizes a radio for the needs of individual customers resulting in radios with unique personalities This series of portable radios has a unique set of features including unique PL DPL codes for each channel a variety of signalling abilities with channel scan and the convenience of maintenance free tuning due to the wideband capability This feature set makes these radios ideal for commercial businesses and police and fire protection services that typically utilize radios in their vehicles S
328. t the Alert Tone Volume Offset the radio will use The Alert Tone Volume Offset is the value to raise or lower the volume of an alert tone in reference to the current user selected volume The alert tone offset can range from 24db to 24db with steps of 1 5db The default is 12db Self Test Alert Tone When enabled an alert tone beep will sound each time the radio is turned on and the self test is complete Factory default is Disabled Low Battery Tx Chirp Enables the low battery alert tone A chirp beep will be heard immediately after the PTT switch on the radio is released when a low battery condition is detected during transmit Factory default is Enabled Low Battery Standby Chirp sec This determines the length of time between the low battery alert chirps Valid entries are from Disabled 30 to 930 seconds in increments of 30 This field allows direct values to be entered in increments of 30 or values can be selected by using the up down arrow keys Factory default is 60 seconds Selecting Disabled will prevent the radio from sounding alarms when the radio is idle The low battery alarm will still sound after transmitting if the Low Battery Tx Chirp field is Enabled Low Battery LED When this field is enabled the red Tx LED will flash when a low battery condition is detected and the radio is transmitting Factory default is Enabled Out of Range This field determines how the radio will indicate an Out of Range condition on a
329. t the MAIN MENU the highest root level which is the assumed default starting point If a radio is connected the current radio model being read will also be displayed in this area 9 Instruction Area This area tells you the allowable actions for the current menu or screen It is divided into 4 lines the first two lines are reserved for messages to the user and the last two lines are status lines Working Area This area of a menu not a screen displays a list of functions menu choices you can execute from the current menu Each menu item is preceded by an F number key function key Pressing an F number key advances you to another menu or screen see Figure 2 10 F Key Function Key ID Area This area displays the F number keys and function names for the current menu or screen NOTE All functions supported and unsupported will be displayed in the menu s working area The unsupported functions based on the radio s model or options will NOT be displayed in the F key ID area 2 22 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED 2 8 3 Anatomy of a Screen As stated before the only difference between a menu and a screen is the contents of the working area shown as letter C in the previous menu figure and shown below as the Working area Screens list features fields that can be viewed or edited MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select MTSX Model Personality MAIN CHANGE VIEW CONV PERS Personality
330. t the Scan List to be used for this personality To change or view the scan list select the Scan List screen F4 F3 F5 Conventional personalities may use 6 88 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Conventional or Talkgroup type scan lists The factory default is None Hot Keypad Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable Hot Keypad DTMF while transmitting operation for this personality When this feature is Enabled the keypad is live during all dispatch operations The factory default is Disabled Phone Operation Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to select the type of phone service for this personality List Only The user may only call pre programmed numbers from the phone list stored in the radio Unlimited The user may call phone numbers from the list or directly enter any number via the keypad None Disable the phone for this personality If the Radio has Manual Access with Live Dialing Unlimited must be selected to allow keypad access Signalling Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to enable MDC GE STAR or None signalling on this personality MDC is a Motorola proprietary 1200 baud digital signalling protocol used for unit identification selective signalling and emergency features The MDC Options function key will only be active when this field has been set to MDC The factory default for this field is None GE STAR System Use the UP DOWN arrows to scroll through the available selections Directly enter the desired value Integer
331. talkgroup transmits during another user s transmission they will talk over the other transmission Transmission Trunked Systems No hang time and no talk over When a radio is dekeyed the channel is immediately de allocated and reassigned If the user tries to talk over an active channel the radio will not respond until the channel is clear Tx Defeat When this option is enabled the radio will use the PFI to initiate individual calls instead of the Universal ID Factory default is Disabled This Call ID This is the Type call ID which is calculated from the Size Code Fleet ID and Individual ID 6 52 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 2 1 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT DATA RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model TRUNKING SYSTEM CHAN ASSIGN CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT DATA Rx Channel Ranges MHz Tx Channel Ranges MHz Spacing Spacing Status kHz Start End Status kHz Start End 1 Enable 6 25 136 00000 136 00000 Enable 6 25 136 00000 136 00000 2 Blank Blank 3 Blank Blank F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 7 F8 F9 F10 HELP PREV NEXT CONTROL EXIT SYS SYS CHANNEL This screen is used to enter the Channel Assignment data used for OB Other Band Trunking Three different frequency splits may be defined for each system After the Receive and Transmit ranges are defined press F6 to enter the Control Channel frequencies Caution T
332. target radio to be connected so that the serial number can be read F6 DUPLICATE 11 111 ID duplicates the selected Type II Ili ID the one under the cursor into all other II Ili personalities for which system keys are present 5 8 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GET SAVE PROGRAM F7 SAVE FILE is used to create or update an archive copy of the codeplug information onto a disk or hard disk An archive copy of every radio installed or serviced is strongly recommended to be able to quickly restore customer information in case of a codeplug failure F8 PROGRAM RADIO is used to transfer codeplug information from the computer to the radio codeplug F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Note If a model up issue is being performed AN TO BN OR BN TO AN Cloning note that When cloning a BN archive to a AN radio the radio will remain as AN model radio When cloning a AN codeplug to a BN radio the radio will remain a BN radio However any secure voice encrypted data will be lost AN models are not secure capable Re read the the radio and enter the Radio Wide Options screen F4 F3 F2 and change the Secure Equipped field and the fields in the Radio Wide Secure Options screen F4 F3 F2 F6 if necessary Go to the Program Radio screen F3 F8 and reprogram the radio with secure data 68P81074C50 5 9 GET SAVE PROGRAM MTSX RSS 5 2 4 SAVING CODEPLUG DATA TO AN ARCHIVE FILE F
333. tch When Strapped If this parameter is set to Yes and the active radio mode is strapped to Secure or Clear the radio ignores the setting of the Secure Clear Switch and allows user initiated voice transmissions based upon the mode s strapping In this configuration the Secure Clear Switch has no effect If this parameter is set to No and the active radio mode is strapped to Secure or Clear the radio checks the position of the Secure Clear Switch against the active mode s strapping If the strapped value does not match the setting of the switch the radio will not transmit The factory default is No XL IC Present This field should be set to Yes if the radio is equipped with an XL chip Tx Clear Alert Tones When this field is set to Enabled an alert tone will be generated every time the user keys up the radio in the clear mode The factory default is Enabled Periodic Keyfail Alert Tone When this field is set to Enabled a periodic alert tone will be generated whenever the radio has lost key and one of the following conditions are met 1 Secure Clear Strapping is set to Secure or 2 Secure Clear Strapping is set to Select and the two position concentric switch is in the secure position Factory default is Enabled Non XL Scan Unsquelch Duration When scanning for coded transmissions this field determines the period of time that the radio will wait for a Non XL Cipher Feedback encrypted signal to be detected following a carrier detect
334. ter Constant a Ae d aa occ ested dua eut edu d ee ia ees F4 F4 F2 F2 Filter Threshold Constant 1 4 4 2 2 Filter Threshold Constant T2 4 4 2 2 Filter Threshold Constant siens entres F4 F4 F2 F2 glue EE F4 F4 F3 ipibisplay ettet tatit duties deci mE aa aie teen ee F4 F3 F6 mcr EE F3 F5 Full Spectrum GG Sean Lern edite e d p eue et ey addenda eda Dore ed nuez F4 F4 F2 F2 Full Spectrum CO Scan nere iet b sede d nae devices F4 F4 F2 F2 G GE STAR SYSTEM aaa n een italy dele Mle eee F4 F6 F7 F5 GE S TAR Syste Mi ndi tete seed he Fete e RE Ts ed Ae ERR F4 F6 F3 GE Star Signalirig eiii dte doc de ve EE 8 2 7 GE Star Signaling 5 sei tates F8 F3 F5 GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU H HUB Suspends Scan 5 Havel quede ducc e uu Re erede ee F4 F3 F5 F8 a e nde F4 F4 F3 F9 LEE F2 F3 F3 alice PP F4 F6 F3 F9 oA m F2 F2 F7 nena HN F2 F2 F3 Hot DTMF Timing tco erui c ku Eee ce coe tcr aha ae ie ae obe er E de aa eue F4 F4 F3 F9 FOL Keypad ehe epe ttt timber be eta de ee ta Ris F4 F6 F3 H
335. th some features we must read and access the current radio s personality codeplug data Table 3 14 Steps to Read A Radio s Personality Codeplug Instruction What to Type What it Does or Means 1 Goto GET SAVE menu Press F3 at the MAIN MENU to get to the GET SAVE Menu At the GET SAVE menu press F2 to execute the 2 Get current radio s codeplug function You will also see an indication of how data much of the radio codeplug has been read 3 3 7 TCMS Merge Process For this tutorial we will assume that the TCMS file is in the appropriate directory Before we can program the MTX8000 with some features we must merge the TCMS file into the MTX8000 radio Table 3 15 describes the TCMS merge process Table 3 15 Steps to Merge Download TCMS Instruction What to Type What it Does or Means Go to GET SAVE menu Press F3 at the MAIN MENU to get to the GET SAVE Menu At the GET SAVE menu press F4 to get TCMS Go to MERGE FORM codeplug update disk file Update Data The TCMS Path is highlighted We assumed the TCMS file was in the appropriate directory if this path is not in the highlighted area type in the appropriate path name Exit to MAIN MENU Press Esc to exit to MAIN MENU 3 3 8 Program the Radio Wide Features First After the MTX8000 radio s codeplug data is read and the TCMS file is merged the RSS allows us to access the CHANGE VIEW menu From here we can program the features that are unique
336. that is deemed more important to the radio operator than any other The radio is required to always unmute on activity there even though receiving activity on another channel during priority scan A number given to each radio user on a trunked system to allow system access to the most critical users during busy periods Assignment of priority levels is controlled by the System Manager Three levels of priority are available on a Privacy Plus System five levels are available on Type SMARTNET system The rate at which the priority channel is checked in priority scan for activity See PL Privacy Plus is a type of trunking system This trunking system is limited in the options available to its radio users The system does not have emergency or dynamic regrouping capabilities Most shared Public Trunking Systems are of the Privacy Plus variety 1 A set of computer instructions designed to have the computer perform a specific sequence of actions 2 A means by which the workspace is transferred from the computer into the radio s EEPROM A figurative term used to describe the organization of a multi level menu driven software program Push To Talk feature or button Push To Talk IDentification A feature that sends your radio s identification number on each transmission A method of servicing users which is used when a Trunking system is busy The Central Controller stores a radio s request to transmit and makes determinations as to wh
337. the last active CC The range of values for this field is 0 to 255 Factory default is 74 Voice On Control Site Lock Time This field defines the maximum time in seconds a radio will remain locked onto a Voice on Control or Control Site before it will attempt to lock onto another site and possibly enter the Out of Range state The range of values for this field is 15 to 255 in 1 sec intervals Factory default is 60 Voice On Control Pended Emer Time This field defines the necessary data fields for operation on a Voice on Control capable site When a site enters VOC Mode its Control Channel is surrendered for a Voice Call All radios that are not Voice On Control Capable will go out of range at that time The range of values for this field is 500 to 6000 msec in 25 msec intervals Factory default is 500 Voice On Control Activation Time This field determines the maximum time in 25 mS increments that the radio will delay before sending in ISW requests upon receiving a system Status OSW indicating the site is exiting Voice On Control Mode he range of values for this field is 500 to 6000 ms in 25 msec intervals Factory default is 500 6 46 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 2 2 TRUNKING SYSTEMS RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Enter or Scroll to Select System MTSX Model MAIN CHANGE VIEW TRUNKING SYSTEM TRUNKING SYSTEM System Key
338. the RSS on Multiple Computers or Networks You may install the RSS on several personal computers and laptop computers at a single site according to your license If you have additional sites a second shop etc then you should purchase additional subscriptions Now that you have a backup and working copy of the RSS you will start the RSS in the next section 2 7 6 Hard Disk RSS Startup Procedure To start the RSS from your hard disk follow the steps in the table below After each What to type step press Return or Enter Table 2 9 Hard Disk Startup Procedures Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means 1 Move to C drive Work from hard disk the C drive If you have a hard disk and you bring up your computer with no diskettes in the diskette drives you will already be at the C drive 2 Startthe RSS This command starts the RSS If it does not start correctly you may hear a tone or see an error message or error code printed on the display After you start the RSS from the hard disk you will see the BANNER screen 68P81074C50 2 17 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 7 7 The Banner Screen When the program correctly loads you will see a BANNER screen with the Motorola logo and copyright information Once the program is loaded press any key You will then see the MAIN MENU MOTOROLA RADIO SERVICE SOFTWARE for the MT2000 MTX8000 MTX9000 and MTS2000 Radios lt Version gt lt DATE gt C Copyri
339. the same channel If a radio in the talkgroup transmits during another user s transmission they will talk over the other transmission Transmission Trunked No hang time and no talk over When a radio is dekeyed the channel is immediately deallocated and reassigned If a user tries to talk over an active channel the radio will not key until the channel is clear PTT ID PTT ID systems are similar to message conversation type systems with hang time and talk over but they send an ID code to the controller when PTT is pressed After the ID transmission the radio goes back to the voice channel to talk to the other users Auto Scan Use the up down arrow keys to enable the Auto Scan option for this personality When enabled the radio will automatically scan when on this personality To use a scan on off switch or button this option must be disabled Factory default is Disabled Proper Code Detect When this parameter is set to Enabled the speaker will unmute on secure data only if it is encrypted with the correct key Access Type Use the up down arrow keys to select the Trunking Access type Slow Refers to Rx Slow utilizing the high speed acknowledgments for all channel grants Rx Fast Tx Fast Fast Refers to the elimination of the high speed acknowledgment which improves channel access time Rx Fast Tx Fast This information must be coordinated with your system manager to insure proper operation on the system Talk Permit T
340. the user will be directed to similar menus and or data entry screens for RF alignment or codeplug data The user must initially load data from a radio or disk via the GET SAVE function before being permitted to CHANGE VIEW any codeplug data For any problems not covered by the Radio Service Software Users manual or the service manual contact the local MOTOROLA field technical representative FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP when pressed provides additional information on this screen Generic help is available within any help screen via the MORE HELP function F2 SERVICE is a multi level menu that permits access to all radio service alignments via the service screens A radio must be connected to the computer via the RIB before access will be permitted to the service screens All service screens access the codeplug directly therefore it is NOT necessary to read the codeplug data before using the service screens F3 GET SAVE is used to read codeplug data from a radio and or retrieve archived codeplug data from a diskette or hard disk for editing via the CHANGE VIEW function GET SAVE is also used to program edited codeplug data back into the radio or to create an archive file on a diskette or hard disk 68P81074C50 2 33 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS F4 CHANGE VIEW is a multi level menu that is used to change view or modify codeplug features and option configurations All radio codeplug parameters are classified as either RADIO WIDE CO
341. their associated names or aliases The ID entries in this table are stored in the radio and made available to the radio user in Selective Call or Call Alert operation For radio models capable of supporting multiple MDC Systems the Call list defined here is made available to all MDC Systems An MDC Call ID is either an Individual Call ID or a Group Call ID The RSS interprets each entry which begins with the hexadecimal digit as a Group ID Call IDs beginning with a digit other than are treat as Individual IDs NOTES A Call ID preceded by the hexadecimal digit E is interpreted by the RSS as a Group ID IDs of the form Exxx where x implies any hex digit should therefore be avoided for Individual Primary ID specification Note also that the digit F serves as a wildcard so it can be strategically placed in a Call ID to make it match other Call IDs thus creating the effect of a group ID FFFF for instance would specify all radios in system PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears Press F6 The CONVENTIONAL MENU appears Press F4 The MDC CONFIGURATION MENU screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 2 3 4 Press F4 The CALL LIST TABLE screen appears 5 6 If a field is selected press the UP DOWN arrow keys to select choice or value 6 114 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1
342. this code should be avoided if possible A 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS APPENDIX B APPENDIX B TPL FREQUENCIES AND CODES TABLE FREQUENCY Hz CODE FREQUENCY Hz CODE 68P81074C50 B 1 MTSX RSS APPENDIX B APPENDIX B CONT DPL CODES TABLE CODE CODE B 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS APPENDIX C APPENDIX C MTSX FEATURES CONVENTIONAL SIGNALLING SYSTEM FEATURES MDC 1200 DTMF DTMF PHONE DATA OPERATED SQUELCH RADIO CHECK EMERGENCY VOICE SELECTIVE EMERGENCY REVERT MEMORY DIAL 19 NUMBERS LAST NUMBER DIAL 19 ACCESS DE ACCESS CODES IMMEDIATE DELAYED ACCESS LIVE BUFFERED DIALING NOTE Access to many of these features will be model dependent 68P81074C50 C 1 MTSX RSS APPENDIX C APPENDIX C CONT FEATURE TYPE TYPE Il FEATURE TYPE TYPE Il PRIORITY MONITOR SUBFLEET SCAN MAN DOWN UNIVERSAL ID FAILSOFT PTT ID EMERGENCY ALARM CALL AFFILIATION ENCODE DECODE ENCODE DECODE DYNAMIC PRIVATE CALL REGROUPING ENCODE DECODE ENCODE CALL ALERT DECODE RADIO INHIBIT ENCODE DECODE PHONE INTERCONNECT ENCODE DECODE AMSS HOT KEYPAD SMARTZONE STATUS MESSAGE TALKGROUP SCAN GROUP ENCODE PRIVACY NOTE Access to many of these features will be model dependent C 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS APPENDIX C APPENDIX C CONT RADIO WIDE FEATURES F3 Selectable Keypad Mute Alert Tones Block Pending CA PC Codepl
343. tings 68P81074C50 4 11 SERVICE MTSX RSS 4 2 1 6 TRANSMIT VCO CROSSOVER ALIGNMENT RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows To Adjust Softpot MTSX Model CROSSOVER VCO CROSSOVER Current New Frequency Frequency 486 0250 486 0250 Transmitter F1 F2 4 5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TOGGLE PROGRAM EXIT PTT VALUE Refer to your radio service manual for the transmit VCO crossover alignment procedure This procedure should only be performed by qualified service personnel Transmit deviation limit alignment is a way of correcting for deviation sensitivity versus RF frequency variations in the VCO The transmit and receive bands are divided into frequency zones with a calibration point value in each zone Compensation for each of these points must be checked and adjusted if the VCO is replaced PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F2 at the MAIN MENU The SERVICE MENU appears Press F2 The TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU appears Press F7 The TRANSMIT VCO CROSSOVER screen appears Press Tab to select the desired field or press the desired function key F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F6 TOGGLE PTT function will alternately key and dekey the radio being serviced F8 PROGRAM VAL
344. to advance to Personality Number field Repeat steps 6 and 7 for additional Channel numbers Press F4 to go Next Zone Press F10 to exit to Change View Menu 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 3 14 Fill in the Scan List Now that the Zone Channel features are programmed we will fill in the scan list Table 3 21 Steps to Fill in the Scan List Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to Radio Wide Configuration From the Change View menu press F3 to see menu the Radio Wide Configuration Menu Go to Scan List Press F5 to see Scan List screen If 1 is not already displayed for Scan List number press F3 to see previous list If 1 is displayed proceed ahead Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the Zone Members field of Scan List Member 1 Select the desired zone Press up down arrow keys to select desired zone or enter zone number via the keyboard Go to Channel field Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the Channel field Enter channel number desired Press up down arrow keys to select desired to scan channel or enter channel number via the keyboard Repeat steps 4 through 6 until desired channels are entered If you have created more than 1 Scan List repeat entire table for each scan list Exit to MAIN MENU Press Esc to exit to MAIN MENU 68P81074C50 3 23 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 3 15 Program Data Into Radio Codeplug Now that you have set values for all the f
345. to each system or personality and the ones that are common to all First we ll program the common radio wide features Note that some Screens are not accessed leaving many parameters at factory default values which are suitable in most cases 68P81074C50 3 17 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 3 9 Steps to Assign Controls At the Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu we will assign button and switch functions Table 3 16 Steps to Assign Button and Switch Functions Instruction What to Type How to do it What it Means Go to CHANGE VIEW menu Press F4 at the MAIN MENU to see the CHANGE VIEW Menu Go to Radio Wide At the CHANGE VIEW menu press F3 to see the Configuration Menu Radio Wide Configuration Menu Go to Radio Wide Features Press F3 to see Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu Configuration Menu Go to Radio Wide Button Press F2 to see Radio Wide Button Configuration Configuration screen Screen The Orange Button Conventional Feature will be highlighted Go to 16 Pos Rotary field Pressing Tab advances the prompt to the next field Select Chan Sub Select Press up down arrow keys to select Chan Sub Select for Conventional and Trunking columns Exit to Radio Wide Features Press F10 to return to Radio Wide Features Configuration Menu Configuration Menu Go to Radio Wide Switch Press F3 to see Radio Wide Switch Configuration Configuration screen Screen The Two Position Concentric field C
346. tor Private Call Monitor Phone Toggle Switch PL Disable Zone Select Zone Select Menu Item 1 Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Menu Item 2 Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Menu Item 3 Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Menu Item 4 Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported 68P81074C50 3 29 TUTORIAL MTSX RSS 3 5 1 MTS 2000 Radio Button Switch Menu Item Defaults Table 3 28 MTS2000 RADIO BUTTON SWITCH MENU ITEM DEFAULTS OPTION H35 OPTION H36 OPTION H37 OPTION H38 CONV ONLY STARTSITE SMARTNET SMARTZONE FRONT DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY FRONT DISPLAY MODELS MODELS MODELS MODELS Orange Button Unprogrammed Vol Set Emergency Vol Set Emergency Rotary Switch Channel Sel Channel Subfieet Sel Channel Subfieet Sel Channel Subfleet Sel Side Button 1 Light Light Side Button 2 Unprogrammed Unprog Phone Unprog Phone Unprog Site Disp Src Side Button 3 Monitor Private Call Monitor Private Call Monitor Phone Toggle Switch PL Disable PL Disable Blank PL Disable Blank Disable Blank Menu Item 1 ZONE ZONE SYS ZONE SYS ZONE SYS Menu Item 2 PROG PROG PAGE PROG PAGE PROG PAGE Menu Item 3 MUTE MUTE PROG MUTE PROG MUTE PROG Menu Item 4 NONE MUTE NONE MUTE NONE MUTE Menu Item 5 Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported NONE CALL 3 30 68P81074C50 SECTION 4 SERVICE MENU FUNCTIONS 4 1 RADIO
347. ture you want to program into the radio Traveling from one RSS menu or screen to another is similar to the way a car must use the road system to drive to the other side of a lake instead of flying directly as a plane would To move forward from one screen to another use one of the F keys until you ve reached the menu that contains the other screen you want To back up use the F10 key Each time you press F10 you retreat to the previous screen or menu moving closer to the MAIN MENU 2 24 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS GETTING STARTED F1 GET GHANG PRINT FILE FLASHPORT EXIT TO HELP SERVICE SOGRA VEW MENU MAINTENANCE UPGRADE SETUR DOS F2 Create Directory Path Refer to the following page F5 Delete Archive File F3 PC f Configuration F2 Reading Codeplug Data From the Radio F3 Reading Codeplug Data From an Archive File id Sie F4 TCMS Merge F5 Radio Cloning F2 View Radio Configuration F7 Saving Codeplug Data to an Archive File F3 View FLASHkey Configuration F8 Programming the Radio s Codeplug F8 Upgrade Radio F9 Programming History F2 Transmit Alignment Menu F3 F4 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Receive Alignment Menu F2 Front End Filter Alignment F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Signalling Alignment Menu F2 DTMF Transmit Deviation F3 Transmit Signalling High Speed F4 Transmit Signalling MDC 1200 Reference Oscillator Alignmen
348. u 68P81074C50 7 3 PRINT MTSX RSS 7 1 2 TRUNKING MENU RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN PRINT TRUNKING TRUNKING MENU HELP Trunking Radio Wide Options Trunking Systems System ID Control Channels etc Trunking Personality Talkgroups Emergency Options etc Trunking Call List Data Exit Return to Print Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK EXIT WIDE OPT SYS PERS LIST FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F2 TRUNK WIDE OPT provides information about options which are applicable to all trunking operations regardless of system type F3 TRUNK SYS allows you to print the trunking system screen F4 TRUNKING PERSONALITY allows you to print the trunking personality and talkgroups F5 TRUNK ID LIST allows you to print the screen which documents the trunking call lists F10 EXIT returns you to the Print Menu 7 4 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS PRINT 7 1 3 CONVENTIONAL MENU F6 RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press Tli MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select Function F1 F10 MTSX Model MAIN PRINT CONV CONVENTIONAL MENU HELP Conventional Radio Wide Configuration Conventional Personalities Options MDC Systems Options Auxiliary Systems EXIT F2 F3 F4 F7 CONV CONV MDC AUX WIDEOPT PE
349. u Item 3 Not Supported ZONE SYS NOTES Menu Items only apply to front display radios and are accessed with the arrow keys on the radio keypad A table of all allowable button functions can be seen on pages 6 15 and 6 16 A table of all allowable Menu Items functions can be seen on pages 6 20 and 6 21 3 4 68 81074 50 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL TWO POSITION CONCENTRIC LED SWITCH INDICATOR THREE POSITION ABC TOGGLE SWITCH ORANGE BUTTON TOP VIEW ON OFF VOLUME 16 POSITION CONTROL ROTARY SWITCH SIDE BUTTON 1 SIDE BUTTON 2 SIDE BUTTON 3 MONITOR PUSH TO TALK BUTTON LEFT SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW Figure 3 1 Button Locator Diagram Button Location Purposes Only 68P81074C50 3 5 MTSX RSS TUTORIAL 3 2 6 Read Current Radio s Personality Codeplug Before we can program the MT2000 radio with some features we must read and access the current radio s personality codeplug data Table 3 4 Steps to Read A Radio s Personality Codeplug Instruction What to Type What it Does or Means 1 Goto GET SAVE menu Press F3 at the MAIN MENU to get to the GET SAVE Menu At the GET SAVE menu press F2 to execute the 2 Get current radio s codeplug function You will also see an indication of how data much of the radio codeplug has been read 3 27 Program the Radio Wide Features First After the MT2000 radio s codeplug data is read the RSS allows
350. ual ID Failsoft Type Talk Permit Tone Call Alert Private Call Conversation Type Message Transmission PTT ID Talkgroups Status Message Access Type Fast Slow 20 Channel Synthesized Emergency Parameters TX OX X X X X X X X X X X X X x x x ox xxx TX X X X X X X X X X x xx NOTE All function key references are from the Change View Menu m 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS APPENDIX C APPENDIX C CONT FEATURE CONVENTIONAL TYPE TYPE II MDC TRUNKING TRUNKING F6 F3 F4 F4 F4 F4 BY SYSTEM FEATURES System ID X System Type I Il Ili System ID Aliasing Individual ID Universal ID Connect Tone Coverage Type Affiliation Type Tx Power Repeater Offset Channel Assignment Type Int l Domestic Splinter Channel Phone DTMF Timing Hot Keypad DTMF Timing Status Message Aliasing PTT ID Enable Sidetone Enable Radio Check Enable Emergency Type Parameters Emergency Revert Table Definition MDC Timing Parameters DOS Parameters Sel Call Reset Parameters gt lt X X X X X X AX OX X X X X NOTE All function key references are from the Change View Menu 68P81074C50 5 TRUNKED RADIO PERSONALITY CHART FEATURE Pers 1 Pers2 NAME 0902018489 SSH XSLIN r 08 powerteve _ NS HER Interconnect a xiaNa3ddv Scan List
351. uere b deu Pede te acp patat anat F4 F6 F3 F7 Call Alert EricOde eee ie Ai itive tail eA aia ee eet ee F4 F6 F3 F7 Gall Alert Operatii iiiter tiet tete Sa eterne atti Vende ceed aate ae aee F4 F4 F4 Call ID PEDE F4 F4 F5 baa aber fede tne sects Duct ists eet s ened astu gue Spe tear etie pe tec cene gati beets F4 F6 F4 F4 ec BbENC MICE F4 F4 F4 Gall T F4 F4 F5 TE F4 F4 F5 Call TON 2 F4 F6 F4 F4 Carrier Detect Required necir piini F4 F3 F5 F8 5 Type 4 4 9 Ghannel Assgn Type rci p t e etra pee cial aval F4 F6 F3 F9 Channel Bandwidth nice id etit Ceu cuit eda enda F4 F4 F3 F9 Channel Clhiange ID zucca e eave eel ead ain We ee F4 F3 F2 Channel Change Id uiia t Ee by ded etant baeo Uv ien nas a E diane itt weeds F8 F2 F7 Channel Changed uii actor gt ce bad pete Le dett du ede deat Mae ation F8 F3 F5 F9 Channel Delay eo edite ao aan aag F4 F3 F2 F7 Channel Spacing ae EE F2 F2 F6 5 EE F4 F6 F3 F9 Channel Text SIZ6 ceto ed es d cad Ere nie le Rieti F4 F3 F6 GOast TMG Iris deci eae F4 F6 F4 F3 F9 Coast TIME ms ose ra aii dine dara i
352. ug Self Test Rotary Switch Function in Scan Programming Low Battery Parameters Short Long Keypress Duration Radio to Radio Cloning Time Out Timer Values Emergency Silent Alarm Emergency Channel Delay Mandown Pre Post Alert Button Functions Switch Functions Menu Item List Functions Radio Lock Display Scrolling and Name Size Option Display Backlight Scan List Creation Xx X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X FEATURE CONVENTIONAL TRUNKING F6 F2 F4 F2 TRUNKING WIDE FEATURES Telephone Interconnect Half Full Duplex Call Alert PC Response ISW Window Adjust Auto Dial Holdoff CONVENTIONAL WIDE FEATURES Monitor Type Monitor Latch Parameters Smart PTT Parameters Hub Defects PL NOTE All function key references are from the Change View Menu 68P81074C50 C 3 MTSX RSS APPENDIX C APPENDIX C CONT FEATURE CONVENTIONAL TRUNKING F6 F3 FA FA BY PERSONALITY FEATURES X Mode Name Assigned on Zone Channel screen Rx Frequency Tx Frequency Rx Squelch Type Rx Squelch Code Tx Squelch Type Tx Squelch Code Talkaround Direct Smart PTT Choose Scan List Hot Keypad Tx Power Level For Applicable Bands MDC Signalling System Tx Deviation Phone Operation DTMF Timing Parameters Auto Scan Mute Unmute Options Choose Time Out Timer Value Squelch Fine Tune Channel Spacing Pre De emphasis Trunking System Trunking Individ
353. ummarizes the individual ID information for both MDC and Trunking so that it can be changed from one convenient screen Conventional radios may be cloned completely Trunking radios may only be cloned if you have a system key for every trunking system in the codeplug PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F3 at the MAIN MENU The GET SAVE PROGRAM MENU appears 2 Press F5 The TRUNKED CLONING screen appears 3 Select the desired function key F1 F10 Full Cloning System keys for all Trunked Systems in the radio are required to perform a full clone Follow the steps below for Full Cloning procedures 1 Use the GET SAVE functions to read F3 F2 the radio codeplug to be cloned That is the source codeplug An archive file may also be used as the source codeplug 2 Enterthe serial number of the radio to be cloned on the TRUNKED CLONING screen or press F2 to read the serial number from the connected radio System keys are required to change the serial number 3 Change the trunking individual IDs to those required by the new radio on this screen If MDC IDs are used also they can be changed on the MDC ID screen by pressing F3 4 Connect the target radio to the computer and press the F8 function key to program the source codeplug into the target radio 68P81074C50 5 7 GET SAVE PROGRAM MTSX RSS Limited Cloning A limited clone may be used when all the system keys required to perform a full clone are not available
354. ur computer type and the size of the codeplug you are reading The status of the READ operation is displayed at the bottom of the screen After completion of the read operation data validation occurs During this step data merges formats and screen interdependencies are checked GET ARCHIVE function is used to retrieve an archive file from a diskette or hard disk to the computer Once retrieved the file may be modified via the CHANGE VIEW functions or programmed into a radio just as codeplug information read from the radio via the F2 READ function F4 MERGE is used to update the codeplug information with trunking information from the TCMS Trunking Code Management System The required changes must first be entered into the TCMS database through a TCMS terminal then downloaded using a modem and the TCMS On Line Field Programming OFP software package F5 CLONE RADIO is used to copy codeplug information from one radio to another radio Only radios with the same model number may be cloned The screen summarizes the individual ID information for both MDC and Trunking so that it can be changed from one convenient screen Trunked radios may not be cloned unless System Keys have been loaded for each trunking system ID F7 SAVE ARCHIVE function is used to create or update an archive copy of the codeplug information onto a diskette or hard disk An archive copy of every radio installed or serviced is STRONGLY recommended in order t
355. values from 1 to 255 are allowed This field dictates the maximum amount of uninterrupted time spent in Release Squelch Mode When this time duration expires Release Squelch Mode will be exited and Quik Call II Squelch Mode will be entered The Factory Default is 5 sec Decoder 1 Call Type Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections This field dictates the Decoder 1 Call Type to be used Individual or Group The Factory Default is Individual 6 122 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW Decoder 2 Call Type Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections This field dictates the Decoder 2 Call Type to be used Individual or Group The Factory Default is Group Decoder Option Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections This field controls the number of decoders 1 or 2 and the decode sequences to be used on this Quik Call Il System This field controls the number of decoders 1 or 2 and the decode sequences to be used on this Quik Call Il System The Factory Default is 1 A B Available selections include The factory default is 1 A B Codes Use the Up Down arrows to scroll through the available selections or directly enter the desired value Codes vary depending on the Signalling System Type This field contains a code that represents a Quik Call Il Tone frequency Codes vary depending on the Signalling System Type selected The Factory Default is Code A B C or D
356. ver etel ede witli F5 PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG F3 F5 F3 F8 PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG sss d anaapa daR A enean F3 F5 F4 F8 PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG is teet oer pee teet eae diae duode a eu Ree ds F3 F5 F8 PROGRAM RADIO CODEPLUG inneren rennen nnns tennis F3 F8 PROGRAMMING HISTORY riii nte e edocet toad s qp LE RO aa RR daa a e Ded VERE rng uada F3 F9 PT Ro Rr F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 PTT DTME Gode ee el Bee t veiw tu tut Que ee Sate eA eee F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 PT Dic LEEREN F4 F6 F3 PTT AD Sidetone ie Hte coner toe pite Lote rdg deve awh ei dug F4 F6 F7 F5 Vaio F4 F6 F7 F5 PTT MDG Repeater Dirinonn coe ki aee eines F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 alie sees P F4 F6 F7 F2 PTT Singletone Hz atio erue dated reais ie a eed F4 F6 F3 F9 F7 PT FeID SIG tOnes x atte rr Renee tec eite F4 F6 F4 F3 EEUU F4 F3 F6 Periodic Keyfail Alert TONG nennen nnne nennen innen F4 F3 F2 F6 Phone DTMF Timing 2 rcg een ancy Hina ede ach lalate cated D rd da cue e Ea d atin D F4 F4 F3 F9 ES F4 F3 F4 F9 Phone InterconnG Ch eS F4 F4 F4 Phone Num Display Format nennen nennt nennen F4 F3 F4 Phone Numba S F4 F3 F4 a a te dete rhe
357. will remain deleted until scan is stopped When scan is started again all channels which were previously deleted will be replaced Factory default is Enabled Priority Scan Alert If this option is enabled the radio will audibly alert the user when it unmutes on a priority channel while scanning One beep is generated for the priority talkgroup in a trunked scan list or for the first priority channel in a conventional scan list Two beeps are generated for the second priority channel in a conventional scan list Factory default is Disabled Rx Hold Time sec This is the amount of time the radio remains on a channel after a message has been received before scanning resumes Valid entries are 0 to 255 seconds in 1 second increments Factory default is 3 seconds HUB Suspends Scan Use the UP DOWN arrow keys to Enable Disable the HUB Suspends Scan feature HUB Suspends Scan will determine if the scan operation will be suspended while the microphone is removed from the hang up box If HUB Suspends Scan is enabled scan operation will be suspended while the microphone is removed from the hang up box This will allow the user to complete a conversation while scan is suspended For portables this option is applicable when a Vehicular Adapter is used The factory default is Disabled Carrier Detect Required When this option is enabled the priority channels will stop on carrier squelch detect but only unmute on the standard signaling conditions progra
358. word Length eee ue e e ec cha F4 F3 F6 Maximum Channels F4 F3 F2 E ee aes Lettie dali da es dee F4 F4 F4 as F4 F6 F4 F3 Message Alias Number creer a oec ceo ia v ce F4 F4 F3 F9 F7 Message Alias Number F4 F6 F8 Message Alias Text 2 ettet ode Lor ee cipe neu Eae eee vive dde Dv E a ne a age F4 F4 F3 F9 F7 Message Allas Text eene tee tu a desee ed E A co ER gne re US F4 F6 F8 Message Allasirig nec eene eoe vod ve ellc dece kc dla e e ue E dc dd F4 F4 F3 F9 PES F4 F3 F2 F9 Min Alert Tone VolUMe 4 2 68 81074 50 INDEX 5 MTSX RSS KEY MENU INDEX Di fere 3 B NUMDG aec ETE F3 F5 F3 F7 Model inlet DE F3 F5 F4 F7 Model gt a t fece det e e Sav e Er F3 F5 F7 Model Numbers tec ir x te de treten Literae aaa ec alah F3 F5 F8 Model INU MD Gece aceasta re et vac Geet oc ph vi esas eee ete Ce ette he erit castes F3 F7 Model Numb iiir er D aere ee dee ea de x oa a ee ee F3 F9 Model N rb6r etate bet wieder Pee ERE eot lea uerb Deu foa a
359. y F1 F10 If a field is selected press the up down arrow keys to select choice or value FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time Fields are defined on the following page 6 26 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW FIELD DEFINITIONS Phone Dialing This field sets the dial operation of the phone option The dialing options are Immediate Live Connects when entering phone mode live dial Immediate Buffered Connects when entering phone mode buffered dial Delayed Buffered Connects when PTT is pressed buffered dial Immediate access and delayed access both automatically connect the radio to the system Immediate access connects when entering phone mode while delayed access connects when the PTT is pressed Buffered dialing lets the user put the phone number in the radio then push PTT to send the phone number Live dialing lets the user enter the numbers while transmitting Digit Hangtime ms This field specifies the amount of time the radio continues transmitting after completion of a DTMF digit transmission Range is 25 to 6375 ms in 25 ms increments Factory default is 1 second 1000 ms Initial Delay ms This field allows you to select the length of time the carrier is transmitted before starting to transmit DTMF digits Valid selections are 0 to 6375 ms
360. y The read process will be displayed on the screen 68P81074C50 2 35 GETTING STARTED MTSX RSS 2 13 SETUP CONFIGURATION RSS LOCATION At the MAIN MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software MTSX Model MAIN CONFIGURATION SERVICE SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION HELP PC CONFIGURATION Drives Paths Ports etc SCREEN Color Configuration Exit Return to Main Menu F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP CONFIGURE SCREEN EXIT PC COLORS The Setup Computer Configuration screen is accessed by pressing F9 at the MAIN MENU From this screen you may set up the paths for the archive file You may also setup the serial port COM 1 or COM 2 that will be used to communicate with the radio FUNCTION KEY DESCRIPTIONS F1 HELP provides useful information about the currently displayed menu screen or field F3 CONFIGURE PC is used to set default disk drive paths for archive files and backup files It is also used to select which asynchronous communications port COM 1 or COM 2 the RIB will be connected to The radio service software will automatically determine at what clock speed the computer is operating on No user selectable parameters are required F7 SCREEN COLORS is used to enable the color display option The standard default configuration for Radio Service Software is for a monochrome display monitor However if the computer is capable of color display the viewing quality is greatly enhanced Refer to your comput
361. y avoid entering a password by changing it to NULL See Radio Operator s Manual Factory default is Disabled Max Password Length This is the maximum length a password is allowed to have The radio uses this value only when the password function is enabled on a button This field is only applicable when the Radio Lock feature is enabled Valid entries are 1 to 8 characters Factory default is 8 Password When this field is selected you would enter your password up to 8 characters Enter the numeric Password directly from the keyboard The password is the numeric value which must be entered when the radio is turned on when the radio lock feature is Enabled The factory Default is NULL 6 36 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS CHANGE VIEW 6 2 1 5 1 RADIO WIDE DISPLAY MORE OPTIONS F3 F6 F9 RSS LOCATION At the CHANGE VIEW MENU press Meli AN Hel MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Use UP DOWN Arrows to Select Choice MTSX Model CONFIG DISP DATA MORE OPTIONS RADIO WIDE DISPLAY MORE OPTIONS Caller ID F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HELP EXIT This screen permits modification of display options to customize the radio to specific user applications The features and options shown here apply to all systems and personalities PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 1 Press F4 at the MAIN MENU The CHANGE VIEW MENU appears 2 Press F3 The RADIO WIDE CONFIGURATION MENU appears 3 Press F6 The RADIO WIDE DISPLAY OPTIONS screen appears 4 Pr
362. y of the modulation circuitry has been replaced the following alignment procedures must be performed Modulation Balance Modulation Limit VCO Attenuator Modulation Limit Reference Attenuator In addition all signaling modulation limit alignments DTMF MDC SingleTone Secure and High Speed Trunking Data should be checked F3 RX ALIGN Receiver Alignment function is used to perform standard radio receive alignment procedures Refer to your radio service manual for receive alignment procedures These procedures should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Failure to perform alignment procedures properly may result in a seriously degraded radio or system performance F4 SIGNAL ALIGN Signalling Alignment Refer to your radio service manual for signalling alignment procedures These procedures should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Failure to perform alignment procedures properly may result in a seriously degraded radio or system performance F10 EXIT moves the display backward in the RSS tree one screen or menu at a time 4 2 68P81074C50 MTSX RSS SERVICE 4 2 1 TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU F2 RSS LOCATION At the SERVICE MENU press MOTOROLA Radio Service Software Select a Function F1 F10 MTSX Model SERVICE TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU TRANSMITTER ALIGNMENT MENU HELP Reference Oscillator Tx Power Tx Deviation Balance Compensation Tx Deviation Limit Tx Deviation Limit Re
363. ystems should be set for fast access Type Ili radios which have to communicate on systems with slow radios should be set to slow access Emergency Call Emergency Call gives the operator priority to enable the Emergency Call option The Emergency Call condition is entered by pressing a button configured to initiate emergency All subsequent PTT transmissions while in the CALL state will be made with high priority access to a voice channel Emergency Alarm and Emergency Call may both be enabled in which case the Call state is entered when PTT is pressed Factory default is Disabled Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm allows the operator to press the Emergency button to send an alarm to the dispatcher Emergency Alarm is a coded transmission made on the control channel in response to pressing a button configured to initiate an emergency These alarm transmissions will be sent until the control channel acknowledges the alarm the console dispatcher acknowledges the alarm if console ack is enabled or the alarm retry counter is exhausted If normal alarm operation is selected the display will flash emergency and valid key chirp will be heard when the alarm condition is entered Four good beeps will be heard when the alarm condition has been acknowledged If silent alarm is selected there will be no display or audible indication when the alarm condition is entered nor will there be any indication of alarm acknowledgement Also the radio will mute th

Alamo Swingtrim Lawn Mower User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents